OWNER’S
MANUAL
Ibiza
6J0012720BC
Inglés
6J0012720BC (11.14) (GT9)
Ibiza Inglés (11.14)
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-
stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.14
About this manual
This manual contains a description of the
equipment supplied with the vehicle at the
time this manual was published. Some of the
units described herein will not be available
until a later date or are only available in cer-
tain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the IBIZA
range, some of the equipment and functions
that are described in this manual are not in-
cluded in all types or variants of the model;
they may vary or be modified depending on
the technical requirements and on the mar-
ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising.
The illustrations are intended as a general
guide and may vary from the equipment fitted
in your vehicle in some details.
The steering indications (left, right, forward,
reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the
normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-
cept when otherwise indicated.
*
The equipment marked with an aster-
isk* is fitted as standard only in certain
versions, and is only supplied as op-
tional extras for some versions, or are
only offered in certain countries.
® All registered marks are indicated with
®. Although the copyright symbol does
not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
>> The section is continued on the follow-
ing page.
Important warnings on a given page
Detailed contents on a given page
General information on a given page
Emergency information on a given page
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-
mation on safety. They warn you about possi-
ble dangers of accident or injury.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to
potential sources of damage to your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-
vant information concerning environmental
protection.
Note
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-
nal information.
This manual is divided into five large parts,
which are:
1. Safety
2. Operation
3. Tips
4. Technical data
5. Alphabetical index
At the end of this manual, there is a detailed
alphabetical index that will help you quickly
find the information you require.
Foreword
This Instruction Manual and its correspond-
ing supplements should be read carefully to
familiarise yourself with your vehicle.
Besides the regular care and maintenance of
the vehicle, its correct handling will help pre-
serve its value.
For safety reasons, always note the informa-
tion concerning accessories, modifications
and part replacements.
If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board
documentation to the new owner, as it
should be kept with the vehicle.
You can access the information in this man-
ual using:
●
Thematic table of contents that follows the
manual’s general chapter structure.
●
Visual table of contents that uses graphics
to indicate the pages containing “essential”
information, which is detailed in correspond-
ing chapters.
●
Alphabetical index with many terms and
synonyms to help you find information.
WARNING
Read and always observe safety informa-
tion concerning the passenger's front air-
bag ››› page 47, Important information
on the front passenger airbag.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
The essentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Multi-function display (MFA)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Gear lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Action in the event of a puncture . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Safety first! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . 30
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
The reasons why we should wear seat belts . . 34
How to properly adjust your seatbelt . . . . . . . . 37
Belt pretensioners* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Airbag overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Transporting children safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Digital instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Communications and multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Steering column controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Bluetooth System* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Radio frequency remote control* . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Boot hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Panoramic tilting sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper
systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Adjusting the seat and head restraints . . . . . . 100
Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . . . . 104
Practical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Roof carrier system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Automatic gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Run-in and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Braking and stability systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Start-Stop System* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Cruise speed* (cruise control system - CCS) . . . 150
Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Fitting a towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Accessories and modifications to the vehicle . 155
Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Caring for the vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 166
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
3
Table of Contents
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Towing or tow starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Emergency locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . 192
Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Single headlight bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Double headlight bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
AFS headlight bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Changing the fog light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Changing the rear bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Changing the tail light bulbs (on the side
panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Changing the tail light bulbs (on the rear lid) . 205
Changing the side and interior bulbs . . . . . . . . 206
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Technical features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
4
The essentials
Exterior view
Fig. 1
»
5
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
The essentials
Fig. 2
6
The essentials
Interior view
Fig. 3 Left hand drive
»
7
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
The essentials
Fig. 4 Right hand drive
8
The essentials
How it works
Unlocking and locking
Doors
Fig. 5
Fig. 6 See Fig. 3 for positioning
Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the
key
●
Locking: press the ››› Fig. 5
button.
●
Un
loc
king: press the ››› Fig. 5 button.
●
Unlocking the rear lid: press the
››› Fig. 5 button until all the turn signals on
the vehicle briefly light up.
Locking and unlocking with the central
locking switch
●
Locking: press the ››› Fig. 6 button. None
of the doors can be opened from the outside.
The doors can be opened from the inside by
pulling the inside door handle.
●
Unlocking: press the ››› Fig. 6 button.
››› in Set of keys on page 83
››› page 78
Rear lid
Fig. 7
●
Opening the rear lid: Pull on the release
lever and lift it up ››› Fig. 7. The rear lid opens
automatically.
●
Closing the rear lid: Hold it by one of the
handles on the interior lining and close it by
pushing gently.
››› in Unlocking and locking on
page 87
››› page 86
››› page 192
9
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
The essentials
Bonnet
Fig. 8 See Fig. 3 for positioning
Fig. 9
●
Opening the bonnet: Pull the lever under
the dashboard ››› Fig. 8
1
.
●
Lifting up the bonnet: press the release
catch under the bonnet upwards ››› Fig. 9
2
.
The arrester hook under the bonnet is re-
leased.
●
The bonnet can be opened. Release the
bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de-
signed for this in the bonnet.
››› in Safety instructions on working in
the engine compartment on page 166
››› page 166
Electric windows*
Fig. 10 See Fig. 3 for positioning
●
Opening the window: Press the button.
●
Closing the window: Pull the button.
Buttons on the driver door
Window on the front left door
Window on the front right door
1
2
Safety switch for deactivating the electric
window buttons on the rear doors (only 5-
door vehicles)
Window on the rear left door (only 5-door
vehicles)
Window on the right rear door (only 5-
door vehicles)
››› in Opening or closing the windows
electrically* on page 87
››› page 87
Sunroof*
Fig. 11
●
Opening: Press the ››› Fig. 11
A
button
once only. If you keep it pressed down, it will
open to the desired position.
3
4
5
10
The essentials
●
Closing: Press the ››› Fig. 11
B
button
once only. If you keep it pressed down, it will
close to the desired position.
Restoring one-touch opening and closing
●
Close the sunroof manually until it is com-
pletely closed. Release the button.
●
Press the closing button again, keeping it
pressed down, until a complete opening and
closing cycle has taken place.
››› in Opening or closing of the panor-
amic/tilting sunroof on page 89
››› page 89
Before driving
Deactivation of the front passenger
front airbag
Fig. 12
To deactivate the front passenger front
airbag:
●
Open the glove compartment on the front
passenger side.
●
Insert the key into the slot provided in the
deactivation switch.
●
Approximately ¾ of the length of the key
remains inserted (the maximum).
●
Turn the key, changing its position to .
Do not force it. If you have difficulty, ensure
that you have inserted the key as far as it will
go.
●
Finally, check the control lamp on the in-
strument panel where it shows
the following should appear .
››› in Front passenger airbag deactiva-
tion* on page 46
››› page 45
Manually adjusting the front seats
Fig. 13
Forward/back: pull the lever and move
the seat forwards or backwards.
Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever.
Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.
»
1
2
3
11
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
The essentials
Folding down the backrest (only 3-door
vehicles): pull the lever and push the
backrest forward.
››› in Adjusting the front seats on
page 100
Adjusting the head restraints
Fig. 14
Grab the sides of the head restraints with
both hands and push upwards to the desired
position. To lower it, repeat the same action,
pressing the
1
button on the side.
››› in Correct adjustment of front head
restraints on page 33, ›››
in Remov-
ing or adjusting head restraints on
page 101
››› page 32, ››› page 101
4
Adjusting the seat belt
Fig. 15
To adjust the seat belt around your should-
ers, adjust the height of the seats.
The shoulder part of the seat belt should be
well centred over it, never over the neck. The
seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the
upper part of the body.
The lap part of the seat belt lies across the
pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat
belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel-
vis.
››› in Fastening and unfastening your
seat belt on page 38
Exterior mirror adjustment
Fig. 16
Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob
to the corresponding position:
Turning the knob to the desired posi-
tion, adjust the mirrors on the driver
side (L, left) and the passenger side (R,
right) to the direction desired.
Folding in mirrors.
››› page 99
››› page 99
L/R
12
The essentials
Adjusting the rear view mirror
(automatic anti-dazzle function)*
Fig. 17
Switching on the automatic anti-dazzle func-
tion: press the
1
››› Fig. 17
button. The
2
warning lamp lights up and, in bright light,
the rear view mirror darkens.
Switching off the automatic anti-dazzle func-
tion: press the
1
››› Fig. 17
button. The
2
lamp goes off.
To adjust the mirror, turn it in the direction of
the arrows.
››› page 99
Steering wheel adjustment
Fig. 18
Adjusting the position of the steering wheel:
Pull the ››› Fig. 18
1
lever down, move the
steering wheel to the desired position and lift
the lever back up until it locks.
››› in Adjusting the steering wheel po-
sition on page 31
››› page 31
Starting the vehicle
Ignition lock
Fig. 19
Switch ignition on: Place the key in the igni-
tion and start the engine.
Locking and unlocking the steering wheel
●
Engaging the steering wheel lock: Remove
the key from the ignition and turn the wheel
until it locks. In vehicles with an automatic
gearbox, the gear lever must be in the P
posi-
tion in or
der t
o remove the key. If necessary,
press the locking key on the selector lever
and release it again.
●
Unlocking the steering wheel: Put the key
into the ignition and turn it at the same time
as the steering wheel in the direction indica-
ted by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn
the steering wheel, it may be because it is
locked.
»
13
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
The essentials
Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow
plugs reheating
●
Switch ignition on: Turn the key to the
2
position.
●
Switch ignition off. Turn the key to the
1
position.
●
Diesel vehicles
: The glow plugs reheat
when the ignition i
s
switched on
Starting the engine
●
Manual gearbox: press the clutch pedal all
the way down and move the gearbox lever in-
to neutral.
●
Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedal
and move the selector lever to the P position
or into N.
●
Turn the key to the
3
position. The key au-
tomatically returns to the
2
position. Do not
press the accelerator.
Start-Stop System*
When you stop and release the clutch pedal,
the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine.
The ignition remains switched on.
››› in Ignition key positions on
page 123
››› page 123
Lights and visibility
Headlight switch
Fig. 20
Turn the switch to the required position
››› Fig. 20
.
Sym-
bol
Ignition switch-
ed off
Ignition is switch-
ed on
Fog lights, dipped
beam and side
lights off.
Light off or daytime
driving light on.
The “Coming home”
and “Leaving
home” guide lights
may be switched
on.
Automatic control of
dipped beam and day-
time driving light.
Side light on.
Sym-
bol
Ignition switch-
ed off
Ignition is switch-
ed on
Dipped beam head-
light off
Dipped beam switch-
ed on.
Front fog lights: mov
e the switch to the
first position, from positions , or .
Rear fog light: move the switch completely
from positions , or .
Switching off fog lights: Push the switch or
turn it to the position.
››› in Switching lights on and off on
page 90
››› page 90
Turn signal and main beam lever
Fig. 21
14
The essentials
More the lever to the required position:
Right turn signal: Right-hand parking
light (ignition switched off).
Left turn signal: Left-hand parking light
(ignition switched off).
Main beam switched on: Control lamp
lit up on the instrument panel.
Headlight flasher: lit up when the lever is
pushed. Control lamp
lit up.
L
ev
er all the way down to switch it off.
››› in Turn signal and main beam head-
light lever on page 93
››› page 93
Hazard warning lights
Fig. 22
1
2
3
4
Switched on, for example:
●
When approaching a traffic jam
●
In an emergency
●
The vehicle has broken down
●
When towing or being towed
››› in Hazard warning lights
on
page 95
››› page 95
Interior lights
Fig. 23
Knob Function
Switches interior lights off.
Switches interior lights on.
Knob Function
Switches door contact control on (central po-
sition).
The interior lights come on automatically
when the vehicle is unlocked, a door is
opened or the key is removed from the igni-
tion.
The lights go off a few seconds after all the
doors are closed, the vehicle is locked or the
ignition is switched on.
Turning the reading light on and off
››› page 96
Windscreen wipers and rear window
wipers
Fig. 24
»
15
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
The essentials
More the lever to the required position:
0
Windscreen wiper off.
1
Windscreen wipers interval wipe.
Using the control ››› Fig. 24
A
adjust the
interval (vehicles without rain sensor), or
the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
2
Slow wipe.
3
Continuous wipe.
4
Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. Hold
the lever down for more time to increase
the wipe frequency.
5
Automatic wipe. The windscreen washer
function is activated by pushing the lever
forwards, and simultaneously the wind-
screen wipers start.
6
Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper
will wipe the window approximately every
six seconds.
7
The rear window wash function is activa-
ted by pressing the lever, and the rear wip-
er starts simultaneously.
››› in Front windscreen wipers
on
page 97
››› page 97
››› page 193
Multi-function display (MFA)*
Controlling the information system
Fig. 25
Managed from the windscreen wiper lever
››› Fig. 25
.
Pr
e
ss to select and confirm ››› Fig. 25
Press up or down to view the submenu
››› Fig. 25
››› in Multi-function display (MFI)* on
page 66
››› page 65
Memory displays
1
: Current memory
1
2
2
: Total memory
●
Driv
in
g speed
●
Journey duration
●
Average speed
●
Distance
●
Operating range
●
Average fuel consumption
●
Current fuel consumption
●
Outside temperature indicator
●
Speed warning
Cruise control
Operating the cruise control system
(CCS)*
Fig. 26
16
The essentials
●
Switching on the CCS: Move switch
››› Fig. 26
1
to
. The system is on. If no
s
peed has been programmed, the system will
not control it.
●
Activating the CCS: Press button ››› Fig. 26
2
in the
area. The current speed is
memori
sed and controlled.
●
Temporarily switching off the CCS: Move
switch ››› Fig. 26
1
to
or push the
br
ak
e. The cruise control system is switched
off temporarily.
●
Reactivating the CCS: Press button
››› Fig. 26
2
in
. The memorised speed
i
s saved and controlled again.
●
Increasing stored speed during CCS regula-
tion: press button
2
in
. The vehicle ac-
c
elerates until the new stored speed.
●
Reducing stored speed during CCS regula-
tion: press button
2
in
to lower the
s
peed by 1 km/h (1 mph). Speed is reduced
until reaching the new stored speed.
●
Switching off the CCS: Move switch
››› Fig. 26
1
to
. The system is disconnec-
t
ed and the memorised speed is deleted.
››› in Description on page 150
››› page 150
17
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
The essentials
Warning lamps
On the instrument panel
Fig. 27
Sym-
bol
Meaning of control and
warning lamps
Further in-
formation
Engine fault (petrol engine)
››› page
58
Glow plug system (diesel en-
gines)
If lit up: glow plug system ac-
tive
If flashing: engine fault
››› page
58
Soot accumulation in the die-
sel engine particulate filter
››› page
59
Sym-
bol
Meaning of control and
warning lamps
Further in-
formation
Red:
Engine oil pressure
››› page
59
Yellow:
If flashing: engine oil sensor
faulty
If it remains lit: insufficient
engine oil
Bulb defective
››› page
59
Sym-
bol
Meaning of control and
warning lamps
Further in-
formation
Level of liquid for washing
windows too low
››› page
59
Rear fog light switched on
››› page
59
Seat belt warning lamp*
››› page
35
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
*
››› page
59
18
The essentials
Sym-
bol
Meaning of control and
warning lamps
Further in-
formation
If flashing: the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) is working
or the ASR is working
If it remains lit: ESC or ASR
faulty
››› page
60
››› page
60
Brake fluid required or
serious fault in brake system
››› page
61
Handbrake on
››› page
126
Cruise speed activated
(Cruise control)
››› page
61
Tyre pressure
››› page
61
Selector lever lock (automatic
gearbox)
››› page
62
Fuel level / reserve
››› page
62
Doors open
››› page
62
Rear lid open
››› page
62
Airbag or belt tensioner sys-
tem fault or airbag disabled
››› page
42
Main beam switched on
››› page
62
Start-Stop system switched
off
››› page
142
Sym-
bol
Meaning of control and
warning lamps
Further in-
formation
Electro-hydraulic steering
››› page
62
Fault in the emission control
system
››› page
63
Coolant level / coolant tem-
perature
››› page
63
Alternator fault
››› page
63
If it stays lit: ASR switched off
››› page
60
››› page
60
Turn signals in operation
››› page
63
SAFE Electronic immobiliser
››› page
64
››› page
79
››› in Overview of the warning lamps
on page 57
››› page 57
Gear lever
Manual gearbox
Fig. 28
The position of the gears is indicated on the
gearbox lever ››› Fig. 28
.
●
Pr
e
ss the clutch pedal and keep your foot
right down.
●
Move the gearbox lever to the required po-
sition.
●
Release the clutch.
Selecting reverse gear
●
Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
right down.
●
With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it
upwards, move it to the left as far as it will go
and then forwards to select reverse ››› Fig. 28
R
.
»
19
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
The essentials
●
Release the clutch.
››› in Driving with a manual gearbox on
page 128
››› page 128
Automatic gearbox*
Fig. 29
Parking lock
Reverse gear
Neutral (idling)
Drive (forward)
Sport programme: drive (forward)
Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards
(
+
) to go up a gear or backwards (–
) to
go down a gear.
››› in Driving a car with an automatic
gearbox on page 131
››› page 129
››› page 192
P
R
N
D
S
+/–
20
The essentials
Air conditioning
How does Climatronic* work?
Fig. 30
Blower level indicator
Air recirculation display:
AUTO
indicator (automatic operation)
D
emi
sting indicator
A/C indicator (cooling connected)
Interior temperature indicator selected
Air flow direction indicator
Fan speed increase
Reducing blower speed and switching off
Climatronic.
Interior temperature increase
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Interior temperature decrease
AUTO button – Automatic adjustment of
temperature, ventilation and air distribu-
tion
Button
– Windscreen demisting func-
tion.
The air drawn in is directed at the
windscreen. The air recirculation mode
will be switched off as soon as the de-
misting function is switched on. At tem-
peratures over +3 °C (+37 °F) the cooling
system is switched on automatically in or-
der to dehumidify the air.
button – Air distribution to windscreen
11
12
13
14
Button
– Air distribution to the upper
body
B
utton – Air distribution to footwell
button – Manual air recirculation
mode
A/C button – To switch on the air condi-
tioning.
››› in Controls on page 121
››› page 121
15
16
17
18
21
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
The essentials
How does the manual air conditioning* work?
Fig. 31
Temperature
Blower
Air distribution
– Air distribution towards the wind-
s
c
reen in order to demist.
A
B
C
– Air distribution to upper body.
– Air di
s
tribution to footwell
– Air distribution to the windscreen
and the footwell.
Air recirculation
D
A/C: Switching the cooling system on
››› page 118
E
22
The essentials
How does the heating and the fresh air system work?
Fig. 32
Temperature
Blower
Air distribution
– Air distribution towards the wind-
s
c
reen in order to demist.
– Air distribution to upper body.
– Air distribution to footwell
– Air distribution to the windscreen
and the footwell.
Air recirculation
››› page 114
A
B
C
D
Level control
Fuel
Fig. 33
The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked
and locked automatically using the central
locking.
Opening the fuel tank cap
●
Open the flap.
●
Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.
●
Rest it on the upper part of the fuel tank
flap ››› Fig. 33
.
C
lo
sing the fuel tank cap
●
Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as
far as it will go.
●
Close the lid.
»
23
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
The essentials
››› in Refuelling on page 164
››› page 163
Oil
Fig. 34
Fig. 35
The level is measured using the dipstick loca-
ted in the engine compartment
›››
page 168
.
The oi
l
should leave a mark between zones
A
and
C
. It should never exceed zone
A
.
●
Zone
A
: Do not add oil.
●
Zone
B
: You can add oil but keep the level
in that zone.
●
Zone
C
: Add oil up to zone
B
.
Topping up engine oil
●
Unscrew cap from oil filler opening.
●
Add oil slowly.
●
At the same time, check the level to ensure
you do not add too much.
●
When the oil level reaches at least zone
B
,
unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully.
››› in Changing engine oil on page 171
››› page 168
Coolant
Fig. 36
The coolant tank is located in the engine
compartment ›››
page 168
.
When the en
gine i
s cold, replace the coolant
when the level is below .
››› in Engine coolant specifications on
page 172
››› page 171
24
The essentials
Brake fluid
Fig. 37
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-
gine compartment ›››
page 168.
The level should be between the and
marks. If it is below , please visit a Techni-
cal Service.
››› in Changing the brake fluid on
page 173
››› page 173
Windscreen washer
Fig. 38
The windscreen washer reservoir is located in
the engine compartment ›››
page 168.
To top up, mix water with a product recom-
mended by SEAT.
In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze.
››› in Topping up washer fluid on
page 174
››› page 174
Fuses
Fig. 39
Fig. 40
Opening and closing the fuse box situated
below the dash panel
●
Opening: remove the fuse box cover
››› Fig. 39
.
●
C
lo
sing: click the cover back into place.
»
25
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
The essentials
To open the engine compartment fuse box
●
Raise the bonnet.
●
Press the locking tabs to release the fuse
box cover ››› Fig. 40
●
Then lift the cover out.
●
To
fit
the cover, place it on the fuse box.
P
ush the locking tabs down until they click
audibly into place.
››› in Introduction on page 195
››› page 195
Battery
The battery is located in the engine compart-
ment ›››
page 168
. It does not require
m
aint
enance. It is checked as part of the In-
spection Service.
››› in Warnings on handling the battery
on page 174
››› page 174
Action in the event of a
puncture
With anti-puncture kit
Fig. 41
The anti-puncture kit is located under the
floor panel in the luggage compartment.
Sealing the tyre
●
Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use
the ››› Fig. 41
1
tool to remove the insert.
Place it on a clean surface.
●
Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously
››› Fig. 41
10
.
●
Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 41
3
into
the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break
automatically.
●
Remove the lid from the filling tube
››› Fig. 41
3
and screw the open end of the
tube into the tyre valve.
●
With the tyre sealant bottle upside down,
fill the tyre with the contents of the sealant
bottle.
●
Remove the bottle from the valve.
●
Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-
ing the tool ››› Fig. 41
1
.
Inflating the tyre
●
Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube
››› Fig. 41
5
into the tyre valve.
●
Check that the air bleed screw is closed
››› Fig. 41
7
.
●
Start the engine and leave it running.
●
Insert the connector ››› Fig. 41
9
into the
vehicle's 12-volt socket ›››
page 107.
●
Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF
switch ››› Fig. 41
8
.
●
Keep the air compressor running until it
reaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar
(29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8
minutes
.
●
Di
s
connect the air compressor.
●
If it does not reach the pressure indicated,
unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.
●
Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is
distributed throughout the tyre.
26
The essentials
●
Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the
valve.
●
Repeat the inflation process.
●
If the indicated pressure still cannot be
reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop
and request assistance from an authorised
technician.
●
Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew
the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.
●
When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and
2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding
80 km/h (50 mph).
●
Check the pressure again after 10 minutes
›››
page 188
.
››› in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* on
page 186
››› page 186
With a spare wheel
Fig. 42
Fig. 43
An adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
Towline anchorage
Box spanner for wheel bolts*
Jack*
Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cov-
ers*/wheel bolt cap clip.
1
2
3
4
5
●
Take out the spare wheel and the tools that
are located under the floor panel in the lug-
gage compartment.
●
Take out the wheel cover or the bolt caps.
●
Loosen the bolts with the box spanner (1
turn to the left).
●
Mount the jack on the support points de-
signed for this purpose on the strut
››› Fig. 43
.
●
R
ai
se the vehicle, turning the jack until it is
slightly lifted off the ground.
●
Unscrew the bolts completely and remove
the punctured wheel.
●
Put the spare wheel in place. Screw on the
bolts and tighten them loosely with the box
spanner.
●
Lower the vehicle with the jack. Finish tight-
ening the bolts with the box spanner.
››› in Preparation work on page 183
››› page 183
27
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
The essentials
Emergency towing of the
vehicle
Towing
Fig. 44
Fig. 45
The towline anchorages are located under
the floor panel in the luggage compartment.
Switch on the ignition so that the turn sig-
nals, windscreen wipers and windscreen
washer can work. Ensure that the steering
wheel is unlocked and moves freely.
Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles
with a manual gearbox. With an automatic
gearbox, place the lever in N.
To brake, press the brake pedal firmly. The
brake servo does not work when the engine
is switched off.
The power steering only works when the igni-
tion is switched on and the vehicle is moving.
Otherwise, it will need more force.
Tow rope or tow bar
The tow bar offers increased safety and a
lower risk of damage.
The tow rope is recommended when there is
no tow bar. It must be elastic so that it does
not damage the vehicle.
Towline anchorages
Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho-
rages.
It is located with the vehicle's tools
›››
page 182
.
Sc
r
ew the front towline anchorage into the
screw connection ››› Fig. 44 and tighten it
with the wheel brace. The rear towline an-
chorage is under the rear bumper, on the
right.
››› in Tow-starting* on page 190
››› page 190
28
Safe driving
Safety
Safe driving
Safety first!
This chapter contains important information,
tips, suggestions and warnings that you
should read and consider for both your own
safety and for your passengers' safety.
WARNING
●
This manual contains important informa-
tion about the operation of the vehicle, both
for the driver and the passengers. The other
sections of the on-board documentation also
contain further information that you should
be aware of for your own safety and for the
safety of your passengers.
●
Ensure that the on-board documentation is
kept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe-
cially important when lending or selling the
vehicle to another person.
Advice about driving
Before setting off
For your own safety and the safety of your
passengers, always note the following points
before every trip:
–
Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn
signals are working properly.
–
Check tyre pressure.
–
Ensure that all windows provide a clear and
good view of the surroundings.
–
Ensure that all luggage is correctly secured
››› page 108.
–
Make sure that no objects can interfere
with the pedals.
–
Adjust front seat, head restraint and rear vi-
sion mirrors properly according to your
size.
–
Ensure that the passenger in the central
rear seat always has the head restraint in
the correct position for use.
–
Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-
straints according to their height.
–
Protect children with appropriate child
seats and properly applied seat belts
››› page 46
.
–
As
s
ume the correct sitting position. Instruct
your passengers also to assume a proper
sitting position. ››› page 30.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your
passengers also to fasten their seat belts
properly.
›››
page 34.
What affects driving safety?
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself
and your passengers. When your concentra-
tion or driving safety is affected by any cir-
cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as
others on the road ››› , for this reason:
–
Always pay attention to traffic and do not
get distracted by passengers or telephone
calls.
–
Never drive when your driving ability is im-
paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).
–
Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
–
Always reduce your speed as appropriate
for road, traffic and weather conditions.
–
When travelling long distances, take
breaks regularly - at least every two hours.
–
If possible, avoid driving when you are tired
or stressed.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip,
the risk of injury and accidents increases.
Safety equipment
Never put your safety or the safety of your
passengers in danger. In the event of an acci-
dent, the safety equipment may reduce the
»
29
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Safety
risk of injury. The following list includes most
of the safety equipment in your SEAT:
●
Three-point seat belts
●
Belt tension limiter for the front and rear
side seats
●
Belt tensioners for the front seats
●
Front airbags
●
Side airbags in the front seat backrests,
with chest and head protection
●
“ISOFIX” anchor points for “ISOFIX” rear
child seat system
●
Height-adjustable front head restraints
●
Rear-centre head restraints with in-use po-
sition and non-use position
●
Adjustable steering column
The safety equipment mentioned above
works together to provide you and your pas-
sengers with the best possible protection in
the event of an accident. However, these
safety systems can only be effective if you
and your passengers are sitting in a correct
position and use this equipment properly.
Safety is everyone's business!
Proper sitting position for
occupants
Correct sitting position for driver
Fig. 46 The proper distance between driver
and steering wheel
Fig. 47 Correct head restraint position for the
driver.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accident, we recom-
mend the following adjustments for the driv-
er:
–
Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a
distance of at least 25 cm between the
steering wheel and the centre of your chest
››› Fig. 46
.
–
Mo
v
e the driver seat forwards or backwards
so that you are able to press the accelera-
tor, brake and clutch pedals to the floor
with your knees still slightly angled ›››
.
–
Ensure that you can reach the highest point
of the steering wheel.
–
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
edge is at the same level as the top of your
head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head ››› Fig. 47
.
–
Mo
v
e the seat backrest to an upright posi-
tion so that your back rests completely
against it.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 34.
–
Keep both feet in the footwell so that you
have the vehicle under control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver seat ››› page 100.
WARNING
●
An incorrect sitting position of the driver
can lead to severe injuries.
●
Adjust the driver seat so that there is at
least 25 cm distance between the centre of
30
Safe driving
the chest and the centre of the steering
wheel ››› Fig. 46. If distance is less than 25
cm, the airb
ag system may not protect you
properly.
●
If your physical constitution prevents you
from maintaining the minimum distance of 25
cm, contact a specialised workshop. The
workshop will help you decide if special spe-
cific modifications are necessary.
●
When driving, always hold the steering
wheel with both hands on the outside of the
ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions.
This reduces the risk of injury when the driver
airbag is triggered.
●
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12
o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g.
in the centre of the steering wheel). In such
cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sus-
tain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
●
To reduce the risk of injury to the driver
during sudden braking manoeuvres or an ac-
cident, never drive with the backrest tilted far
back! The airbag system and seat belts can
only provide optimal protection when the
backrest is in an upright position and the
driver is wearing his or her seat belt correct-
ly.
●
Adjust the head restraint properly to ach-
ieve optimal protection.
Adjusting the steering wheel position
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 13
The height and reach of the steering wheel
can be freely adjusted to suit the driver.
–
Adjust the driver seat to the correct posi-
tion.
WARNING
●
Incorrect use of the steering column adjust-
ment function and an incorrect seating posi-
tion can result in serious injury.
●
To avoid accidents, the steering column
should be adjusted only when the vehicle is
stationary.
●
Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so
that there is a distance of at least 25 cm be-
tween the steering wheel and your chest
››› Fig. 46. If you fail to observe the minimum
dis
tance, the airbag will not protect you. Risk
of fatal injury.
●
If your physical constitution does not allow
you to maintain the minimum distance of
25 cm, contact a Technical Service. The Tech-
nical Service will help you to decide if certain
specific modifications are necessary.
●
If you adjust the steering wheel so that it
points towards your face, the driver airbag
will not protect you properly in the event of
an accident. Make sure that the steering
wheel points towards your chest.
●
When driving, always hold the steering
wheel with both hands on the outside of the
ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions.
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12
o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g.
in the centre of the steering wheel, or on the
inside of the rim). In such cases, if the airbag
is triggered, you may sustain injuries to your
arms, hands and head.
Correct sitting position for front
passenger
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accident, we recom-
mend the following adjustments for the front
passenger:
–
Move the front passenger seat back as far
as possible ››› .
–
Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-
tion so that your back rests completely
against it.
–
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
edge is at the same level as the top of your
head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head ››› page 32.
–
Always keep both feet in the footwell in
front of the front passenger seat.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 34.
»
31
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Safety
It is possible to deactivate the front passen-
ger airbag in
exceptional circumstances
›
›
› page 45.
Adjusting the front passenger seat
››› page 100.
WARNING
●
An incorrect sitting position of the front
passenger can lead to severe injuries.
●
Adjust the front passenger seat so that
there is at least 25 cm between your chest
and the dash panel. If distance is less than
25 cm, the airbag system may not protect you
properly.
●
If your physical constitution prevents you
from maintaining the minimum distance of 25
cm, contact a specialised workshop. The
workshop will help you decide if special spe-
cific modifications are necessary.
●
Always keep your feet in the footwell when
the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the
dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An
incorrect sitting position exposes you to an
increased risk of injury in case of a sudden
braking or an accident. If the airbag is trig-
gered, you could sustain severe injuries due
to an incorrect sitting position.
●
To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas-
senger in events such as sudden braking ma-
noeuvres or an accident, never travel with the
backrest tilted far back! The airbag system
and seat belts can only provide optimal pro-
tection when the backrest is in an upright po-
sition and the front passenger is wearing his
or her seat belt properly. The further the seat
backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater
the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning
of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting po-
sition!
●
Adjust the head restraint correctly in order
to achieve maximum protection.
Correct sitting position for passengers
in the rear seats
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident,
passengers on the rear seat bench must con-
sider the following:
–
Sit up straight.
–
Adjust the head restraint to the correct po-
sition ››› page 32
.
–
A
lw
ays keep both feet in the footwell in
front of the rear seat.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 34.
–
Use an appropriate child restraint system
when you take children in the vehicle
››› page 46.
WARNING
●
If the passengers in the rear seats are not
sitting properly, they could sustain severe in-
juries.
●
Adjust the head restraint correctly in order
to achieve maximum protection.
●
Seat belts can only provide optimal protec-
tion when seat backrests are in an upright
position and the vehicle occupants are wear-
ing their seat belts correctly. If passengers In
the rear seats are not sitting in an upright po-
sition, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi-
tioning of the seat belt increases.
Correct adjustment of front head
restraints
Fig. 48 Correctly adjusted head restraint as
viewed from the front and the side.
Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-
portant part of passenger protection and can
reduce the risk of injuries in most accident
situations.
32
Safe driving
–
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
edge is, as far as possible, at the same lev-
el as the top of your head, or at the very
least, at eye level ››› Fig. 48
.
WARNING
●
Travelling with the head restraints removed
or improperly adjusted increases the risk of
severe injuries. An improper adjustment of
the head restraints may cause death in an ac-
cident and increase the risk of suffering inju-
ries during abrupt braking actions or unex-
pected manoeuvres.
●
The head restraints must always be adjus-
ted according to the height of the passenger.
Examples of incorrect sitting
positions
Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-
ly when the belt webs are properly posi-
tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan-
tially reduce the protective function of seat
belts and increase the risk of injury due to in-
correct seat belt position. As the driver, you
are responsible for all passengers, especially
children.
–
Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect
sitting position in the vehicle while travel-
ling
›››
.
The following list contains examples of sit-
ting positions that could be dangerous for all
vehicle occupants. The list is not complete,
but we would like to make you aware of this
issue.
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:
●
Never stand in the vehicle.
●
Never stand on the seats.
●
Never kneel on the seats.
●
Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.
●
Never lean against the dash panel.
●
Never lie on the rear bench.
●
Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
●
Never sit sideways.
●
Never lean out of a window.
●
Never put your feet out of a window.
●
Never put your feet on the dash panel.
●
Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.
●
Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot-
well.
●
Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
●
Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug-
gage compartment.
WARNING
●
Any incorrect sitting position increases the
risk of severe injuries.
●
Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the
vehicle occupants to severe injuries if airbags
are triggered, by striking a vehicle occupant
who has assumed an incorrect sitting posi-
tion.
●
Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop-
er sitting position and maintain it throughout
the trip. Before every trip, instruct your pas-
sengers to sit properly and to stay in this po-
sition during the trip ››› page 30, Proper sit-
ting position for occupants.
Correct adjustment of rear head
restraints
Fig. 49 Rear head restraint adjustment.
The rear head restraints have 2 positions:
●
Raised position or position for use
A
››› Fig. 49
. In this position, the head restraint
i
s
used normally, protecting the occupant of
the rear seats, along with the rear seat belts.
●
Rest position, not in use
B
››› Fig. 49
. This
po
s
ition improves the driver's rear visibility.
»
33
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Safety
To fit the head restraint in position for use
A
, pull on the edges with both hands in the
direction of the arrow. To place it in rest posi-
tion
B
, lower the head restraint.
WARNING
●
Whenever a passenger is seated on the rear
seats, the head restraint should be placed in
the position for use
A
.
●
Do not swap the centre rear head restraint
with either of the outer seat rear head re-
straints. Risk of injury in case of an accident!
Note
Note the instructions on the head restraints
adjustment.
Pedal area
Pedals
–
Ensure that you can always press the accel-
erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired
to the floor.
–
Ensure that the pedals can return unim-
paired to their initial positions.
–
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-
tened during the trip and do not obstruct
the pedals
›››
.
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals
clear and which are secured to prevent them
from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor
mats from a specialised dealership.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must
be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop
the vehicle.
Wearing suitable shoes
Always wear shoes which support your feet
properly and give you a good feeling for the
pedals.
WARNING
●
If the pedals are obstructed, an accident
may occur. Risk of serious injuries.
●
Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor cov-
erings over the original floor mats. This
would reduce the pedal area and could ob-
struct the pedals. Risk of accident.
●
Never place objects in the driver footwell.
An object could move into the pedal area and
impair pedal operation. In the event of a sud-
den driving or braking manoeuvre, you will
not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ac-
celerator pedal. Risk of accident!
Seat belts
The reasons why we should
wear seat belts
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front
and three in the r
ear. Each seat is equipped
with a three-point seat belt.
In some versions, your vehicle is approved
only for four seats. Two front seats and two
re
ar seats.
WARNING
●
Never transport more than the permitted
amount of people in your vehicle.
●
Every vehicle occupant must properly fas-
ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or
her seat. Children must be protected with an
appropriate child restraint system.
34
Seat belts
Seat belt control lamp*
Fig. 50 Warning lamp on the instrument pan-
el.
The control lamp illuminates to remind the
driver to fasten his seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
–
Fasten your seat belt securely.
–
Instruct your passengers to fasten their
seat belts properly before driving off.
–
Protect children by using a child seat ac-
cording to the child's height and weight.
When the ignition is switched on, the control
lamp in the instrument panel lights up* if
the driver or passenger* have not fastened
their seat belts.
An audible warning signal will sound for a
few seconds if the seat belts are not fastened
as the vehicle drives off and reaches a speed
of more than approximately 25 km/h
(15 mph) or if the seat belts are unfastened
while the vehicle is in motion. The warning
lamp will also flash .
The
l
amp goes out when the driver and
p
assenger seat belts are fastened with the ig-
nition switched on.
Seat belt protection
Fig. 51 Drivers with properly worn seat belts
will not be thrown forward in the event of sud-
den braking
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants
in the proper position. These also help pre-
vent uncontrolled movements that may result
in serious injury and reduce the risk of being
thrown out of the vehicle.
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts
correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the
belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,
the front part of your vehicle and other pas-
sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-
tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-
gy released in a collision. Taken together, all
these features reduce the releasing kinetic
energy and consequently, the risk of injury.
This is why it is so important to fasten seat
belts before every trip, even when "just driv-
ing around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat
belts as well. Accident statistics have shown
that wearing seat belts is an effective means
of substantially reducing the risk of injury
and improving the chances of survival when
involved in a serious accident. Furthermore,
properly worn seat belts improve the protec-
tion provided by airbags in the event of an
accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt
is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with air-
bags, the seat belts must be fastened and
worn. The front airbags, for example, are only
triggered in some cases of head-on collision.
The front airbags will not be triggered during
minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-
sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air-
bag trigger threshold value in the control unit
is not exceeded.
Therefore, you should always wear your seat
belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants
have fastened their seat belts properly before
you drive off!
35
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Safety
Safety instructions on using seat
belts
–
Always wear the seat belt as described in
this section.
–
Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened
at all times and are not damaged.
WARNING
●
If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at
all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The
optimal protection from seat belts can be
achieved only if you use them properly.
●
Fasten your seat belt before every trip -
even when driving in town. Other vehicle oc-
cupants must also wear the seat belts at all
times, otherwise they run the risk of being in-
jured.
●
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection
if the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
●
Never allow two passengers (even children)
to share the same seat belt.
●
Always keep both feet in the footwell in
front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in
motion.
●
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
●
The seat belt must never be twisted while it
is being worn.
●
The seat belt should never lie on hard or
fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.)
because this can cause injuries.
●
Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or
jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
●
Never wear the seat belt under the arm or
in any other incorrect position.
●
Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat
over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and func-
tion of the seat belts, reducing their capacity
to protect.
●
The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be
blocked with paper or other objects, as this
can prevent the latch plate from engaging se-
curely.
●
Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or
similar items to alter the position of the belt
webbing.
●
Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the
connections, belt retractors or parts of the
buckle could cause severe injuries in the
event of an accident. Therefore, you must
check the condition of all seat belts at regular
intervals.
●
Seat belts which have been worn in an acci-
dent and stretched must be replaced by a
specialised workshop. Renewal may be nec-
essary even if there is no apparent damage.
The belt anchorage should also be checked.
●
Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat
belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-
moved or modified in any way.
●
The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the
retractors may not work properly.
Head-on collisions and the laws of
physics
Fig. 52 A driver not wearing a seat belt is
thrown forward violently
Fig. 53 The unbelted passenger in the rear
seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the
driver who is wearing a seat belt.
It is easy to explain how the laws of physics
work in the case of a head-on collision: when
a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy
36
Seat belts
called “kinetic energy” is created both in the
passengers and inside the vehicle.
The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on
the speed of the vehicle and the weight of
the vehicle and its passengers. The higher
the speed and the greater the weight, the
more energy there is to be “absorbed” in an
accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the
speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles
from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h
(30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki-
netic energy is multiplied by four.
Because the vehicle occupants in our exam-
ple are not restrained by seat belts, in the
event of crashing against a wall, all of the oc-
cupants' kinetic energy will be absorbed
solely by said impact.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to
50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-
ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne
(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
even higher.
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are
not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on
collision, they will move forward at the same
speed their vehicle was travelling just before
the impact. This example applies not only to
head-on collisions, but to all accidents and
collisions.
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the
body in a collision are so great that it is not
possible to brace oneself with one's hands.
In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers
are thrown forward and will make violent con-
tact with the steering wheel, dash panel,
windscreen or whatever else is in the way
››› Fig. 52
.
It
i
s also important for rear passengers to
wear seat belts properly, as they could other-
wise be thrown forward violently through the
vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in
the rear seats who do not use seat belts en-
danger not only themselves but also the front
occupants ››› Fig. 53.
How to properly adjust your
seatbelt
Fastening and unfastening your seat
belt
Fig. 54 Positioning and removing the seat
belt buckle.
»
37
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Safety
Fig. 55 Position of seat belt during pregnan-
cy.
Fasten your seat belt
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if
the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
●
Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
●
To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch
plate and pull it slowly across your chest and
lap.
●
Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the
appropriate seat and push it down until it is
securely locked with an audible click
››› Fig. 54
.
●
P
u
ll the belt to ensure that the latch plate is
securely engaged in the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an automat-
ic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full free-
dom of movement is permitted when the
shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur-
ing sudden braking, during travel in steep
areas or bends and during acceleration, the
automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is
locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front
seats are fitted with seat belt tensioners
››› page 39.
Seat belt release
●
Press the red button on the belt buckle
››› Fig. 54. The latch plate is released and
springs out ›››
.
●
Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls
up easily and the trim is not damaged.
Seat belt position
Seat belts offer their maximum protection on-
ly when they are properly positioned.
WARNING
●
The seat belts offer best protection only
when the backrests are in an upright position
and the seat belts have been fastened prop-
erly.
●
Never put the latch plate in the buckle of
another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will
not protect you properly and the risk of injury
is increased.
●
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion. If you do, you increase the
risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.
●
An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause se-
vere injuries in the event of an accident.
●
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
on the centre of the shoulder, never across
the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snug-
ly on the torso ››› Fig. 55.
●
The lap p
art of the seat belt must lie across
the pelvis, never across the stomach. The
seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pel-
vis ››› Fig. 55. Pull the belt tight if necessary
to take up any slack.
●
For pregnant women, the lap part of the
seat belt must lie as low as possible over the
pelvis, never across the stomach, and always
lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the
abdomen.
●
Always engage the retractor lock when you
are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1
››› page 46.
●
Read and observe the warnings ››› page 36.
38
Seat belts
Belt pretensioners*
How the seat belt tensioner works
During a frontal collision, the seat belts on
the front seats are retracted automatically.
The seat belts for the occupants in the front
seats are equipped with belt tensioners. Sen-
sors will trigger the belt pretensioners during
severe head-on, lateral and rear collisions
only if the seat belt is being worn. This re-
tracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing
the forward motion of the occupants.
The seat belt tensioner can be triggered only
once.
The belt tensioners will not be triggered in
the event of light frontal and side collisions,
if the vehicle overturns, or in situations
where no large forces act on the front, side or
rear of the vehicle.
Note
●
If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a
fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is
not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
●
The relevant safety requirements must be
observed when the vehicle or components of
the system are scrapped. Specialised work-
shops are familiar with these regulations,
which are also available to you.
Service and disposal of belt
tensioners
The belt tensioners are components of the
seat belts that are installed in the seats of
your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-
ers or remove and install parts of the system
when performing other repair work, the seat
belt may be damaged. The consequence may
be that, in the event of an accident, the belt
tensioners function incorrectly or may not
function at all.
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-
sioner is not reduced and that removed parts
do not cause any injuries or environmental
pollution, regulations, which are known to
the specialised workshops, must be ob-
served.
WARNING
●
Improper use or repairs not carried out by
qualified mechanics increase the risk of se-
vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may
fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong cir-
cumstances.
●
Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or
install parts of the belt tensioners or seat
belts.
●
The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto-
matic retractor cannot be repaired.
●
Any work on the belt tensioners and seat
belts, including the removal and refitting of
system parts in conjunction with other repair
work, must be performed by a specialised
workshop only.
●
The belt tensioners will only provide pro-
tection for one accident and must be changed
if they have been activated.
39
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Safety
Airbag system
Brief introduction
Why wear a seat belt and assume the
correct sitting position?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best
protection, the seat belt must always be worn
properly and the correct sitting position must
be assumed.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat
belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's
overall passive safety system. Please bear in
mind that the airbag system can only work ef-
fectively when the vehicle occupants are
wearing their seat belts correctly and have
adjusted the head restraints properly. There-
fore, it is most important to properly wear the
seat belts at all times, not only because this
is required by law in most countries, but also
for your safety
›››
page 34, The reasons why
we should wear seat belts.
The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so
if you are not properly seated when the air-
bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-
ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle
occupants assume a correct sitting position
while travelling.
Sharp braking before an accident may cause
a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be
thrown forward into the area of the deploying
airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may
inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occu-
pant. This also applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible dis-
tance between yourself and the front airbag.
This way, the front airbags can completely
deploy when triggered, providing their maxi-
mum protection.
The most important factors that will trigger
an airbag are: the type of accident, the angle
of collision and the speed of the vehicle.
Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-
pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration
rate resulting from the collision and detected
by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration
occurring during the collision and measured
by the control unit remains below the speci-
fied reference values, the front, side and/or
curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take in-
to account that the visible damage in a vehi-
cle involved in an accident, no matter how
serious, is not a determining factor for the
airbags to have been triggered.
WARNING
●
Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assum-
ing an incorrect sitting position can lead to
critical or fatal injuries.
●
All vehicle occupants, including children,
who are not properly belted can sustain criti-
cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered.
Children up to 12 years old should always
travel on the rear seat. Never transport chil-
dren in the vehicle if they are not restrained
or the restraint system is not appropriate for
their age, size or weight.
●
If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if you
lean forward or to the side while travelling or
assume an incorrect sitting position, there is
a substantially increased risk of injury. This
increased risk of injury will be further in-
creased if you are struck by an inflating air-
bag.
●
To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating
airbag, always wear the seat belt properly.
●
Always adjust the front seats properly.
Description of the airbag system
The airbag system mainly comprises (as per
vehicle equipment):
●
an electronic control and monitoring sys-
tem (control unit)
●
frontal airbags for driver and passenger,
●
side airbags,
●
curtain airbags,
●
a control lamp on the dash panel
››› page 42
.
●
k
ey
-operated switch for front passenger air-
bag,
●
a control lamp for disabling/enabling the
front passenger airbag.
40
Airbag system
The airbag system operation is monitored
electronically. The airbag control lamp will il-
luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-
nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the control
lamp
:
●
doe
s not light up when the ignition is
switched on ››› page 42,
●
turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition
is switched on
●
turns off and then lights up again after the
ignition is switched on
●
illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is
moving.
The airbag system is not triggered if:
●
the ignition is switched off
●
there is a minor frontal collision
●
there is a minor side collision
●
there is a rear-end collision
●
the vehicle turns over.
WARNING
●
The seat belts and airbags can only provide
maximum protection if the occupants are
seated correctly ››› page 30, Proper sitting
position for occupants.
●
If a fault has occurred in the airbag system,
have the system checked immediately by a
specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a
frontal collision the system might not trigger
correctly or may fail to trigger at all.
Airbag activation
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within
thousandths of a second, to provide addi-
tional protection in the event of an accident.
A fine dust may develop when the airbag de-
ploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-
tion of fire in the vehicle.
The airbag system is only ready to function
when the ignition is on.
In special accidents instances, several air-
bags may activate at the same time.
In the event of minor head-on and side colli-
sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-
over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.
Activation factors
The conditions that lead to the airbag system
activating in each situation cannot be gener-
alised. Some factors play an important role,
such as the properties of the object the vehi-
cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle
speed, etc.
Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-
vation.
The control unit analyses the collision trajec-
tory and activates the respective restraint
system.
If the deceleration rate is below the prede-
fined reference value in the control unit the
airbags will not be triggered, even though
the accident may cause extensive damage to
the car.
The following airbags are triggered in
serious head-on collisions
●
Driver airbag.
●
Front passenger front airbag
The following airbags are triggered in
serious side-on collisions
●
Front side airbag on the side of the acci-
dent.
●
Rear side airbag on the side of the acci-
dent.
●
Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-
cident.
In an accident with airbag activation:
●
the interior lights switch on (if the interior
light switch is in the courtesy light position);
●
the hazard warning lights switch on;
●
all doors are unlocked;
●
the fuel supply to the engine is cut.
41
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Safety
Control lamp for airbag and seat belt
tensioner
The control lamp monitors all airbags and
seat belt tensioners in the vehicle, including
control units and wiring connections.
Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner
system
Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems
operation is constantly monitored electroni-
cally. The control lamp will light up for a
few seconds every time the ignition is switch-
ed on (self-diagnosis).
The system must be checked when the
control lamp :
●
does not light up when the ignition is
switched on,
●
turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition
is switched on
●
turns off and then lights up again after the
ignition is switched on
●
illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is
moving.
In the event of a malfunction, the warning
lamp remains on continuously. Have the air-
bag system inspected immediately by a spe-
cialised workshop.
If any of the airbags are disabled by a Techni-
cal Service, the warning lamp flashes for sev-
eral more seconds after verification and will
turn off if there is no fault.
WARNING
●
If there is a malfunction, the airbag and
belt tensioner system cannot properly per-
form its protective function.
●
If a malfunction occurs, have the system
checked immediately by a specialised work-
shop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident,
the airbag system and belt tensioners may
not be triggered, or may not be triggered cor-
rectly.
Airbag overview
Front airbags
Fig. 56 Driver airbag located in steering
wheel.
42
Airbag system
Fig. 57 Front passenger airbag located in
dash panel.
The front airbag for the driver is located in
the steering wheel ››› Fig. 56
and the airbag
f
or the fr
ont passenger is located in the dash
panel ››› Fig. 57. Airbags are identified by the
word “AIRBAG”.
The airbag covers fold out of the steering
wheel and dashboard respectively when the
driver and front passenger airbags are trig-
gered ››› Fig. 57. The airbag covers remain
connected to the steering wheel or the dash
panel.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front
airbag system gives the driver and the front
passenger additional protection for the head
and chest in the event of a severe frontal col-
lision.
The special design of the airbag allows the
controlled escape of the propellant gas when
an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus,
the head and chest are surrounded and pro-
tected by the airbag. After the collision, the
airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.
WARNING
●
The seat belts and airbags can only provide
maximum protection if the occupants are
seated correctly ››› page 30, Proper sitting
position for occupants.
●
The deployment space between the front
passengers and the airbags must not in any
case be occupied by other passenger, pets
and objects.
●
The airbags provide protection for just one
accident; replace them once they have de-
ployed.
●
It is also important not to attach any ob-
jects such as cup holders or telephone
mountings to the surfaces covering the air-
bag units.
●
Do not attempt to modify components of
the airbag system in any way.
Side airbags*
Fig. 58 Side airbag in driver seat.
Fig. 59 Illustration of completely inflated side
airbag on left side of vehicle.
The side airbags are located in the driver seat
and front passenger seat backrests
››› Fig. 58
. The locations are identified by the
t
e
xt “AIRBAG” in the upper region of the
backrests.
»
43
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Safety
In conjunction with the seat belts, the side
airbag system gives the front seat occupants
additional protection for the upper body in
the event of a severe side collision.
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce
the risk of injury to passengers on the front
seats to the areas of the body facing the im-
pact. In addition to the normal protection
they offer, the seat belts on the front seats al-
so hold the passengers' bodies in place in
the event of a side collision so that the side
airbags can provide maximum protection.
WARNING
●
If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean
forward, or are not seated correctly while the
vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk
of injury if the side airbag system is triggered
in an accident.
●
In order for the side airbags to provide their
maximum protection, the prescribed sitting
position must always be maintained with
seat belts fastened while travelling.
●
Occupants of the outer seats must never
carry any objects or pets in the deployment
space between them and the airbags, or al-
low children or other passengers to travel in
this position. It is also important not to at-
tach any accessories (such as cup holders) to
the doors. This would impair the protection
offered by the side airbags.
●
The built-in coat hooks should be used only
for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any
heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
●
Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,
must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-
ster because the system may be damaged. In
this case, the side airbags would not be trig-
gered.
●
Under no circumstances should protective
covers be fitted over seats with side airbags
unless the covers have been approved for use
in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys
from the side of the backrest, the use of con-
ventional seat covers would obstruct the side
airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effec-
tiveness.
●
Any damage to the original seat upholstery
or around the seams of the side airbag units
must be repaired immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
●
The airbags provide protection for just one
accident; replace them once they have de-
ployed.
●
Any work on the side airbag system or re-
moval and installation of the airbag compo-
nents for other repairs (such as removal of
the front seat) should only be performed by a
specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may
occur during the airbag system operation.
●
Do not attempt to modify components of
the airbag system in any way.
●
The side and head airbags are managed
through sensors located in the interior of the
front doors. To ensure the correct operation of
the side and curtain (head) airbags neither
the doors nor the door panels should be
modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeak-
ers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag
system may not work correctly. All work car-
ried out on the front door must be done in a
specialised workshop.
●
In a side-on collision the side airbags will
not work if the sensors do not correctly meas-
ure the pressure increase on the interior of
the doors, due to air escaping through the
areas with holes or openings in the door pan-
el.
●
Never drive if the interior door panels have
been removed or if the panels have not been
correctly fitted.
●
Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers
in the door panels have been removed, un-
less the holes left by the loudspeakers have
been closed properly.
●
Always check that the openings are closed
or covered if additional loudspeakers or other
equipment are fitted inside the door panels.
●
Any work carried out to the doors should be
made in an authorised specialised workshop.
44
Airbag system
Head-protection airbags*
Fig. 60 Location and deployment area of the
head-protection airbag.
There is a head airbag on each side of the in-
terior above the doors ››› Fig. 60
. Airbags are
identified b
y
the word “AIRBAG”.
The area framed in red is covered by the head
protection airbag when it is deployed
››› Fig. 60 (deployment area). Therefore, ob-
jects should never be placed or mounted in
this area ›››
.
In the event of a side collision the curtain air-
bag is triggered on the impact side of the ve-
hicle.
In side collisions, the head-protection air-
bags reduce the risk of injury to passengers
in the front and rear side seats facing the im-
pact.
WARNING
The airbag is deployed at high speed in frac-
tions of a second.
●
Do not obstruct the head-protection airbag
deployment areas.
●
Never secure objects over the curtain air-
bag cover or in its deployment area.
●
Occupants of the front seats and rear side
seats must never carry any other people, ani-
mals or objects in the deployment space be-
tween them and the airbags. Make sure that
all the vehicle occupants, including children,
observe this.
●
The clothes hangers are intended only for
light articles of clothing. Do not leave any
heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
●
Do not mount accessories on the doors.
●
Use only sun blinds which have been ex-
pressly approved for use in your vehicle.
●
Do not turn the sun blinds towards the win-
dows if there are objects, e.g. pens or garage
remote controls, secured to them.
Deactivating airbags
Front passenger airbag deactivation*
Fig. 61 In the glove compartment: Switch for
activating and deactivating the front passen-
ger airbag
Fig. 62 Centre side of dash panel: control
lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag
in centre console
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 11
»
45
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Safety
If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front
passenger seat, the front passenger front air-
bag must be de-activated.
When the front passenger airbag is deactiva-
ted
, this means that only the front passenger
fr
ont
airbag is deactivated. All the other air-
bags in the vehicle remain activated.
Activating the front passenger front airbag
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Open the glove compartment on the front
passenger side.
–
Insert the key into the slot of the switch for
deactivating the front passenger airbag
››› Fig. 61. About 3/4 of the key should en-
ter, as far as it will go.
–
Then turn the key gently to the position.
Do not force it if you feel resistance, and
make sure you have inserted the key fully.
–
When the ignition is switched on, check
whether the control lamp
on the dash panel does ››› Fig. 62 not
light up ›››
.
WARNING
●
It is the driver's responsibility to ensure
that the key operated switch is set to the cor-
rect position.
●
You should deactivate the front passenger
front airbag only if you have to use a rear-fac-
ing child seat in exceptional cases
››› page 46, Transporting children safety.
●
Never install a child seat facing backwards
on the front passenger seat unless the front
passenger front airbag has been disabled.
Otherwise, there is a risk of death.
●
As soon as the child seat is no longer nee-
ded on the front passenger seat, enable the
front passenger front airbag again.
●
Only deactivate the front passenger front
airbag when the ignition is off, otherwise a
fault may occur in the airbag system, which
could cause the airbag to not deploy properly
or not deploy at all in case of an accident.
●
Never leave the key in the airbag disabling
switch as it could get damaged or enable or
disable the airbag during driving.
●
When the passenger airbag is deactivated,
if the control lamp is not
continuously lit up when the front passenger
airbag is disabled, there may be a fault in the
airbag system:
–
Have the airbag system inspected imme-
diately by a specialised workshop.
–
Do not use a child seat on the front pas-
senger seat! The front passenger front
airbag could be triggered in the event of
an accident, even if there is a fault in the
system and, as a result, a child could sus-
tain serious or fatal injuries.
–
It is unpredictable whether the front pas-
senger airbag will deploy in the event of
an accident. Warn all your passengers of
this.
Transporting children safety
Safety for children
Introduction
For safety reasons, as we have learned from
accident statistics, we recommend that chil-
dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear
seats. Depending on their age, height and
weight, children travelling in rear seats must
use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-
sons, the child seat should be installed in the
rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or
in the centre back seat.
The physical laws involved and the forces
acting in a collision apply also to children
›››
page 36
. But unlike adults, children do not
h
av
e fully developed muscle and bone struc-
tures. This means that children are subject to
a greater risk of injury.
To reduce the risk of injuries, children must
always use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety prod-
ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-
gramme, which includes systems for all ages
made by “Peke” (not for all countries).
These systems have been especially de-
signed and approved, complying with the
ECE-R44. regulation.
46
Transporting children safety
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
observe any statutory requirements when in-
stalling and using child seats. Always read
and note ››› page 47
.
W
e r
ecommend you always carry the manu-
facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-
gether with the on-board documentation.
Important information on the front
passenger airbag
Fig. 63 Passenger's side sun visor: airbag
sticker.
Fig. 64 On the rear frame of the passenger
side door: airbag sticker.
A sticker with important information about
the passenger airbag is located on the pas-
senger's sun visor and/or on the passenger
side door frame. Read and always observe
the safety information included in the follow-
ing chapters:
●
Safety distance with respect to the passen-
ger airbag ››› page 40
.
●
O
b
jects between the passenger and the
passenger side airbag ›››
in Front airbags
on page 43
.
The p
a
ssenger side front airbag, when ena-
bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing
backward since the airbag can strike the seat
with such force that it can cause serious or
fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old
should always travel on the rear seat.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to
transport children on the rear seats. This is
the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-
ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-
bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 45.
When transporting children, use a child seat
appropriate to the age and size of each child.
WARNING
●
If a child seat is secured to the front pas-
senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-
ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an
accident increases.
●
An inflating front passenger airbag can
strike the rear-facing child seat and project it
with great force against the door, the roof or
the backrest.
●
Never install a child seat facing backwards
on the front passenger seat unless the front
passenger front airbag has been disabled.
Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child!
However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca-
ses, to transport a child in the front passen-
ger seat, the front passenger front airbag
must always be disabled ››› page 45, Front
passenger airbag deactivation*. If the front
passenger seat has a height adjustment op-
tion, move it to the highest position.
●
For those vehicles that do not include a key
lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi-
cle must be taken to a technical service.
●
All vehicle occupants, especially children,
must assume the proper sitting position and
be properly belted in while travelling.
»
47
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Safety
●
Never hold children or babies on your lap,
this can result in potentially fatal injuries to
the child!
●
Never allow a child to be transported in a
vehicle without being properly secured, or to
stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling.
In an accident, the child could be flung
through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal in-
juries to themselves and to the other vehicle
occupants.
●
If children assume an improper sitting posi-
tion when the vehicle is moving, they expose
themselves to greater risk of injury in the
event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an
accident. This is particularly important if the
child is travelling on the front passenger seat
and the airbag system is triggered in an acci-
dent; as this could cause serious injury or
even death.
●
A suitable child seat can protect your child!
●
Never leave a child alone in the child seat
or inside the vehicle because depending on
the season, very high temperatures may be
reached inside a parked vehicle, which could
be fatal.
●
Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall
must not wear a normal seat belt without a
child seat, as this could cause injuries to the
abdominal and neck areas during a sudden
braking manoeuvre or in an accident.
●
Do not allow the seat belt to become twis-
ted and the seat belt should be properly in
place ››› page 34.
●
Only one child may occupy a child seat
››› page 48, Child seats.
●
When a chi
ld seat is mounted in the rear
seats, the door child-proof lock should be ac-
tivated ››› page 82.
Child seats
Categorisation of child seats into
groups
Only use child seats that are officially ap-
proved and suitable for the child.
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-
R 44. ECE-R stands for: Economic Commis-
sion for Europe Regulation.
The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-
ries:
Group 0
: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9
months)
Gr
oup 0+
: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18
months)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4
years old)
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7
years old)
Group 3: From 22 to 36 kg (over around 7
years old)
Child seats that have been tested and ap-
proved under the ECE R44 standard bear the
test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle
with the test number below it).
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
observe any statutory requirements when in-
stalling and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the
manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual
together with the on-board documentation.
SEAT recommends you use child seats from
the Original Accessories Catalogue. These
child seats have been designed and tested
for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the
right child seat for your model and age group
at SEAT dealers.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and
warnings concerning the use of child seats
››› page 47.
48
Transporting children safety
Ways to secure a child seat
Fig. 65 On the rear seats: Possible installations for the child seat.
Figure ››› Fig. 65
A
shows the basic child re-
straint system mounting using lower retain-
ing rings and the upper retaining strap. Fig-
ure ››› Fig. 65
B
shows the child restraint
system mounting using the vehicle seat belt.
You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or
front passenger seat in the following ways:
●
Child seats in groups 0 to 3
can be secured
w
ith a se
at belt.
●
Child seats for groups 0, 0+ and 1 can be
fastened without seatbelts, using the “ISO-
FIX” system, using the “ISOFIX” ››› page 50
securing rings.
●
During installation of some models of
group I, II and III child seats in the rear seat,
difficulty may arise in mounting given that
the seat comes into contact with the head re-
straint. In this case, adjust the height of the
head restraint or remove it from the seat fol-
lowing the instructions in the corresponding
chapter ››› page 101. Once you remove the
child seat, replace the head restraint in its
original position.
Weight
group
Seating position
Front
passen-
ger seat
Rear side
seat
Rear cen-
tral seat
Group 0
to 10 kg
U* U U
Group 0+
to 13 kg
U* U U
Group I
9 to 18 kg
U* U U
Group II
15 to 25 kg
X U U
Group III
22 to 36 kg
X U U
»
49
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Safety
Suitable for universal restraint systems
for use in this weight group.
Move the front passenger seat as far
back as possible, as high as possible
and always disable the airbag.
U:
*:
Seat position not suitable for children in
this age group.
WARNING
●
When travelling, children must be secured
in the vehicle with a restraint system suitable
for age, weight and size.
X
●
Read and always observe information and
warnings concerning the use of child seats
››› page 47.
Securing a child seat with the “ISOFIX” system
Fig. 66 ISOFIX securing rings.
Child seats can be secured quickly, easily
and safely on the rear outer seats with the
“ISOFIX” system.
When removing or fitting the child seat,
please be sure to follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
–
Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re-
taining rings until the child seat can be
heard to engage securely. If the child seat
is fitted with any other anti-rotation system,
follow the manufacturer instructions care-
fully.
–
Pull on both sides of the child seat to en-
sure that it is secure.
Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on
eac
h rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings
are secured to the seat frame and in others
they are secured to the rear floor. Access to
the “ISOFIX” rings is between the rear seat
backrest and the seat cushioning.
Child seats with “ISOFIX” mountings are
available from technical services.
50
Transporting children safety
Weight group Size class Electrical equipment Mounting direction
Vehicle Isofix positions
Rear side seats
Baby carrier
F ISO/L1 Backward-facing X
G ISO/L2 Backward-facing X
Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU
Group 0+ to 13 kg
E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU
D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU
C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU
Group I 9 to 18 kg
D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU
C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU
B ISO/F2 Forward-facing IU
B1 ISO/F2X Forward-facing IU
A ISO/F3 Forward-facing IU
Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---
Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---
Suitable for ISOFIX universal child re-
straint systems approved for use in this
weight group.
ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX
child restraint systems for this weight
group or size class.
IU:
X:
WARNING
●
The retaining rings are designed to only be
used with “ISOFIX” child seats.
●
Never secure child seats without the “ISO-
FIX” system, retaining belts or objects to the
fastening rings – this can result in potentially
fatal injuries to the child.
●
Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-
rectly to the “ISOFIX” anchor points.
51
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Safety
Top Tether retainer straps*
Fig. 67 Position of the Top Tether rings on the
back of the rear seat.
Child seats with the Top Tether system come
with a strap for securing the seat to the vehi-
cle anchor point, located at the back of the
rear seat backrest and provide greater re-
straint.
The objective of this strap is to reduce the
forward movement of the child seat in a
crash, to reduce the risk of injuries to the
head from hitting the inside of the vehicle.
Using the Top Tether in rear-facing mounted
seats
Currently, there are very few rear-facing child
safety seats that have Top Tether. Please
carefully read and follow the seat manufac-
turer instructions to learn the proper way to
install the Top Tether strap.
WARNING
An undue installation of the safety seat will
increase the risk of injury in the event of a
crash.
●
Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the
luggage compartment.
●
Never secure or tie luggage or other items
to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upper
ones (Top Tether).
Fitting the Top Tether* child restraint
to the anchoring point
Fig. 68 Retainer strap: correct adjustment
and fitting.
Securing the Top Tether child restraint to the
anchor point situated on the rear of the
backrest
–
Pull out the fastening belt of the child re-
straint seat according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
–
Guide the Top Tether fastening belt under
the rear seat head restraint ››› Fig. 68
(lift
the he
a
d restraint where necessary).
–
Slide the belt so that the Top Tether belt of
the child restraint seat is correctly secured
to the anchor on the back of the rear seat.
–
Firmly tighten the Top Tether belt following
the child restraint seat manufacturer's in-
structions.
Releasing the retaining strap
–
Release the retainer strap in line with the
instructions given by the manufacturer.
–
Push the lock and release it from the an-
choring support.
WARNING
An undue installation of the safety seat will
increase the risk of injury in the event of a
crash.
●
Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the
luggage compartment.
●
Never secure or tie luggage or other items
to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upper
ones (Top Tether).
52
Operation
Fig. 69 Dash panel.
54
Dash panel
Operation
Dash panel
Overview
Door release lever
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Light dimmer for instrument panel
lighting* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Headlight range control* . . . . . . . . . . 92
Air vents
Lever for:
–
Turn signals/dipped beam . . . . . . 93
–
Cruise control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Instrument panel and warning
lamps:
–
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
–
Control and warning lamps . . . . . . 57
Horn (works only when the ignition
is on)/ Driver front airbag* . . . . . . . . 40
Steering and starter lock . . . . . . . . . . 123
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Lever for:
–
Windscreen wipers and washer . . 97
–
Window washer-wiper system* . . 97
–
Multi-function display control* . . 65
Radio
Glove compartment/Storage com-
partment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Passenger airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Dash panel switches:
–
ESC OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
–
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . 95
–
Airbag off warning lamp* . . . . . . .42, 45
Switches for:
–
Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . 114
–
Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
–
Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Cigarette lighter/Power socket . . . . 107
Drink holder/Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Controls in the centre console:
–
Start-Stop operation button . . . . . 142
–
Tyre pressure monitoring* . . . . . . . 61
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
–
Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
–
Heated seats* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
–
Central locking* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Handbrake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Gear lever
–
Automatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
–
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Storage space
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Steering column control lever* . . . . 31
Bonnet release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Switches on the steering column for
audio and telephone* . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Fuse housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Control for adjusting electric exteri-
or mirrors* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Electric window controls* . . . . . . . . . 87
Note
Some of the items of equipment listed here
are fitted only on certain model versions or
are optional extras.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
55
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Instruments
Instrument overview
Fig. 70 Detailed view of the dash panel: Dash
panel.
The layout of the instruments depends upon
the model and the engine.
Rev counter* ››› page 56
Digital display
Speedometer ››› page 57
Menu selection button on the instrument
panel digital display
Adjustment button depending on the se-
lected menu
1
2
3
4
5
Rev counter
The rev counter displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute.
Together with the gear-change indicator, the
rev counter offers you the possibility of using
the engine of your vehicle at a suitable
speed.
The start of the red area ››› Fig. 70
1
indi-
cates maximum engine speed working at
service temperature. However, it is advisable
to change up into a higher gear, move the se-
lector lever to D or lift your foot off the accel-
erator before the needle reaches the red
zone.
We recommend that you avoid high revs and
that you follow the recommendations on the
gear-change indicator. Consult the additional
information in ››› page 64
.
CAUTION
Never allow the rev counter needle
1
››› Fig. 70 to go into the red zone on the scale
for mor
e than a very brief period, otherwise
there is a risk of engine damage.
56
Dash panel
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear early will help you to save
fuel and minimise emissions and engine
noise.
Speedometer
The speedometer is equipped with a digital
odometer and a trip odometer, in addition to
a service intervals display.
During the running-in period, the instructions
shown on
›››
page 134
should be followed.
W
arnin
g lamps
Overview of the warning lamps
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 18
WARNING
●
Failure to observe control lamps and warn-
ing messages can result in serious personal
injuries or damage to your vehicle.
●
The risk of an accident increases if your ve-
hicle breaks down. Use a warning triangle to
draw the attention of other road users in or-
der to prevent danger to third parties.
●
The engine compartment is a dangerous
area. Before you open the bonnet to work on
the engine or in the engine compartment,
switch the engine off and allow it to cool to
reduce the risk of burns or other injuries.
Read and observe the relevant warnings
››› page 166.
Note
●
The appropriate control lamp for a fault will
light up in vehicles without warning or infor-
mation messages in the display.
●
In vehicles with warning or information
messages on the screen, the appropriate con-
trol lamp for a fault will light up and a warn-
ing or information message will also appear
on the screen.
Warning symbols
There are red warning symbols (priority 1)
and yellow warning symbols (priority 2).
Warning messages, Priority 1 (red)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning
lamp will light up or flash and will be accom-
panied by three audible warnings. This is a
danger
warning. Stop the vehicle and switch
off
the en
gine. Check the fault and correct it.
Obtain professional assistance if necessary.
If several priority 1 faults are detected at the
same time, the symbols will be displayed one
after the other for about 2 seconds at a time
and will continue until the fault is corrected.
No menus will be shown in the display for the
duration of a priority 1 warning message.
Examples of priority 1 warning messages
(red)
●
Brake system symbol with the warning
message STOP BRAKE FLUID INSTRUCTION
MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT INSTRUCTION
MANUAL.
●
Coolant symbol with the warning mes-
sage STOP SEE COOLANT INSTRUCTION MAN-
UAL.
●
Engine oil pressure symbol with the
warning message STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
LOW! INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
Warning messages, Priority 2 (yellow)
If one of these faults occurs, the correspond-
ing warning lamp lights up and is accompa-
nied by an audible warning. Check the corre-
sponding function as soon as possible al-
though the vehicle may be used without risk.
If several priority 2 warning messages are de-
tected at the same time, the symbols are dis-
played one after the other for about 2 sec-
onds at a time. After a set time, the informa-
tion text will disappear and the symbol will
be shown as a reminder at the side of the
display.
»
57
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Priority 2 warning messages will not be
shown until all Priority 1 warning messages
have been dealt with!
Examples of priority 2 warning reports
(yellow):*
●
Fuel warning light with the information text
PLEASE REFUEL.
Information messages displayed on
the screen*
Messages
a)
Description
SERVICE
The service interval has ended. Take
the vehicle to a Technical Service.
IMMOBILISER
Immobiliser system active. The vehicle
will not start. Take the vehicle to a
Technical Service.
ERROR
Instrument panel faulty. Take the vehi-
cle to a Technical Service.
CLEAN AIR FIL-
TER
Warning: Clean the air filter.
NO KEY
Warning: Correct key cannot be found
in the vehicle.
KEY BATTERY
Warning: Key battery low. Change the
battery.
CLUTCH
Warning: Press the clutch to start. In
vehicles with manual gearbox and
Start-Stop system.
Messages
a)
Description
--> P/N
Warning: Place the selector level in
position P/N to start. Only in vehicles
with automatic gearbox.
--> P
Warning: Place the selector lever in
position P to stop the engine.
STARTING
Warning: The engine starts automati-
cally. Start-Stop system activated.
START MAN-
UALLY
Warning: The engine must be started
manually. Start-Stop system activated.
ERROR START-
STOP
Warning: Start-Stop system error.
START-STOP
IMPOSSIBLE
Warning: Although the Start-Stop sys-
tem is switched on, the engine cannot
be stopped automatically. Not all the
necessary conditions are met.
START-STOP
ACTIVE
Warning: Start-Stop system activated.
Vehicle in Stop mode.
SWITCH OFF
Warning: Start-Stop system activated.
Switch off the ignition when you leave
the vehicle.
STOP TRANS-
MISSION TOO
HOT
Warning: Stop the engine. Gearbox
overheated.
BRAKE
Warning: To start the engine, press the
brake pedal. Only in vehicles with au-
tomatic gearbox.
COASTING
FUNCTION
Warning: “Coasting” mode active.
Transmission engaged. Only in vehi-
cles with automatic gearbox.
Messages
a)
Description
CHECK SAFE-
LOCK
Notification of central locking function
activated.
a)
These messages may vary according the version of the vehi-
cle model.
Engine management*
This warning lamp monitors the engine man-
agement system for petrol engines.
The warning lamp (Electronic Power Con-
trol) lights up when the ignition is switched
on while system operation is being verified. It
should go out once the engine is started.
If there is a fault in the electronic engine
management system while you are driving,
this warning lamp will light up. Stop the vehi-
cle and seek technical assistance.
Glow plug system/Engine fault*
The warning lamp lights up to show that the
glow plugs are preheating the diesel engine.
The control lamp lights up
If the control lamp lights up when the en-
gine is started it means that the glow plugs
are preheating. When the warning lamp goes
off, the engine should be started straight
away.
58
Dash panel
Control lamp
flashes
If
a f
ault develops in the engine management
system while you are driving, the glow plug
system lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to
a specialised workshop as soon as possible
and have the engine checked.
Soot accumulation in the diesel
engine particulate filter*
If the control lamp lights up you should
help the filter clean itself by driving in the ap-
propriate manner.
To do this, drive about 15 minutes in fourth
or fifth gear (automatic gearbox: S gear
range) at a minimum speed of 60 km/h
(37 mph), with the engine running at approxi-
mately 2,000 rpm. In this way, the soot build
up in the filter is burned. When cleaning is
successful, the control lamp turns off.
If the lamp does not turn off, or the three
lamps turn on (particulate filter , fault in
the emission control system and glow
plugs ), drive the vehicle to a specialised
workshop and have the fault repaired at the
earliest opportunity.
WARNING
●
Always drive according to the road weather
conditions, the terrain and traffic. Driving rec-
ommendations should never lead to illegal
manoeuvres in surrounding traffic.
●
The diesel engine particulate filter may
reach extremely high temperatures; in this
case the vehicle should be parked so that it
does not enter into contact with highly flam-
mable materials underneath the vehicle. Oth-
erwise there is a risk of fire.
Engine oil pressure
If this warning lamp is red it indicates
that the engine oil pressure is too low.
If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is
accompanied by three audible warnings,
switch off the engine and check the oil level.
If necessary, add more oil ››› page 170.
If the warning lamp flashes although the oil
level is correct, stop
driving. Do not even run
the en
gine at
idle speed! Obtain technical as-
sistance.
Checking the oil level
If the warning lamp is yellow the engine
oil level should be checked as soon as possi-
ble. Top up the oil ››› page 170 at the next
opportunity.
Oil level sensor faulty*
If the yellow warning lamp flashes, take
the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have
the oil level sensor checked. Until then it is
advisable to check the oil level every time
you refuel.
Bulb defect*
The warning lamp lights up when there is
a f
ault on the turn signals, headlights, side
lights and fog lights.
Washer fluid*
This warning lamp lights up to indicate that
the windscreen washer level is very low.
This serves as a reminder to fill up the reser-
voir at the earliest opportunity
›››
page 174.
Rear fog light*
The warning lamp lights up when the rear
fog light is switched on. For further informa-
tion see
›››
page 90
.
Anti-loc
k
brake system (ABS)*
The warning lamp lights up for a few sec-
onds when the ignition is switched on. It
goes out again after the system has run
through an automatic test sequence.
»
59
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
There is a fault in the ABS if:
●
The warning lamp
does not light up
when the ignition i
s switched on.
●
The control lamp does not go out again af-
ter a few seconds.
●
The control lamp lights up when the vehicle
is moving.
The vehicle can still be braked in the normal
way, without the ABS function. Take the vehi-
cle to a specialised workshop as soon as
possible. For further information on the ABS
see the ››› page 140.
If there is a fault in the ABS, the ESC* and the
tyre pressure control lamp will also light up.
Brake system fault
If the ABS warning lamp lights up together
with the brake warning lamp , there is a
fault in the ABS function and in the brake
system ›››
.
WARNING
●
Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-
serve the warnings ››› page 166, Working in
the engine compartment.
●
If the br
ake system warning lamp should
light up together with the ABS warning lamp
, stop the vehicle immediately and check
the brake fluid level in the reservoir
››› page 173, Brake fluid. If the brake fluid
level has dropped below the “MIN” mark you
must not drive on. Risk of accident. Obtain
technical assistance.
●
If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in
the brake system may have been caused by a
failure of the ABS system. This could cause
the rear wheels to lock quickly when you
brake. This could cause the rear to break
away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and
seek technical assistance.
Differential lock fault (EDL)*
The EDL operates along with the ABS in vehi-
cles equipped with Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC)*.
A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the
ABS control lamp . Take the vehicle to a
specialised workshop as soon as possible.
For further information on the EDL see
››› page 139, Electronic differential lock
(EDL)*
.
T
r
action control system (ASR)* /
The traction control system prevents the driv-
en wheels from spinning when the vehicle is
accelerating.
There are two warning lamps for the traction
control system: and . Both warning lamps
light up together when the ignition is switch-
ed on and should turn off after approximately
2 seconds. This is the time taken for the func-
tion check.
The
lamp has the following function:
●
It
flashes when the ASR is working if the ve-
hicle is moving.
If the system is deactivated or if it has any
fault, the warning lamp will remain lit. The
warning lamp will also light up if a fault
should occur in the ABS because the ASR op-
erates in conjunction with the ABS. For fur-
ther information, see ››› page 141.
The lamp provides information about the
disconnection status of the system:
●
It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected
when pressing the switch.
By pressing it again, the ASR function is reac-
tivated and the warning lamp switched off.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)* /
There are two control lamps for the electronic
stability control. The lamp provides infor-
mation concerning function and disconnec-
tion status.
Both warning lamps light up together when
the ignition is switched on and should turn
60
Dash panel
off after approximately 2 seconds. This is the
time taken for the function check.
This programme includes the ABS, EDL and
ASR. It also includes emergency braking as-
sistance (BAS).
The warning lamp
has the following
f
unctions:
●
It flashes whilst driving when the ASR/ESC
is activated.
●
It will light up if there is a fault in the ESC.
●
As the ESC operates in conjunction with the
ABS, the ESC light will also come on if a fault
should occur in the ABS.
If the ESC control lamp lights up and stays
on after the engine is started, this may mean
that the control system has temporarily
switched off the ESC. In this case the ESC can
be reactivated by switching the ignition off
and then on again. If the control lamp goes
out, this means the system is fully functional.
The lamp provides information about the
disconnection status of the system:
●
It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected
when pressing the switch.
Brake system*
Situations in which the warning lamp lights
up
●
the brak
e fluid level is too low
››› page 173.
●
there is a fault in the brake system.
This warning lamp can light up together with
the ABS system warning lamp.
WARNING
●
If the brake warning lamp does not go out
or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid
level in the reservoir is too low so there is a
risk of an accident ››› page 173, Brake fluid.
Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain
technical assistance.
●
If the brake warning lamp lights up to-
gether with the ABS lamp this could be
due to an ABS fault. This could cause the rear
wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This
could cause the rear to break away. Risk of
skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
assistance.
Cruise speed (cruise control)*
The warning lamp comes on when the
cruise control system is switched on. For fur-
ther information on the cruise control system
please see
›››
page 150
.
T
y
re pressure
Fig. 71 Centre console: tyre monitoring sys-
tem button.
The tyre monitoring lamp* compares wheel
revolutions and with it, using the ESC, the
wheel diameter of each wheel. If the diame-
ter of a wheel changes, the tyre control lamp
lights up. The wheel diameter changes
when:
●
Tyre pressure is insufficient.
●
The tyre structure is damaged.
●
The vehicle is unbalanced because of a
load.
●
The wheels of one axle are under more
pressure (for example, driving with a trailer or
on steep slopes).
●
The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.
●
The temporary spare wheel is fitted.
●
The wheel on one axle is changed.
»
61
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Tyre pressure adjustment
On adjusting tyre pressure or changing one
or more wheels, the ››› Fig. 71
button must be
k
ept
pressed down, with the ignition on, until
an acoustic signal is heard.
If the wheels are under excessive load (for ex-
ample, driving with a trailer or heavy load),
the tyre pressure must be increased to the
recommended value for a full load (see the
sticker on the inside of the fuel flap). If the
tyre monitor system button is pressed down,
the new tyre pressures are confirmed.
The tyre pressure control lamp lights up
If the tyre pressure of a wheel is much lower
than the value set by the driver, then the tyre
pressure control lamp ›››
will light up.
WARNING
●
When the tyre pressure control lamp lights
up, reduce speed immediately and avoid any
sudden turning or braking manoeuvre. Stop
when possible, and check the tyre pressure
and status.
●
The driver is responsible for maintaining
correct tyre pressures. For this reason, tyre
pressure must be regularly checked.
●
Under certain circumstances (e.g. when
driving in a sporty manner, in winter condi-
tions or on a dirt track) the tyre control lamp
may light up belatedly or may function incor-
rectly.
Note
If the battery is disconnected, the yellow
warning lamp lights up after turning the
ignition on.
This should turn off after a brief
journey.
Speed selector lever lock*
The brake pedal must be depressed when
this warning lamp lights up. This is necessary
when the automatic gearbox* selector lever
is moved out of the positions P
or
N
.
Fuel level/reserve
It lights up when only 7 litres of fuel remain
in the tank, and an
acoustic signal* al
so
sou
nds. It reminds you to fuel up the fuel
tank as soon as possible
›››
page 163.
Door open display*
This warning lamp lights up if one of the
doors is open.
The warning light should go off when all
the doors are closed correctly.
Rear lid open*
The warning lamp should switch off when
the r
ear lid is fully closed.
Main beam headlights
The warning lamp lights up when the main
beams are on or when the headlight flasher
is operated.
For further information see ››› page 93.
Electro-hydraulic steering*
The level of steering assistance depends on
the vehicle speed and on the steering wheel
turning speed.
The warning lamp should light up for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched on. It
should go out once the engine is started.
There is a fault in the electro-hydraulic steer-
ing system if the lamp does not go out or
lights up whilst the vehicle is in motion. Take
the vehicle to technical services as soon as
possible.
62
Dash panel
Note
When towing the vehicle with the engine
stopped or due to a fault in the power steer-
ing, this will not operate. The vehicle can still
be steered, but it will require greater force to
turn the steering wheel.
Emission control system*
Control lamp flashes:
When there i
s misfiring that can damage the
catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive
carefully to the nearest specialised workshop
to have the engine checked.
The control lamp lights up:
If a fault has developed during driving which
has reduced the quality of the exhaust gas
(e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and
drive carefully to the nearest specialised
workshop to have the engine checked.
Level*/Temperature of the coolant
There is a fault if:
●
The warning symbol does not go out again
after a few seconds.
●
The warning lamp lights up or flashes while
the vehicle is moving, and three acoustic
warning signals
›
›
›
are emitted.
This means that either the coolant level is too
low or the coolant temperature is too high.
Coolant temperature too high
If the warning lamp comes on, stop the vehi-
cle, turn off the engine and wait for it to cool
down.
Check the coolant level.
If
the c
oolant level is correct, the overheating
may be caused by a malfunction of the radia-
tor fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and have
it replaced if necessary ››› page 195.
If the control lamp lights up again after driv-
ing on for a short distance, stop the vehicle
and switch the engine off. Contact a Techni-
cal Service or a specialised workshop.
Coolant level too low
If the warning lamp comes on , stop the vehi-
cle, turn off the engine and wait for it to cool
down. First check the coolant level. If the lev-
el of the coolant is below the “MIN” mark,
top up with coolant liquid ›››
.
WARNING
●
If your vehicle is immobilised for technical
reasons, move it to a safe distance from traf-
fic. Turn the engine off, turn the hazard lights
on and place the warning triangle.
●
Never open the bonnet if you can see or
hear steam or coolant escaping from the en-
gine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait un-
til you can no longer see or hear escaping
steam or coolant.
●
The engine compartment is a dangerous
area. Before carrying out any work in the en-
gine compartment, switch off the engine and
allow it to cool down. Always note the corre-
sponding warnings ››› page 166.
Alternator
This warning lamp signals a fault in the alter-
nator.
The warning lamp lights up when the igni-
tion is switched on. It should go out when the
engine has started running.
If the warning lamp lights up while driv-
ing, the alternator is no longer charging the
battery. You should immediately drive to the
nearest specialised workshop.
You should avoid using electrical equipment
that is not absolutely necessary because this
will drain the battery.
Turn signals
Depending on which turn signal is operating,
either the left or right turn signal lamp
flashes. Both control lamps will flash at the
same time when the hazard warning lights
are switched on.
»
63
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
If any of both turn signals fails, the warning
lamp will start flashing twice faster than nor-
mal.
For further information on the turn signals,
please see ››› page 93.
“SAFE” Electronic immobiliser*
This warning lamp flashes if an unauthorised
key is used.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates
the electronic immobiliser automatically
when the key is inserted into the ignition.
The electronic immobiliser will be activated
again automatically as soon as you pull the
key out of the ignition lock.
If the following message* is shown on the in-
strument panel display: SAFE
, the vehicle
c
annot
be started.
The engine can, however, be started if the
appropriate coded SEAT genuine key is used.
Note
The vehicle cannot operate properly if you do
not have a genuine SEAT key.
Digital instrument panel
display
Fuel gauge and reserve indicator
Fig. 72 Instrument panel: fuel gauge
The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 45 li-
tres.
When the gauge reaches the reserve area,
››› Fig. 72
the warning lamp will light up and
an ac
ou
stic signal will sound at the same
time, reminding the driver to refuel. At this
point there are still 7 litres of fuel in the tank.
Digital clock*
–
To set the hour, press button
4
››› Fig. 70.
The “hour” option flashes on the digital
display and is set using button
5
“set”
››› Fig. 70
.
–
T
o set
the minutes, press button
4
again
and select the minute option. Set from but-
ton
5
“set”.
Once the operation has been carried out, the
system memorises the time.
Recommended gear display*
Fig. 73 Gear display.
Use the gear display to save fuel. If you are
not in the correct gear, a triangle will appear
next to the gear display indicating whether
you should change up or down ››› Fig. 73
. For
f
ur
ther information on the gear change dis-
play, please see the ››› page 134.
Note
The gear change indication should not be tak-
en into account when quick acceleration is re-
quired (for example when overtaking).
64
Dash panel
Multi-function display (MFI)*
Fig. 74 Windscreen wiper lever: button
A
A
and rocker switch
B
.
The multifunction display (MFI) shows you in-
formation on the journey and fuel consump-
tion. It has two automatic memories: 1 - Trip
memory
and
2 - Total memory.
The selected
memory will be shown in the upper right-
hand corner of the display.
Selecting a memory
–
With the ignition switched on, briefly press
button ››› Fig. 74
A
on the window wiper
lever to move from one memory to another.
Resetting a memory
–
Select the memory that you would like to
reset.
–
Press and hold button
A
on the window
wiper lever for at least 2 seconds.
The trip memory 1 collects the travel and
consumption rates from the moment the igni-
tion is switched on until it is switched off. If
the journey is continued within two hours of
switching off the ignition, the new values will
be added to the existing trip recorder memo-
ry. The memory will automatically be deleted
if the journey is interrupted for more than 2
hours.
The
total memory 2 c
o
llects the trip data for
any number of individual journeys (even if
the ignition is switched off for longer than
two hours) up to a total of 19 hours and 59
minutes travel time or 1,999 km distance
travelled. The memory will automatically be
deleted if one of the named values is
reached.
You can switch between the following dis-
plays in the multi-function display (MFI) by
operating rocker switch ››› Fig. 74
B
on the
windscreen wiper lever:
Memory displays
●
Driving speed
●
Journey duration
●
Average speed
●
Distance
●
Operating range
●
Average fuel consumption
●
Current fuel consumption
●
Outside temperature indicator
●
Speed warning
km/h - Driving speed
Driving speed is digitally shown in the dis-
play.
min - Journey duration
The display shows the amount of time which
has elapsed since the ignition was switched
on.
The maximum display value in both memo-
ries is 19 hours and 59 minutes. The memory
will automatically be deleted once this value
has been reached.
Ø km/h (mph) - Average speed
After turning on the ignition, the average
speed will be shown after travelling a dis-
tance of approximately 100 metres. Until
then dashes will appear in the display. The
display will be updated every 5 seconds
while the vehicle is in motion.
km (miles) - Distance travelled
The display shows the distance travelled
since the ignition was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memo-
ries is 1,999 km. The memory will automati-
cally be deleted once this value has been
reached.
»
65
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Km (miles) - Fuel range
The fuel range is calculated using the figures
for tank content and current fuel consump-
tion. This shows how far the vehicle can trav-
el using the same conditions as a reference.
Ø l/100 km - Average fuel consumption
After turning on the ignition, average fuel
consumption will be shown after travelling
approximately 100 metres. Until then dashes
will appear in the display. The display will be
updated every 5 seconds while the vehicle is
in motion. The amount of fuel used will not
be shown.
l/100 km o l/h - Current fuel consumption
The display will show the current fuel con-
sumption in ltr/km whilst the vehicle is in
motion or in ltr/hour when the vehicle is at a
standstill with the engine running.
Using this display you can see how your driv-
ing style affects fuel consumption
››› page 134
.
Indic
at
ed speed warning
When the required speed has been reached,
enter the “Speed warning” mode in the menu
and press button ››› Fig. 74
A
RESET
. The set
speed is memorised. If the indicated speed is
exceeded at any time, a warning message is
displayed on the screen and an audible warn-
ing sounds.
1)
This may be deactivated by pressing the
RESET
button. The speed may be altered us-
ing the rocker switch ››› Fig. 74
B
in intervals
of 5 km/h within 5 seconds of the initial
memory value being stored.
Outside temperature display
The measurement margin ranges from -45 °C
(-49 °F) to +58 °C (+136 °F). At temperatures
lower than +4°C (+39 °F), an “ice crystal sym-
bol” is displayed and a “warning” is sounded
if the vehicle is moving at more than 10 km/h
(6 mph) (ice warning). This symbol will flash
for about 10 seconds and remains lit until
the outside temperature rises above +4°C
(+39°F), or if you are driving, the temperature
does not rise above +6°C (+43°F) if it was al-
ready lit.
The lighting of the ice crystal symbol is in-
tended to warn the driver of the risk of ice,
so that he/she proceeds with due care.
WARNING
There could be black ice on the road surface
even if the “snowflake symbol” is not shown.
For this reason you should not rely exclusive-
ly on this display - Risk of accident!
Note
When the vehicle is at a standstill or when
travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
ture displayed may be higher than the true
outside temperature as a result of the heat
produced by the engine.
Selector lever position display*
Fig. 75 Digital display: Gearbox lever position
for automatic gearbox.
1)
Depending on the model version, the message on
the screen may vary and may be represented by the
flashing of the speed indicator or by a speed mes-
sage.
66
Dash panel
The position of the automatic selector lever
will be shown on the display ››› page 129.
Odometer
The upper counter in the display registers the
total mileage covered by the vehicle.
The lower counter registers the short jour-
neys. The last digit indicates 100-metre sec-
tions. The trip recorder counter may be reset
by pressing the reset button ››› Fig. 70
5
.
Service interval display
Fig. 76 Service interval display
The service indication is shown on the instru-
ment panel display ››› Fig. 76
.
S
EA
T distinguishes between services with en-
gine oil change (e.g. Interval Service) and
services without engine oil change (e.g. In-
spection Service). The service interval display
only indicates the dates of services that in-
clude engine oil change. The dates of all oth-
er services, such as Inspection Service or
brake fluid change, appear in the sticker on
the door pillar or in the Maintenance Pro-
gramme.
Vehicles with service intervals dependent on
time/distance travelled already have certain
service intervals set.
The intervals are calculated separately in ve-
hicles with LongLife service. Technical pro-
gress has made it possible to considerably
reduce servicing requirements. With the
LongLife System, SEAT ensures that your ve-
hicle only has an interval service when it is
necessary. To calculate this (max. two years),
the conditions under which the vehicle is
used and the individual driving style are also
taken into account. The service pre-warning
will appear at 20 days or less prior to the cor-
responding service. The distance travelled is
rounded off to the nearest 100 km and the
time to full days. The current service message
can only be consulted 500 km or more after
the last service. Until that time, only dashes
are displayed.
Service warning
A service warning will appear when the igni-
tion is switched on if a service is due soon.
The instrument panel display will show the
“spanner symbol” and the “km (miles)”
indication, along with a clock symbol with
the days remaining until the date of the next
service. The figure indicated is the maximum
number of kilometres (miles) remaining be-
fore the date of the next service. The indica-
tion changes after a few seconds. A “clock
symbol” appears and the number of days un-
til the service appointment should be carried
out.
Service
If a service is due, an audible warning will
sound and the flashing “spanner” symbol
will be shown along with the fixed text SERV-
ICE.
If no service is carried out following the indi-
cation on the instrument panel, the excess
distance travelled and the excess time follow-
ing the SERVICE warning will be displayed.
Reading the service message
The current service message can be consul-
ted with the ignition on, the engine switched
off and the vehicle at a standstill:
●
Press the
button on the instrument pan-
el as often as necessary until the “spanner”
symbol is displayed.
»
67
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
An
overdue service
is indicated by a minus
s
ign in front of the mileage or day informa-
tion.
Resetting service interval display
If the service was not performed by a SEAT
dealership, the display must be reset as fol-
lows:
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Press and hold the
0.0 / SET
button.
●
Switch ignition back on.
●
Release the
0.0 / SET
button and press the
button within 20 seconds.
Do
not
reset the display between service in-
t
ervals, as the display will otherwise be incor-
rect.
If the display is reset manually, the next serv-
ice interval will be indicated after 15,000 km
or one year and will not be calculated individ-
ually.
Note
In LongLife Service vehicles, if the battery is
disconnected for a long period, the days re-
maining until the next service cannot be cal-
culated. Therefore, the service message indi-
cations may be incorrect. In this case, bear in
mind the maximum service intervals permit-
ted in the ››› Booklet Maintenance Pro-
gramme.
68
Communications and multimedia
Communications and
multimedia
Steering column controls*
General information
The steering column incorporates multifunc-
tional modules from which the audio and tel-
ephone functions of the vehicle can be con-
trolled.
There are two versions of the multifunction
module:
●
Audio version, to control the available au-
dio functions from the steering wheel.
●
Audio + Telephone version, to control the
available audio functions and the telephone
system from the steering wheel.
Both versions can be used to control the au-
dio system (Radio, Audio CD, MP3 CD,
iPod
1)
/PND
1)
).
The PND (portable navigation device) repro-
duces audio files through a micro SD card
and Bluetooth audio-streaming, and tracks
may be changed using the controls on the
steering column.
1)
If fitted in the vehicle.
69
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Audio Control
Fig. 77 Audio controls.
Button
Short press
Radio CD Audio MP3 CD AUX-IN
VOL + Volume up
VOL – Volume down
MODE Cycle through source FM - AM - CD - FM...
Station search.
Increase frequency
Next track
No function
Station search.
Decrease frequency
Previous track
No function
Next preset No function Change folder (forward) No function
Previous preset No function Change folder (back) No function
70
Communications and multimedia
Audio + Telephone Control
Fig. 78 Audio + telephone controls.
But-
ton
Short press Long press
Radio
Audio CD /
MP3 CD
AUX-IN
PND (Micro SD/Blue-
tooth Audio)
Radio
Audio CD / MP3
CD
AUX-IN
PND (Micro SD/Blue-
tooth Audio)
VOL + Volume up Continue volume up
VOL – Volume down Continue volume down
Voice recognition activation
Press to speak
a)
No function No function
Station search.
Higher frequen-
cy
Next track No function
Next station or song de-
pending on source
Station search.
Higher frequen-
cy
Next track No function
Next station or song de-
pending on source
Station search.
Lower frequen-
cy
Previous track No function
Previous station or song
depending on source
Station search.
Lower frequency
Previous track No function
Previous station or song de-
pending on source
Accept call/hang up ››› table on page 72 Reject call ››› table on page 72
»
71
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
But-
ton
Short press Long press
Radio
Audio CD /
MP3 CD
AUX-IN
PND (Micro SD/Blue-
tooth Audio)
Radio
Audio CD / MP3
CD
AUX-IN
PND (Micro SD/Blue-
tooth Audio)
MODE Cyclical source change Cyclical source change
a)
Function only available if the vehicle has a telephone unit (other than PND)
Key functions
1)
If there is an in-
coming call
Press once: accept call
During a call Press once: it ends the call
Without an in-
coming call
Press once: the PND goes into tele-
phone mode (if not already in this
mode).
Press twice: opens the call history of
the telephone connected to the PND.
Press three times: the first number in
the call history is called.
If no telephone
is connected
Press once: the PND will display the
message “There is no telephone con-
nected, please connect a telephone”.
Bluetooth System*
General information
This system allows you to connect your mo-
bile phone via Bluetooth connection and to
use the hands-free mode.
The hands-free device means that the tele-
phone can be used inside the vehicle; the
driver will not have to remove their hands
from the steering wheel nor will be distracted
from traffic.
Available functions include making calls in
hands-free mode, access to the mobile
phone address book, access to the call list
and control of the voice recognition system.
Before using the Bluetooth system, the mo-
bile phone should be connected to the vehi-
cle installation via Bluetooth
›››
page 74.
Switching on/off
The Bluetooth system is activated when the
ignition is turned on and it is deactivated
when the key is removed from the ignition.
With the system activated, if the button
››› Fig. 80
(“PTT”) is pressed the voice con-
trol activates, and if there is no telephone
connected, Bluetooth visibility is turned on
and a search for a telephone begins.
If there is a call in process when the system
is deactivated, the active call is not cancel-
led, but transferred to the mobile phone.
Bluetooth
Use compatible Bluetooth devices only. For
more information about compatible Blue-
tooth products, consult your dealership or
the SEAT website.
1)
If a telephone is already connected via Bluetooth
to the PND
72
Communications and multimedia
Some Bluetooth mobile phones are detected
and connected automatically when the igni-
tion is switched on. For this to take place the
telephone must be switched on and its Blue-
tooth function activated, and there must be
no active Bluetooth connection from other
devices.
Bluetooth connections are free.
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth
®
SIG, Inc.
Declaration of conformity
S1nn GmbH & Co. KG certifies that the UHV
High
unit complies with the basic require-
ments
and the r
est of the relevant provisions
of the Directive 1999/5/CE. A copy of the
declaration of conformity can be found at
http://www.s1nn.de/certifications/uhv-high-
manual .
Exchange of information between the mobile
phone and the Bluetooth system
The mobile phone system sends the data and
the requests via Bluetooth to the mobile
phone that is connected. If the connected
mobile phone is temporarily “overloaded”, it
may not respond to the requests from the
Bluetooth system.
In this case, wait for the mobile phone to re-
act or make a new call.
WARNING
●
Before starting the trip, you should famili-
arise yourself with the different functions of
the Bluetooth system. Bluetooth system set-
tings should adjusted when the car is stop-
ped or by a passenger.
●
Please concentrate on driving. As the driv-
er, you are also responsible for road safety.
For this reason, you should only use the func-
tions when the traffic situation allows so and
in a manner that allows you to maintain con-
trol of the vehicle. Otherwise, you run the risk
of causing an accident.
●
The speech system must not be used in ca-
ses of emergency, since the voice changes in
stressful situations. This could result in a
failed or delayed telephone connection. Al-
ways dial emergency numbers manually!
●
Always observe applicable legislation.
●
Adjust the volume so that external warning
sounds (e.g. emergency vehicles, etc.) are al-
ways audible.
Note
●
The voice control system is only available
in the following languages: Spanish, Mexican
Spanish, German, English, French, Canadian
French, Italian, Portuguese, Czech, Russian
and Dutch. For other languages, the prede-
fined language for the voice instructions is
English. Please take the vehicle to technical
services if you wish to change the language.
●
There may be restrictions on the use of
Bluetooth devices in some countries. Infor-
mation is available from the local authorities.
●
If you connect the mobile phone Bluetooth
system to a Bluetooth device, consult the
safety warnings in its instruction manual. Use
compatible Bluetooth products only.
●
If a call is received or made using the Blue-
tooth system when the radio is switched off,
this will always automatically turn on provid-
ing that the ignition is switched on. The mes-
sage Phone will appear on the radio display
when a ca
ll is received.
●
If a call is received or made, the sound of
the radio programme or other audio source
that is currently being listened to will be mut-
ed in order for the telephone conversation to
be carried out without unpleasant back-
ground noise.
●
Adjust the volume of the conversation on
the mobile phone to “maximum” and modify
the volume on the radio volume control.
Compatibility with mobile phones
New models of mobile phones are being re-
leased constantly by the different brands,
with different operating systems and differ-
ent ways of operating. For this reason there
are some mobile phones that do not perform
some of the functions correctly or are even
totally incompatible. To help you when
»
73
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
choosing a mobile phone, SEAT offers the re-
sults of the compatibility tests on different
mobile phones. Visit the SEAT website or ask
at your dealer.
Depending on your mobile phone model, cer-
tain functions may not be available or it may
be necessary to change the configuration. Fa-
miliarise yourself with your phone and read
the instruction manual to learn the possibili-
ties it offers.
Even when the mobile phone appears as
compatible in our list, we have noticed that
occasionally it is possible that the phone
presents an abnormal behaviour with the
system due to software errors. In this case,
we recommend you update the telephone
software. Mobile phone manufacturers usual-
ly make updates available on Internet for
their customers in order to improve the work-
ing of the phone.
In the event that you have various applica-
tions to make calls, such as internet calling,
the mobile will ask you from which applica-
tion you wish to make the call. Until confir-
mation is given you will not be able to make
the call.
If you try to make a call and it is not pro-
cessed, check your mobile phone as it is pos-
sible that a pop-up window on your tele-
phone is requesting you to select the pro-
gram with which to make the call.
Bluetooth system components
Fig. 79 Display and handling components of
the Bluetooth system.
››› Fig. 79 Necessary components
A Multifunction control ››› page 75
B Radio ››› Booklet Radio
User profile
Each telephone must be paired to the Blue-
tooth system before using it for the first time.
When pairing a mobile phone for the first
time, you will be asked to create a user pro-
file. A user profile is necessary for you to con-
nect the mobile phone to the SEAT Bluetooth
system. Once the user profile has been cre-
ated, your telephone can be connected auto-
matically or manually . It is not necessary to
repeat the initial connection process each
time.
A maximum of four user profiles can be cre-
ated. If you try to create a fifth profile, the
profile which has been inactive for the most
time will automatically be deleted.
The pairing process can take several minutes
depending on the size of the phone book.
The procedure for pairing your mobile phone
to the SEAT system for the first time is descri-
bed below.
Pairing the mobile phone
Follow the steps below to connect the mobile
phone to the vehicle's Bluetooth by search-
ing for devices from the mobile phone:
●
Activate the Bluetooth in the mobile phone.
●
Turn on the ignition with the key. The vehi-
cle system will be visible to the mobile phone
via Bluetooth for 3 minutes. If 3 minutes have
passed you can also switch on Bluetooth visi-
bility again for 3 minutes more by pressing
the button (“PTT”)
›››
Fig. 80
.
●
Se
ar
ch for Bluetooth devices using the mo-
bile phone. Refer to the mobile phone man-
ual for instructions.
74
Communications and multimedia
●
A list of devices found is displayed on the
mobile phone. From this list, select the de-
vice
SEAT_BT
.
●
Ne
xt, accept the connection instructions on
the mobile phone.
●
When requested, follow the steps to con-
firm/enter the PIN. If the mobile requests a
PIN to be entered this is 1234, which is the
factory setting and can only be changed at
the workshop. Depending on the technology
supported by your mobile the process can
vary given that some mobiles only request
confirmation of a request to link to SEAT_BT,
while others require the PIN 1234 to be en-
tered.
●
The contacts from the mobile phone's
memory and/or SIM card are transferred to
the vehicle system
1)
. Some mobile phones
may display a message asking for confirma-
tion of access to the phone book or other op-
tions, these messages should be accepted in
order for the hands free system to access the
information contained on the mobile and in
order to carry out the complete functions of
the system.
●
The pairing is complete.
Automatic pairing
When the telephone has been connected and
the corresponding user profile created, your
telephone will automatically link up with the
SEAT telephone system under the following
conditions:
●
The mobile phone is switched on with the
Bluetooth function activated and the visibility
activated. The mobile phone must be close to
the vehicle.
●
The vehicle system has switched on Blue-
tooth visibility (it will be on for 3 minutes fol-
lowing activation of the contact or after
pressing the button “PTT”).
●
The automatic connection was accepted
during the questions of the first connection.
●
The connection to the system has not been
deleted in the mobile.
With the ignition switched on, the system
searches in the memorised Bluetooth devices
(user profiles), and if one of these devices is
found a connection attempt is made to con-
nect to the last linked profile that meets the
previously mentioned requirements. The sys-
tem will continue connection attempts while
there is no connected device.
When a Bluetooth device is connected or
when the automatic connection conditions
are met, in order to connect another Blue-
tooth device, an existing connection or one
that is in the process being connected must
be deactivated in advance. In order to do
this, deactivate the Bluetooth on the unwan-
ted device.
Note
●
The visibility of the vehicle's Bluetooth sys-
tem is switched on for three minutes when
the ignition is switched on with the key. After
3 minutes, if you need to activate the visibili-
ty again, you can do so with the voice control
››› page 76 or turning the ignition off and on
again.
●
If
for any reason you take more than 3 mi-
nutes to perform these steps or more than 30
seconds to enter the PIN, you will have to
start the process over again.
Controls on the multifunction control
Fig. 80 Multifunction control buttons.
»
1)
Depending on the phone model and configuration.
75
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
But-
ton
Function
“Push to talk” or “PTT” button.
Short press: start or cancel the speech control
system, interrupt message in process in order
to talk promptly, turn on Bluetooth visible for
3 minutes.
VOL + /
VOL –
Short press: adjust volume of telephone func-
tion.
Short press: Answer, Start, End a call.
Long press: Decline an incoming call, transfer
active call to private mode.
Voice control
The voice control system is activated with the
button
›››
Fig. 80
(“P
TT”).
Th
anks to the voice control you can use many
telephone functions without having to take
your eyes off the road or your hands off the
steering wheel.
Dialogue is the time during which the voice
control system transmits messages and can
receive spoken orders (commands).
If a call is received, then the dialogue is im-
mediately interrupted.
You can use the HELP in any part of the
menu. If you have any doubts or cannot de-
cide the Command to use, the system will
provide you with the available options.
You can CANCEL in any part of the menu.
Adjusting the volume
You can change the sound volume at any
time with the radio button or with the buttons
on the multifunction control.
The volume transmitted by the speaker de-
pends, among other aspects, on the volume
transmitted by the mobile. If the volume of
the mobile is low, or on silent, it is possible
that no sound will be heard through the vehi-
cle speaker.
Adjust the volume of your Bluetooth device to
the maximum.
Do not leave headphones connected to the
Bluetooth device when you wish to use the
hands free system.
Complying with these requirements, if the
speaker volume is very high, adjust it using
the controls on the steering wheel ››› page 71
or the volume control on the radio.
Connecting voice control (Dialogue)
You can start the dialogue at any time by
briefly pressing the ››› Fig. 80 (“PTT”) but-
ton on the multi-function control.
If the system does not recognise your com-
mand, there is a first help option which al-
lows a new input. After the second failed at-
tempt, the system repeats the second part of
the assistance cue. After a third failure the
system will answer with “Operation cancel-
led” and the dialogue will be ended.
Disconnecting voice control (Dialogue)
You can terminate the dialogue at any time
by briefly pressing the ››› Fig. 80 (“PTT”)
button on the multi-function control. If the
system is waiting for a command, you can
end the dialogue with the “CANCEL” com-
mand.
Interrupting an ongoing message
By pressing the ››› Fig. 80 (“PTT”) button
during the message, only the current mes-
sage is ended and it is possible to give an-
other command.
76
Communications and multimedia
Voice control orders (commands)
Voice control can be used in the following
languages:
Spanish, Mexican Spanish, German, English,
US English, French, Canadian French, Italian,
Portuguese, Czech, Russian and Dutch.
The language is configured at the dealer and
can only be changed at a SEAT Official Serv-
ice.
The languages available in each vehicle de-
pend on the destination of the vehicle.
Note the following to ensure that you are
properly understood:
●
Speak in a normal tone and without pauses
or exaggerated pronunciation.
●
Avoid poor articulation of words.
●
Keep the doors, windows and sun roof
closed if possible to avoid background
noises that might affect the system.
●
Keep the air vents directed away from the
microphone (located on the interior light).
●
At high speeds, you might need to speak
louder to drown out background noises.
●
Avoid other noises in the vehicle during a
dialogue (e.g. other passengers speaking in
the vehicle).
●
Avoid speaking when the system is saying
a cue.
●
The hands-free microphone is directed to-
wards the driver, therefore, only the driver
should try to operate the system.
●
To make a call when there is heavy back-
ground noise we recommend using the
speech controlled telephone book instead of
speaking individual digits. This will help
avoid mistakes when specifying telephone
numbers.
Basic commands, valid anywhere in the
menu
HELP
The system repeats all the possible com-
mands.
CANCEL Cancels a running dialogue.
Other commands for operating the Bluetooth system
Command Action
CALL [NAME]
a)
Dialling a contact from the address book.
PHONE BOOK This allows the user to display all the contacts, select one to call or store/delete its name by voice command.
CALL LIST The Received calls, Missed calls or Dialled numbers list is displayed.
DIAL NUMBER You can enter a telephone number so that you can call the applicable number ››› page 78.
REDIAL The system dials the last number.
»
77
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Command Action
OTHER OPTIONS
PHONE BOOK PLAY ALL (Select contact)
CALL contact
RECORD contact name by voice
b)
DELETE contact name by voice
SETTINGS
UPDATE phone book
LONG DIALOGUE / SHORT DIALOGUE
RESTORE factory SETTINGS
c)
RECORD OF CALLS
INCOMING calls
MISSED calls
DIALLED numbers
a)
Depending on the configuration of the system of the country, this command can be inverted: [SURNAME NAME].
b)
Because of the different pronunciations of each language, some of the names may not be read as you expected. Because of this you can record up to 15 contacts with your own voice.
c)
You are advised to restore the default settings upon selling your vehicle in order to delete personal details such as PIN, contacts, calls, etc. and restore settings.
DIAL NUMBER command
After saying the DIAL NUMBER command the
system asks you to enter a telephone num-
ber. The telephone number can be entered as
a sequence of digits pronounced coherently
(complete number), in series of digits (sepa-
rated by a brief pause) or in digits pro-
nounced separately. After each series of dig-
its (separated by a brief pause) the digits rec-
ognised until then are repeated.
Digits 0 - 9 and symbols +, , # are allowed.
The system does not recognise coherent nu-
meric combinations such as twenty-three, on-
ly individual digits spoken separately (two,
three).
Dialogue options
The voice control system includes the op-
tions, short dialogue and long dialogue. The
default setting is the long dialogue. The
short dialogue is recommended when you
are familiar with the orders and the structure
of the voice control menu. The long dialogue
offers more tips and information about the
voice control procedure. It can be changed
via voice control ››› page 77.
Opening and closing
Central locking
Description
The central locking system enables you to
lock and unlock all doors and the rear lid by
just pushing the button.
Central locking can be activated by using any
of the following options:
78
Opening and closing
●
the key
, by inserting it into the driver door
cylinder and r
ot
ating it in the opening direc-
tion. Depending on the vehicle version, ei-
ther all doors will be unlocked or only the
driver door will be unlocked. All doors will be
locked on locking the vehicle using the key.
●
the interior central lock button
››› page 81.
●
the radio frequency remote control, using
the buttons on the key ››› page 83.
Various functions are available to improve
the vehicle safety:
Locking system “Safe*”
Selective* unlocking system
Self-locking system to prevent involunta-
ry unlocking
Automatic speed dependent locking and
unlocking system*
Emergency unlocking system
Unlocking the vehicle*
Press button
››› Fig. 84
on remote
c
ontr
ol to unlock all the doors and rear
lid.
Locking the vehicle*
Press button
››› Fig. 84
on the remote
c
ontr
ol to lock all doors and the rear lid
or turn the key in the door to lock all
doors and the rear lid.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
WARNING
●
Locking from the outside carelessly or with-
out good visibility may lead to bruising, par-
ticularly in the case of children.
●
When locking a vehicle, never leave chil-
dren unaccompanied inside, as from the out-
side it will be difficult to provide assistance if
required.
●
Having the doors locked prevents intruders
from getting in, for example when stopped at
a traffic light.
Note
For anti-theft security, only the driver door is
fitted with a lock cylinder.
“Safe” security system**
This is an anti-theft device which consists of
a double lock for the door locks and a deacti-
vation function for the boot in order to pre-
vent forced entry.
Activation
The “safe” system is activated when the vehi-
cle is locked using the key or the remote con-
trol.
To activate it with the key, rotate once it is in-
serted in the door lock cylinder in the locking
direction.
To activate the system using the remote con-
trol, press the lock button once
on the re-
mote.
Once this system is activated, opening doors
from the outside and the inside is not possi-
ble. The rear lid can not be opened. The cen-
tral lock button does not work.
When the ignition is switched off, the instru-
ment panel display indicates that the “Safe”
system is on.
Deactivation
Rotate the key inserted in the lock cylinder
twice towards the locking direction.
To activate the system using the remote con-
trol, press the lock button on the remote
twice
in less than five seconds.
On deactivating the “Safe” system, the alarm
volumetric sensor is also deactivated.
With the “Safe” switched off, doors can be
opened from the interior but not from the ex-
terior.
See “Selective unlocking system*”
“Safe” status
On the driver door, there is warning lamp visi-
ble from outside the vehicle through the win-
dow which shows the “Safe” system status.
We will know that “Safe” system is activated
by the flashing warning lamp. The indicator
»
79
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
will flash on all vehicles, fitted and nor fitted
with an alarm, until they unlock.
Remember:
Safe activated with or without an alarm:
warning lamp flashes continuously.
Safe deactivated without an alarm: the warn-
ing lamp stays off.
Safe deactivated with an alarm:
the warning
l
amp s
tays off.
WARNING
No one should remain inside the vehicle if the
“Safe” system is activated because opening
the doors will not be possible in the event of
an emergency neither from the inside nor the
outside and help from the outside is made
difficult. Danger of death. Passengers could
become trapped inside in case of emergency.
Selective unlocking system**
This system allows to unlock either just the
driver door or all the vehicle.
Driver door unlock button
Unlock once. Use either the key or the remote
control.
Once the key
is inserted in the lock cylinder,
r
ot
ate once in the unlock direction. The driver
door will remain without “Safe” and un-
locked. In vehicles fitted with an alarm, see
the Anti-theft Alarm section ››› page 84.
Using the remote control, press the unlock
button on the remote
once. The “Safe”
system for all the vehicle is deactivated, only
the driver door is unlocked and both the
alarm and the warning lamp are also turned
off.
Unlocking all doors and the luggage
compartment
The unlock button on the remote control
must be pressed twice
so that all doors
and the luggage compartment can be
opened.
Press twice within 5 seconds to deactivate
the “Safe” system for all vehicle, to unlock all
doors and to use the luggage compartment.
The warning lamp and the alarm (only vehi-
cles fitted with one) are turned off.
Unlocking the luggage compartment
See ››› page 86
.
A
ctiv
ating the selective unlocking system*
With the door open, insert a key into the start
cylinder and start the ignition. Insert the oth-
er key into the driver door lock and turn in the
opening direction for at least 3 seconds. The
turn signals will flash twice.
Deactivating the selective unlocking system*
With the door open, insert a key into the start
cylinder and start the ignition. Insert the oth-
er key into the driver door lock and turn in the
locking direction for at least 3 seconds. The
turn signals will flash once.
Self-locking system to prevent
involuntary unlocking
It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un-
intentional unlocking of the vehicle.
If the vehicle is unlocked and none of the
doors (including the boot) are opened within
30 seconds, it re-locks automatically.
Automatic speed-dependent locking
and unlocking system*
This is a safety system which prevents access
to the vehicle from the outside when it is run-
ning (e.g. when stopped at a traffic light).
Locking
The doors will lock automatically if the speed
of 15 km/h (9 mph) is exceeded. The rear lid
will lock automatically if the speed of 6 km/h
(4 mph) is exceeded.
80
Opening and closing
If the vehicle is stopped and any of its doors
open, when starting again and exceeding the
mentioned speed, all doors will lock again.
Unlocking
On withdrawing the ignition key, the vehicle
will returns to its status prior to self-locking.
Each door can be unlocked and opened inde-
pendently from the inside (for example, when
a passenger gets out). To do it, simply oper-
ate the lever inside the door.
Activating the system*
With the ignition on, press the locking key on
the central locking system within 3 to 10 sec-
onds.
Deactivating the system*
With the ignition on, press the unlocking key
on the central locking system within 3 to 10
seconds.
In both cases, if the operation has been car-
ried out correctly, the locking lamp will flash
››› Fig. 81
.
WARNING
The door handles must not be operated when
the vehicle is running: the door would open.
Note
If the airbags are triggered during an acci-
dent, the vehicle is unlocked, except for the
luggage compartment. It is possible to lock
the vehicle from inside with the central lock-
ing, after turning the ignition off and back on
again.
Central lock button*
Fig. 81 Central lock button.
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 9
The central lock button allows you to lock and
unlock the vehicle from the inside.
The central lock button also works with the
ignition switched off, except when the “safe”
system is activated.
Please note the following if you lock your ve-
hicle with the central lock button:
●
Locking the doors and rear lid prevents ac-
cess from the outside
(for safety reasons, e.g.
when s
t
opped at a traffic light).
●
The driver door cannot be locked while it is
open. This avoids the user from forgetting his
key inside the vehicle.
●
All doors can be unlocked separately from
inside the vehicle. Do this by pulling the door
release lever once.
WARNING
●
If the vehicle is locked, children and disa-
bled people may be trapped inside it.
●
Repeated operation of central locking will
prevent the central lock button from working
for a few seconds. Then, it can only be un-
locked in case it has been previously locked.
After few seconds, the central locking be-
comes operative again.
●
The central lock button is not operative
when the vehicle is locked from the outside
(with the remote control or the key).
Note
●
Vehicle locked,
button.
●
Vehicle unlocked,
button.
81
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Childproof lock
3 Valid for vehicles: 5-door versions
Fig. 82 Childproof lock on the left hand side
door.
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors
from being opened from the inside. This sys-
tem prevents minors from opening a door ac-
cidentally while the vehicle is running.
This function is independent of the vehicle
electronic opening and locking systems. It
only affects rear doors. It can only be activa-
ted and deactivated manually, as described
below:
Activating the childproof lock
–
Unlock the vehicle and open the door in
which you wish to activate the childproof
lock.
–
With the door open, rotate the groove in
the door using the ignition key, anti-clock-
wise for the left-hand side doors ››› Fig. 82
and clockwise for the right-hand side
doors.
Deactivating the childproof lock
–
Unlock the vehicle and open the door
whose childproof lock you want to deacti-
vate.
–
With the door open, rotate the groove in
the door using the ignition key, anti-clock-
wise for the right-hand side doors, and
clockwise for the left-hand side doors
››› Fig. 82
.
Onc
e the c
hildproof lock is activated, the
door can only be opened from the outside.
The childproof lock can be activated or deac-
tivated by inserting the key in the groove
when the door is open, as described above.
Keys
Set of keys
Fig. 83 Set of keys.
The set of keys may consists of the following,
depending on the version of your vehicle:
●
a remote control key ››› Fig. 83
A
●
a key without remote control
B
,
●
a plastic key tab*
C
.
or
●
two keys without remote control
B
●
a plastic key tab*
C
.
Duplicate keys
If you need a replacement key, go to a Techni-
cal Service with your vehicle identification
number.
82
Opening and closing
WARNING
●
An incorrect use of the keys can cause seri-
ous injuries.
●
Never leave children or disabled persons in
the vehicle. In case of emergency, they may
not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on
their own.
●
An uncontrolled use of the key could start
the engine or activate any electric equipment
(e.g. electric windows), causing risk of acci-
dent. The doors can be locked using the re-
mote control key. This could become an ob-
stacle for assistance in an emergency situa-
tion.
●
Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An
unauthorised use of your vehicle could result
in injury, damage or theft. Always take the
key with you when you leave the vehicle.
●
Never remove the key from the ignition if
the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer-
ing could suddenly block and it would be im-
possible to steer the vehicle.
CAUTION
There are electronic components in the re-
mote control key. Avoid wetting and hitting
the keys.
Radio frequency remote
control*
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
Fig. 84 Assignment of buttons on the remote
control key.
Fig. 85 Range of the radio frequency remote
control.
The radio frequency remote control key is
used to lock and unlock the vehicle from a
distance.
By using button
4
››› Fig. 84
on the control,
the k
ey
shaft is released.
Unlocking the vehicle
››› Fig. 84
1
.
Locking the vehicle
››› Fig. 84
2
.
Unlocking the rear lid. Press button
››› Fig. 84
3
until all the turn signals on the
vehicle flash briefly. When the unlocking but-
ton
3
is pressed, you have 2 minutes to
open the door. Once this time has passed, it
will lock again.
Moreover, the battery indicator on the key
››› Fig. 84
(arrow), will flash.
The r
emot
e control transmitter and the bat-
teries are integrated in the key. The receiver
is inside the vehicle. The maximum range de-
pends on different factors. The range is re-
duced as the batteries start to lose power.
WARNING
Read and observe the relevant warnings ›››
in Set of keys on page 83.
Note
●
The radio frequency remote control key
functions only when you are within range
››› Fig. 85.
»
83
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
●
If the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked
by using the radio frequency remote control,
the remote control key will have to be re-
synchronised. For this, go to your technical
services.
Changing the battery
If the battery indicator does not flash when
the buttons are pushed, the battery must be
replaced.
CAUTION
The use of inappropriate batteries may dam-
age the radio frequency remote control. For
this reason, always replace the dead battery
with another of the same size and power.
For the sake of the environment
Used batteries must be disposed of at an ap-
propriate waste facility or through an author-
ised service, given that their components can
affect the environment.
Synchronising the remote control key
If it is not possible to unlock or lock the door
with the remote control, it should be re-
synchronised.
While the vehicle is open:
–
Press the
button
2
››› Fig. 84
on the re-
mot
e c
ontrol.
–
Then close the vehicle using the key shaft
within one minute.
While the vehicle is closed:
–
Press the
button
1
››› Fig. 84
on the re-
mot
e c
ontrol.
–
Then close the vehicle using the key shaft
within one minute.
It is possible that the vehicle could no longer
be opened and closed with the remote con-
trol if the button
is repeatedly pressed
outside of the effective range of the radio fre-
quency remote control. The remote control
key will have to be resynchronised.
Spare remote control keys are available at
your Technical Service, where they must be
matched to the locking system.
Up to five remote control keys can be used.
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description of anti-theft alarm
system*
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to
break into the vehicle or steal it. The system
will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig-
nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced.
The anti-theft alarm system is automatically
switched on when locking the vehicle. The
system is immediately activated and the turn
signal light located on the driver door will
flash along with the turn signals, indicating
that the alarm and the locking security sys-
tem (double lock) have been turned on.
If any of the doors or the bonnet are open,
they will not be included in the protection
zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con-
nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse-
quently closed, they will be automatically in-
cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle
and the turn signals will flash accordingly
when the doors close.
●
The turn signal light will flash twice on
opening and deactivating the alarm.
●
The turn signal light will flash once on clos-
ing and activating the alarm.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The system triggers an alarm, if the following
unauthorised actions are carried out when
the vehicle is locked:
●
Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the
vehicle key without switching on the ignition
in the next 15 seconds (in certain markets,
such as the Netherlands, the alarm is activa-
ted immediately).
84
Opening and closing
●
A door is opened.
●
Opening the bonnet.
●
The rear lid is opened.
●
Ignition switched on with a non-validated
key.
●
Movements in the driving compartment
(vehicles with a volume sensor).
●
Towing of the vehicle
1)
.
●
Vehicle tilt angle
1)
.
●
Undue manipulation of the alarm.
●
Battery handling.
In this case, the acoustic signals will go off
and the turn signal will flash for approximate-
ly 30 seconds. This cycle may be repeated up
to 10 times depending on the country.
Opening all the doors in manual mode
In vehicles without an alarm, when opening
the driver door manually, all doors are
opened.
How to switch the alarm off
To deactivate the anti-theft alarm, turn the
key in the opening direction, open the door
and switch the ignition on, or press the un-
lock button
on the remote control.
In vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm
system, you have 15 seconds to insert the
key in the ignition lock and activate the igni-
tion if the vehicle is opened using the driver
door key.
Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec.
and the ignition will be blocked.
Note
●
After 28 days, the indicator light will be
switched off to prevent the battery from
draining if the vehicle has been left parked
for a long period of time. The alarm system
remains activated.
●
The alarm will trigger again if attempts are
made to open another protection zone.
●
The alarm system can be activated or deac-
tivated using the radio frequency remote con-
trol ››› page 83.
●
The anti-theft
alarm is not activated when
the vehicle is locked from within using the
central locking button
.
●
If the vehicle battery is run down or flat
then the anti-theft alarm will not operate cor-
rectly.
●
Vehicle monitoring remains active even if
the battery is disconnected or not working for
any reason.
●
The alarm is triggered immediately if one of
the battery cables is disconnected while the
alarm system is active.
Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-
tow system*
Monitoring or control function incorporated
in the anti-theft alarm* which detects unau-
thorized vehicle entry by means of ultra-
sound.
Activation
–
It is automatically switched on when the
anti-theft alarm is activated.
Deactivation
–
Open the vehicle with the key, either me-
chanically or by pressing the
button on
the remote control. The time period from
when the door is opened until the key is in-
serted into the contact should not exceed
15 seconds, otherwise the alarm will be
triggered.
–
Press the button
on the remote control
twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sen-
sors will be deactivated. The alarm system
remains activated.
»
1)
With vehicles fitted with a tow-away protection
85
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
tow system are automatically switched on
again next time the vehicle is locked.
The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow
sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-
ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched
on. In order to activate it, all the doors and
the rear lid must be closed.
If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior
monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must
be done each time that the vehicle is locked;
if not, they will be automatically switched on.
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
tow system should be switched off if animals
are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,
their movements will trigger the alarm) or
when, for example, the vehicle is transported
or has to be towed with only one axle on the
ground.
False alarms
Interior monitoring will only operate correctly
if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-
serve related legal requirements.
The following cases may cause a false alarm:
●
Open windows (partially or fully),
●
Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or
completely),
●
Movement of objects inside the vehicle,
such as loose papers, items hanging from
the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.
Note
●
If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is
activated without the volumetric sensor func-
tion, relocking will activate the alarm with all
its functions, except the volumetric sensor.
This function is reactivated when the alarm is
switched on again, unless it is deliberately
switched off.
●
If the alarm has been triggered by the volu-
metric sensor, this will be indicated by a
flashing of the warning lamp on the driver
door when the vehicle is opened. The flash is
different to the flash indicating the alarm is
activated.
●
The vibration of a mobile phone left inside
the vehicle may cause the vehicle interior
monitoring alarm to trigger, as both sensors
react to movements and shakes inside the ve-
hicle.
●
If on activating the alarm, any door or the
rear lid is open, only the alarm will be activa-
ted. The vehicle interior monitoring and the
anti-tow system will only be activated once
all the doors are closed (including the rear
lid).
Boot hatch
Unlocking and locking
Fig. 86 Close-up of the inside trim of the rear
lid: hand grip
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 9
The rear lid opening system operates electri-
cally. It is activated by using the handle on
the boot lid.
This system may or may not be operative, de-
pending on the situation of the vehicle.
If the rear lid is locked then it cannot be
opened, however if it is unlocked then the
opening system is operative and the rear lid
may be opened.
To change the locking / unlocking status,
press the button
or the button
1
››› Fig. 84
on the remote control key.
86
Opening and closing
A warning appears on the instrument panel
display if the rear lid is open or not properly
closed.* An audible warning is also given if
the boot lid is opened while the vehicle is
moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.
WARNING
●
Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of
accident or injury.
●
The rear lid must not be opened when the
reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may
damage the tail lights.
●
Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down
with your hand on the rear window. The glass
could smash. Risk of injury!
●
Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it.
If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv-
ing.
●
Never allow children to play in or around
the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected
to extremely high and low temperatures, de-
pending on the time of year, thus causing se-
rious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal
consequences. Close and lock both the rear
lid and all the other doors when you are not
using the vehicle.
●
Closing the rear lid without observing and
ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury
to you and to third parties. Make sure that no
one is in the path of the rear lid.
●
Never drive with the rear lid open or half-
closed, exhaust gases may enter into the in-
terior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
●
If you only open the rear lid, do not leave
the key inside. The vehicle cannot be opened
if the key is left inside.
Electric windows
Opening or closing the windows
electrically*
Fig. 87 Detail of the driver door: controls for
the front and rear windows (5-door vehicles
with front and rear electric windows).
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 10
The front and rear electric windows can be
operated by using the controls on the driver
door. The other doors each have a switch for
their own window.
Always close the windows fully if you park
the vehicle or leave it unattended ››› .
You can use the electric windows for approx.
10 minutes after switching off the ignition if
neither the driver door nor the front passen-
ger door has been opened and the key has
not been removed from the ignition.
Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear
doors are activated.
Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors
are deactivated.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Set of
keys on page 83.
●
Incorr
ect use of the electric windows can
result in injury.
●
Never close the rear lid without observing
and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could
cause serious injury to you and third parties.
Make sure that no one is in the path of a win-
dow.
●
The engine may accidentally be started and
be out of control.
●
If the ignition is switched on, the electric
equipment could be activated with risk of in-
jury, for example, in the electric windows.
●
The doors can be locked using the remote
control key. This could become an obstacle
for assistance in an emergency situation.
●
Always take the key with you when you
leave the vehicle.
»
87
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
●
The electric windows will work until the ig-
nition has been switched off and one of the
front doors has been opened.
●
If necessary, use the safety switch to disa-
ble the rear electric windows. Make sure that
they have been disabled.
Note
If the window is not able to close because it
is stiff or because of an obstruction, the win-
dow will automatically open again
››› page 88
. If this happens, check why the
windo
w could not be closed before attempt-
ing to close it again.
One-touch opening and closing*
One-touch opening and closing means you
do not have to hold down the button.
Buttons ››› Fig. 87
1
,
2
,
4
and
5
have
two positions for opening windows and two
for closing them. This makes it easier to open
and close windows to the desired position.
One-touch closing
–
Pull up the window button briefly up to the
second position. The window closes fully.
One-touch opening
–
Push down the window button briefly up to
the second position. The window opens
fully.
Restoring one-touch opening and closing
–
The automatic open and close function will
not work if the battery has been temporari-
ly disconnected. The function can be re-
stored as follows:
–
Close the window as far as it will go by lift-
ing and holding the electric window switch.
–
Release the switch and then lift it again for
1 second. This will re-enable the automatic
function.
If you push (or pull) a button to the first
stage, the window will open (or close) until
you release the button. If you push or lift the
button briefly to the second stage, the win-
dow will open (one-touch opening) or close
(one-touch closing) automatically. If you op-
erate the button while the window is opening
or closing, it stops at this position.
Roll-back function
The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-
jury when the electric windows close.
●
If a window is obstructed when closing au-
tomatically, the window stops at this point
and lowers immediately ››› .
●
Next, check why the window does not close
before attempting it again.
●
If you try within the following 10 seconds
and the window closes again with difficulty
or there is an obstruction, the automatic clos-
ing will stop working for 10 seconds.
●
If the window is still obstructed, the win-
dow will stop at this point.
●
If there is no obvious reason why the win-
dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by
pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-
dow closes with maximum force. The roll-
back function is now deactivated.
If more than 10 seconds pass, the window
will open fully when you operate one of the
buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.
WARNING
●
Incorrect use of the electric windows can
result in injury.
●
Always take the ignition key with you when
leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to
be gone for a short time. Please ensure that
children are never left alone inside the vehi-
cle.
●
The electric windows will work until the ig-
nition has been switched off and one of the
front doors has been opened.
88
Opening and closing
●
Closing the windows without observing and
ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury
to you and third parties. Make sure that no
one is in the path of a window.
●
Never allow people to remain in the vehicle
when you close the vehicle from the outside.
The windows cannot be opened even in an
emergency.
●
The roll-back function does not prevent fin-
gers or other parts of the body getting
pinched against the window frame. Risk of
accident.
Convenience opening and closing*
Using the door lock*
–
Hold the key in the door lock of the driver
door in either the locking or the unlocking
position until all windows are either
opened or closed.
–
Release the key to interrupt this function.
Using the remote control
–
Keep the locking/unlocking button pressed
for the electric window risers to
open/close; if you stop pressing the but-
ton, the window raising/lowering function
is stopped.
–
If the automatic raising is stopped and im-
mediately after, the opening button is kept
pressed, the window risers will lower.
–
Once the windows are completely closed,
the turn signals will flash.
Panoramic tilting sunroof*
Opening or closing of the
panoramic/tilting sunroof
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 10
The panoramic/tilting sunroof is opened and
closed by using the switch when the ignition
is switched on.
Always close the panoramic/tilting sunroof
fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unat-
tended ›››
.
The tilting sunroof can be operated for up to
about ten minutes after the ignition has been
switched off, provided the driver door and
the front passenger door are not opened.
Sun visor
The sun visor is opened and closed manually
(independently of the panoramic/tilting sun-
roof).
WARNING
●
Incorrect use of the tilting sunroof can re-
sult in injury.
●
Never close the tilting sunroof without first
checking that there are no obstructions. Risk
of serious injury to you or others. Make sure
that no one is in the path of the tilting sun-
roof.
●
Always take the vehicle key with you when
you leave the vehicle.
●
Never leave children or disabled persons in
the vehicle, particularly if they have access to
the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could
mean that the engine is started or that elec-
trical equipment is used (e.g. electric tilting
sunroof) with a risk of accident. The doors
can be locked using the remote control key.
This could become an obstacle for assistance
in an emergency situation.
●
The tilting sunroof continues to function
until one of the front doors is opened and the
key removed from the ignition.
●
Ensure that no object and/or end is be-
tween the glass and the sunroof when the
one-touch opening/closing function is reset.
Convenience closing*
Using the door lock
–
Hold the key in the door lock of the driver
door in the locking position until the tilting
sunroof is closed.
–
Release the key to interrupt this function.
»
89
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Using the remote control
–
Push the lock button on the remote control
for approximately 3 seconds. The tilting
sunroof closes.
–
Press the unlock button to interrupt the
function.
Roll-back function of the
panoramic/tilting sunroof*
The panoramic/tilting sunroof has a roll-back
function
which prevents larger objects get-
tin
g tr
apped when the roof is closed. The roll-
back function does not prevent fingers get-
ting pinched against the roof opening. The
tilting sunroof stops and opens again imme-
diately if it is obstructed when closing.
Operation in case of breakdown
Fig. 88 Emergency operation of the panoram-
ic/tilting sunroof.
In case of a breakdown, the sunroof may be
closed manually.
–
Remove the plastic cover by inserting a
screwdriver into the rear section.
–
Insert an Allen key (4 mm) into the opening
as far as possible and close the sunroof.
Lights and visibility
Lights
Switching lights on and off
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 14
Switching on the front fog lights*
–
Turn the switch from position or
to
the first stop and pull it. The symbol of
the light control lights up.
Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles with
front fog lights)
–
Turn the lights control from position or
to the second stop and pull out
›››
. A
control lamp on the instrument panel lights
up.
Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles with
no front fog lights)
–
Turn the light control to the end from posi-
tion or and pull it. A control lamp on
the instrument panel lights up.
WARNING
Never drive with just the side lights on, there
is a risk of accident. The side lights are not
bright enough to illuminate the road ahead
90
Lights and visibility
and to ensure that other road users are able
to see you. Always use your dipped beam
headlights if it is dark or if visibility is poor.
Note
●
The dipped beam headlights will only work
with the ignition on. The side lights come on
automatically when the ignition is turned off.
●
If the lights are left on after the key has
been taken out of the ignition lock, an audi-
ble warning sounds while the driver door re-
mains open. This is a reminder to switch the
lights off.
●
The rear fog light is so bright that it can
dazzle drivers behind you. You should use
the rear fog light only when visibility is very
poor.
●
The use of the lighting described here is
subject to the relevant statutory require-
ments.
Automatic lighting*
Fig. 89 Automatic lighting.
Activation
–
Rotate the switch to the position, this
indication will light up.
Deactivation
–
Turn the light switch to .
Automatic lighting
If automatic headlight control is switched on,
dipped beam headlights are automatically
switched on by a photosensor if you drive in-
to a tunnel, for example.
WARNING
●
Even if the automatic headlight control is
switched on, the dipped beam headlights will
not be switched on with fog. Therefore, the
dipped beam must be switched on manually.
Note
●
For those vehicles with the automatic head-
light system, when the key is removed from
the ignition, the audible warning will only
sound if the light knob is in position or .
●
If the daylight driving automatic light func-
tion is switched on, the front fog lights or
rear fog light cannot be switched on in addi-
tion.
●
The use of the lighting described here is
subject to the relevant statutory require-
ments.
●
Do not put stickers on the windscreen in
front of the sensor. This may cause disrup-
tions or faults in the automatic lighting sys-
tem.
●
The rain sensor switches on the dipped
beam headlights when the windscreen wipers
have been operating continuously for a few
seconds and it switches the lights off when
the continuous or interval wipe is switched
off for some minutes.
Daytime driving lights*
Daytime driving lights light up automatically
when the ignition is switched on (only with
AFS headlights)
Daytime running lights are signalling devices
for improving road safety. The lights are built
into the headlights and come on each time
the ignition is turned on if the light switch is
»
91
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
in position
0
or
. It is automatically
switched off when the side lights are turned
on.
WARNING
The side lights or daytime driving lights are
not bright enough to illuminate the road
ahead and to ensure that other road users are
able to see you.
●
Always use your dipped beam head lights if
it is raining or if visibility is poor.
●
The rear lights do not come on with the
daytime driving light. A vehicle which does
not have the rear lights on may not be visible
to other drivers in the darkness, if it is rain-
ing or in conditions of poor visibility.
Note
See legal requirements for each country.
Nordic country solution
3 Only available in certain countries or as an
optional extra
The so-called “Nordic country solution” is an
alternative solution to daytime running lights
in vehicles without this function. It consists
of simultaneously connecting the dimmed
dipped beams, the sidelights and the licence
plate lights.
The aforementioned lights are switched on
each time the ignition is turned on if the light
switch is in position 0 or . Depending
upon the model, the control lamp
on the
light
c
ontrol switch or the instrument panel
lighting will indicate that the lights are on.
Activation of the Nordic country solution
●
Remove the key from the ignition, move the
turn signal lever upward (right turn signal),
press it back to flash position and hold it
there.
●
Insert the key and switch the ignition on,
holding it in this position for 3 seconds.
Then, switch off the ignition. The Nordic
country solution is now activated and the cor-
responding lights can come on.
Deactivation of the Nordic country solution
●
Remove the key from the ignition, press the
turn signal lever down (left turn signal), press
it back to flash position and hold it here.
●
Insert the key and switch the ignition on,
holding it in this position for 3 seconds.
Then, switch off the ignition. The Nordic
country solution is now deactivated and the
corresponding lights will not come on.
Instrument and switch lighting,
headlight range control
Fig. 90 Dash panel: Instrument panel and
control dimmers and headlight range control.
Instrument and switch lighting
1
When the headlights are switched on, the
brightness of the instrument panel and con-
trols can be adjusted by turning the thumb
wheel ››› Fig. 90
1
.
Vehicles fitted with xenon gas discharge
headlights are fitted with an automatic head-
light range system.
The instrument lighting (some dials and nee-
dles), the centre console lighting and the
lighting of the displays are regulated by a
photodiode incorporated in the instrument
panel.
The instrument lighting (needles) is switched
on when the ignition is on and the light is
92
Lights and visibility
off
. The instrument lighting is dimmed auto-
m
atic
ally as the daylight starts to fade. It
goes out completely when ambient light is
very low. This function is intended to remind
the driver to switch on the dipped beam
headlights in good time when light condi-
tions become poor.
Headlight range control
2
By using the electrical headlight range con-
trol,
2
you can adjust the headlight range to
the load level that is being carried in the ve-
hicle. This way, it is possible to avoid daz-
zling oncoming traffic more than necessary.
At the same time, by using the correct head-
light settings, the driver has the best possi-
ble lighting for the road ahead.
The headlights can only be adjusted when
the dipped beam is switched on. To lower the
beam, turn the thumb wheel down
2
from
the basic setting 0
.
D
y
namic headlight range control
Vehicles with gas discharge bulbs (xenon
bulbs) are equipped with dynamic headlight
range control. When you switch on the lights,
their range regulates itself according to the
vehicle load.
Vehicles with gas discharge bulbs do not
have headlight range control.
Turn signal and main beam headlight
lever
Fig. 91 Turn signal and main beam lever
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 14
Signalling a lane change
–
Push the lever up
1
or down
2
to the
point where you incur resistance and then
release it. The turn signal will flash several
times. The corresponding control lamp will
also flash.
Switching on parking lights
–
Switch the ignition off and remove the key
from the lock.
–
Move the turn signal lever up or down to
turn the right or left-hand parking lights on,
respectively.
WARNING
The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk
of accident! Never use the main beam head-
lights or the headlight flasher if they could
dazzle other drivers.
Note
●
The turn signals only
work when the igni-
tion is switched on. The corresponding warn-
ing lamp or flashes in the instrument
panel. The control lamp flashes when the
turn signals are operated, provided a trailer is
correctly attached and connected to the vehi-
cle. If a turn signal bulb is defective, the con-
trol lamp flashes at double speed. If the trail-
er turn signal bulbs are defective, the control
lamp does not light up. Change the bulb.
●
The main beam headlights can only be
switched on if the dipped beam headlights
are already on. The warning lamp then
comes on in the instrument panel.
●
The headlight flasher comes on for as long
as you pull the lever – even if no other lights
are switched on. The warning lamp then
comes on in the instrument panel.
●
When the parking lights are switched on,
the headlight and the tail light on the corre-
sponding side of the vehicle light up. The
parking lights will only work if the key is re-
moved from the ignition. If said light is on, an
audible warning will be emitted while the
driver door is open.
»
93
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
●
If the turn signal lever is left on after the
key has been taken out of the ignition lock,
an acoustic signal sounds when the driver
door is opened. This is intended as a remind-
er to switch off the turn signal, unless you
wish to leave the parking light on.
Coming Home/Leaving Home
Function*
The Coming Home function is controlled man-
ually. The Leaving Home function is control-
led with a photosensor.
If the Coming Home or Leaving Home func-
tion is connected, the front side and dipped
lights, the tail lights and the number plate
light will light up to provide assistance.
Coming home function
The Coming Home function is activated by
switching off the ignition and briefly flashing
the lights. When the driver door is opened,
the Coming Home lighting comes on. If the
driver door is already open when the lights
are flashed briefly, the Coming Home lighting
comes on immediately.
When the last door of the vehicle or the rear
lid is closed, the Coming Home function
starts and the switching off the headlights is
delayed.
The Coming Home lighting switches off in the
following cases:
●
On completion of the time period establish-
ed for the delay in switching off the lights af-
ter all the vehicle doors and the rear lid have
been closed.
●
If, 30 seconds after being connected, any
doors or the rear lid remain open.
●
If the light switch is turned to position
.
●
If
the ignition i
s switched on.
Automatic Leaving Home function
The Leaving Home function is activated when
the vehicle is unlocked if:
●
the light control is in position and
●
the photosensor detects “darkness”.
The Leaving Home lighting switches off in the
following cases:
●
If the time period for the delay in switching
off the headlights has ended
●
If the vehicle is locked again.
●
If the light switch is turned to position .
●
If the ignition is switched on.
Manual Leaving Home function
In vehicles without an automatic headlight
system (light sensor), if the manual Coming
Home function is activated when leaving the
car, upon returning to the car and unlocking
it the manual Leaving Home function will be
activated automatically.
Note
●
To activate the Coming/Leaving home func-
tion, the rotary light switch must be in posi-
tion and the light sensor must detect
darkne
ss.
●
If the ignition key is removed while the
lights are on, the lights flash briefly and the
driver door opens, no audible warning is
heard, since with the Coming Home function
on, the lights are automatically switched off
after a period of time (except when the light
switch is in position or .
Adaptive headlights* (for driving
round bends)
Fig. 92 Cornering lighting using adaptive
headlights.
94
Lights and visibility
When driving around bends, the headlights
will light the most important areas of the
road.
This cornering light gives better illumination
of the side of the road and the corner area.
The dynamic lighting is controlled automati-
cally according to speed and the steering
wheel angle.
The two main headlights move at different
angles to avoid that the front of the vehicle is
left completely in the dark.
Note
The system operates from a speed of about
10 km/h (6 mph).
Fog lights with cornering function*
This is an additional light source to dipped
beam headlights to light up the road as a
bend is taken.
The cornering light operates with the lights
switched on and when driving at less than
40 Km/h (25 mph). Ignition occurs by turning
the steering or connecting the turn signal.
Forward gear
●
If the steering wheel is turned to the right,
or the right-hand turn signal operated, the
right-hand fog light turns on.
●
If the steering wheel is turned to the left, or
the left-hand turn signal operated, the left-
hand fog light turns on.
In reverse, both fog lights turn on.
Note
When the fog lamps are on, the cornering
function is activated and both headlights are
continuously on.
Hazard warning lights
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 15
The hazard warning lights are used to draw
the attention of other road users to your vehi-
cle in emergencies.
If your vehicle breaks down:
1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from
moving traffic.
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard
warning lights
›››
.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Apply the handbrake.
5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;
for an automatic gearbox, move the gear
lever to
P
.
6.
Use the warning triangle to draw the atten-
tion of other road users to your vehicle.
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when
you leave the vehicle.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when
the hazard warning lights are switched on.
The two turn signal turn signal lamps
and the turn signal lamp in the switch will
flash at the same time. The hazard warning
lights also work when the ignition is switch-
ed off.
WARNING
●
The risk of an accident increases if your ve-
hicle breaks down. Always use the hazard
warning lights and a warning triangle to draw
the attention of other road users to your sta-
tionary vehicle.
●
Due to the high temperatures that the cata-
lytic converter can reach, never park in an
area where the catalytic converter could come
into contact with highly inflammable materi-
als, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This
could start a fire.
Note
●
The battery will run down if the hazard
warning lights are left on for a long time,
even if the ignition is switched off.
●
The use of the hazard warning lights de-
scribed here is subject to the relevant statu-
tory requirements.
95
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Interior lights
Front interior light
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 15
Note
If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the in-
terior lights will be switched off after approx.
10 minutes, providing the ignition key has
been removed and the courtesy light position
selected. This prevents the battery from dis-
charging.
Front reading light*
Fig. 93 Front reading light.
Switching on the reading light
Press the corresponding button
B
››› Fig. 93
to switch on the reading light.
Switching the reading lights off
Press the corresponding button to switch the
reading light off.
Luggage compartment light
The light is activated when the rear lid is
open, even when the ignition and lights are
turned off. For this reason, ensure that the
rear lid is always closed.
Glove compartment light
When opening the glove compartment on the
passenger side, the glove compartment light
will automatically turn on and will turn off
upon closure.
Footwell lights*
The lights in the footwell area below the dash
(driver and front passenger) will come on
when the doors are open and will go out
while driving.
Visibility
Heated rear window
Fig. 94 Centre console: heated rear window
switch.
The heated rear window only works when the
engine is running. When it is switched on, a
lamp lights up on the switch.
After approximately 8 minutes, the heating
device of the rear window switches off auto-
matically.
For the sake of the environment
The heated rear window should be switched
off as soon as the glass is demisted. By sav-
ing electrical power you can also save fuel.
Note
To avoid possible damage to the battery, an
automatic temporary disconnection of this
96
Lights and visibility
function is possible, coming back on when
normal operating conditions are re-establish-
ed.
Sun visors
Fig. 95 Sun visor on the driver side.
The sun visors for the driver and the front
passenger can be pulled out of their central
supports and turned towards the doors in the
direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 95
. Never pull
them do
wn
wards.
The driver sun visor has compartments for
cards, and the passenger sun visor has a
vanity mirror with a cover*.
Note
Incorrect use of the sun visor (e.g. pulling
them downwards once they are open) may re-
sult in broken hinges. This damage is not cov-
ered by the vehicle warranty.
Windscreen wiper and rear
window wiper systems
Front windscreen wipers
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 15
WARNING
●
Worn and dirty wiper blades reduce visibili-
ty and safety levels while driving.
●
In cold conditions you should not use the
wash/wipe system unless you have warmed
the windscreen with the heating and ventila-
tion system. The windscreen washer fluid
could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and
obscure your view of the road.
●
Always note the corresponding warnings
››› page 193.
WARNING
The rain sensor* may not detect enough rain
to switch on the wipers.
●
If necessary, switch on the wipers manually
when water on the windscreen obstructs visi-
bility.
CAUTION
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper
blades are not frozen to the glass before us-
ing the wipers for the first time. If you switch
on the windscreen wipers when the wiper
blades are frozen to the windscreen, you
could damage both the wiper blades and the
wiper motor.
Note
●
The windscreen wipers will only work when
the ignition is switched on.
●
The heat output of the heated jets* is con-
trolled automatically when the ignition is
switched on, depending upon the outside
temperature.
●
In certain versions of vehicles with alarms,
the windscreen wiper will only work in inter-
val/rain sensor mode when the ignition is on
and the bonnet closed.
●
When the interval wipe function is on, the
intervals are directly proportional to the
speed. This way, the higher the vehicle speed
the shorter the intervals.
●
If you stop the vehicle with the windscreen
wiper in position 1 or 2, it will automatically
change to a lower position speed. The set
speed will be resumed when the vehicle pulls
away.
●
The windscreen will be wiped again after
approximately five seconds once the “auto-
matic wash/wipe system” has been activa-
ted, provided the vehicle is moving (drip func-
tion). If you activate the wipers less than 3
seconds after the drip function, a new wash
sequence will begin without performing the
last wipe. For the “drip” function to work
»
97
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
again, you have to turn the ignition off and
then on again.
●
Do not put stickers on the windscreen in
front of the rain sensor*. This may cause sen-
sor disruption or faults.
Rear window wiper
Fig. 96 Windscreen wiper lever: rear window
wiper.
Switching on the interval wipe
–
Press the lever forward to position
6
››› Fig. 96
. The wiper will wipe the window
ap
pr
oximately every 6 seconds.
Switching off the interval wipe function
–
Pull the lever back from position
6
toward
the steering wheel. The wiper will continue
to function for a short period if you switch
off whilst the wipers are in motion.
Switching on the window wiper and washer
system
–
Press the lever fully forwards to position
7
››› Fig. 96
. The wiper and washer operate at
the s
ame time.
The rear window wash sys-
tem will function as long as you hold the
lever in this position.
–
Release the lever. The washer system stops
and the wipers continue until the end of
the cycle.
–
Move the lever towards the steering wheel
to switch off.
WARNING
●
Worn and dirty wiper blades reduce visibili-
ty and safety levels while driving.
●
Always note the corresponding warnings
››› page 193.
CAUTION
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper
blade is not frozen to the glass before using
the wiper for the first time. If you switch on
the wiper when the wiper blade is frozen to
the glass, this could damage both the wiper
blade and the wiper motor.
Note
●
The rear window wiper will only work when
the ignition is switched on.
●
Depending on the version of the model,
when you engage reverse gear and with the
headlight wiper activated, this can start a
wipe.
Headlight washer*
The headlight washers clean the headlight
lenses.
The headlight washers are activated auto-
matically when the windscreen washer is
used and the window wiper lever is pulled to-
wards the steering wheel for at least 1.5 sec-
onds – provided the dipped beam headlights
or main beams are switched on. Clean off
stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the head-
lights at regular intervals, for instance when
filling the fuel tank.
Note
●
To ensure that the headlight washers work
properly in winter, keep the nozzle holders in
the bumper free of snow and remove any ice
with a de-icer spray.
●
To remove water, the windscreen wipers
will be activated from time to time, the head-
light washers will be activated every three cy-
cles.
98
Lights and visibility
Rear view mirrors
Interior rear vision mirror
It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see
clearly through the rear window.
Manual anti-dazzle function for interior rear
vision mirror
In the basic mirror position, the lever at the
bottom edge of the rear vision mirror should
be at the front. Pull the lever to the back to
select the anti-dazzle function.
Automatic anti-dazzle interior rear
vision mirror*
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 13
Anti-dazzle function
The anti-dazzle function is activated every
time the ignition is switched on. The green
warning lamp lights up in the rear vision mir-
ror housing.
When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the
interior rear vision mirror will darken auto-
matically
according to the amount of light it
r
ec
eives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel-
led if reverse gear is engaged.
Note
●
The automatic anti-dazzle function will only
work properly if the sun blind* for the rear
window is retracted and there are no other
objects preventing light from reaching the in-
terior rear vision mirror.
●
If you have to stick any type of sticker on
the windscreen, do not do so in front of the
sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-daz-
zle function from working well or even from
working at all.
Folding in the exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors of the vehicle may be fol-
ded in. For this, press the mirror housing to-
wards the vehicle.
Note
Before washing the vehicle with an automatic
car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors to avoid
damage.
Electric exterior mirrors*
Fig. 97 Exterior mirror controls.
The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using
the rotary knob in the driver door.
Basic setting of exterior mirrors
1. Turn knob ››› Fig. 97
to position L (left ex-
t
erior mirr
or).
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the exteri-
or mirror so that you have a good view to
the rear of the vehicle.
3. Turn the knob to position R (right exterior
mirror).
4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the ex-
terior mirror so that you have a good view
to the rear of the vehicle ›››
.
Heated exterior mirrors*
–
Press the demisting button ››› Fig. 94
»
99
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
–
The mirrors demist for some minutes to
prevent draining the battery unnecessarily.
–
If necessary, press the button again to re-
peat the function.
–
The exterior mirror heating is not activated
in temperatures above approximately
+20 °C (+68 °F).
Folding in exterior mirrors*
–
Turn the control ››› Fig. 97
to position t
o
f
old in the exterior mirrors. You should al-
ways fold in the exterior mirrors if you are
driving through an automatic car wash.
This will help prevent damage.
Folding exterior mirrors back out to the
extended position*
–
Turn the knob to position L or R to return
the exterior mirrors to their original posi-
tion ›››
.
WARNING
●
Convex or aspheric mirrors increase the
field of vision however the objects appear
smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you
use these mirrors to estimate the distance to
vehicles behind you when changing lane, you
could make a mistake. Risk of accident.
●
If possible, use the rear vision mirror to es-
timate distances to vehicles behind you.
●
Make sure that you do not get your finger
trapped between the mirror and the mirror
base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of
injury!
For the sake of the environment
The exterior mirror heating should be switch-
ed off when it is no longer needed. Other-
wise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.
Note
●
If the electrical adjustment ever fails to op-
erate, the mirrors can be adjusted by hand by
lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.
●
In vehicles with electric exterior mirrors,
the following points should be observed: if,
due to an external force (e.g. being knocked
while manoeuvring), the adjustment of the
mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have
to be fully folded electrically. Do not readjust
the rear vision mirror housing by hand, as
this will interfere with the mirror adjuster
function.
●
The rear vision mirrors can be adjusted sep-
arately or simultaneously, as described
above.
●
The fold-in function on the exterior mirrors
will not activate at speeds over 40 km/h
(25 mph).
Seats and head restraints
Adjusting the seat and head
restraints
Adjusting the front seats
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 11
WARNING
●
Never adjust the driver or front passenger
seat while the vehicle is in motion. While ad-
justing your seat, you will assume an incor-
rect sitting position. Risk of fatal accidents.
Adjust the driver or front passenger seat only
when the vehicle is stationary.
●
To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and
front passenger in case of a sudden braking
or an accident, never drive with the backrest
tilted towards the rear. The maximum protec-
tion of the seat belt can be achieved only
when the backrests are in an upright position
and the driver and front passenger have prop-
erly adjusted their seat belts. The further the
backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater
the risk of injury due to improper positioning
of the belt web!
●
Exercise caution when securing the seat
height into forwards/backwards position. In-
juries can be caused if the seat height is ad-
justed without due care and attention.
100
Seats and head restraints
●
To move the seat lengthways, pull upwards
and not sideways on the lever, as the force
exerted on it in this position could damage it.
Folding and opening the front seat
backrests
3 Applies to vehicles with 3 doors:
Fig. 98 Front seats: lever for folding down the
backrest.
Vehicles without the Easy-Entry function
–
To
fold
the backrest, pull the lever
1
up-
wards and push the backrest forwards.
–
To
unfold
the backrest, push it back.
V
ehicles with the Easy-Entry function
–
To fold the backrest, pull the lever
1
up-
wards and push the backrest forwards. You
can push the seat forwards at the same
time to make entry to the rear seats easier.
–
To
unfold
the backrest, first move the seat
c
ompletely back.
The Easy-Entry function facilitates the access
to the vehicle rear seats. Before lifting the
backrest, return the seat to the original posi-
tion. The seat inserts when the backrest is lif-
ted.
Removing or adjusting head restraints
Fig. 99 Adjusting and removing the head re-
straints.
Adjusting height (front seats)
–
Press the button on the side and pull up-
wards to the desired position.
–
To lower the head restraint, press the but-
ton and push head restraint downwards.
–
Make sure that it engages securely into one
of its positions.
Adjusting height (rear seats)
–
Press the button on the side and pull up-
wards to the desired position.
–
To lower the head restraint, press the but-
ton and push head restraint downwards.
–
Make sure that the head restraint engages
securely in one of its positions ››› page 33.
Removing the head restraint
–
Push the head restraint up as far as it will
go.
–
Press the button ››› Fig. 99 (arrow).
–
Pull head restraint out of fitting without re-
leasing the button.
Fitting the head restraint
–
Insert the head restraint into the guides on
the corresponding backrest.
–
Push head restraint down.
–
Adjust the head restraint to suit body size
››› page 32
.
WARNING
The safe driving chapter contains important
information, tips, suggestions and warnings
that you should read and observe for your
own safety and the safety of your passengers
››› page 29.
»
101
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
WARNING
●
Never drive if the head restraints have been
removed. Risk of injury.
●
Never drive if the head restraints are in an
unsuitable position, there is a risk of serious
injury.
●
After refitting the head restraint, you must
always adjust it properly for height to achieve
optimal protection.
●
Please observe the safety warnings in ›››
in Correct adjustment of front head restraints
on page 33.
Note
●
To fit and remove the rear head restraints,
gently tilt the seat backrest forwards.
●
When fitting the head restraints again, in-
sert the tubes as far as possible into the
guides without pressing the button.
Seat functions
Heated seats*
Fig. 100 Front seat heating switch.
The front seat cushions and backrests can be
heated electrically.
–
Press the corresponding switch ››› Fig. 100
to switch on the seat heating.
–
Press once to connect the heating at maxi-
mum force. The two LEDs illuminate
››› Fig. 100
. After 15 minutes of high inten-
s
ity
, the upper LED goes out, the system is
deactivated for 2 minutes and is then reac-
tivated at low intensity (the lower LED re-
mains on permanently).
–
Press the switch again to set the heating to
minimum force. (The lower LED lights up).
–
To disconnect the heating, press the switch
again.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the heating elements,
please do not kneel on the seat or apply
sharp pressure at a single point to the seat
cushion and backrest.
Note
The seats are only heated electrically when
the engine is running.
102
Seats and head restraints
Folding down rear seats
Fig. 101 Folding up the rear seat cushion.
Fig. 102 Button for unlocking the rear back-
rest.
Folding seat down
–
Remove the head restraint ››› page 101.
–
Pull the front edge of the seat cushion
››› Fig. 101
1
upwards in the direction of
the arrow.
–
Lift the cushion
2
forwards in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
–
Pull the release button ››› Fig. 102 in the di-
rection of the arrow and fold the backrest
forwards.
–
Insert the head restraints in the spaces on
the rear of the seat cushion which are visi-
ble when the seat cushion is lowered.
Folding seat forward
–
Remove the head restraints from the
spaces in the seat cushion.
–
Lift the backrest, and before securing it, re-
place the head restraints in the seat cush-
ion, and then click the seat correctly onto
the locking rails.
–
Once the backrest is locked, pull on the
central seat belt or directly on the backrest
to check that the backrest has properly en-
gaged in position.
–
Check that the position lever is in neutral
position.
–
Lower the cushion and push it backwards
below the seat belt buckles.
–
Press the front part of the cushion down-
wards.
On split rear seats*, the backrest and cush-
ion can be lowered and raised respectively in
two sections.
WARNING
●
Please be careful when folding back the
backrest! Injuries can be caused if the seat
height is adjusted without due care and at-
tention.
●
Do no trap or damage seat belts when rais-
ing the backrest.
●
After raising the backrest, check it has en-
gaged properly in position. Do this by pulling
on the central seat belt or directly on the
backrest and check that the position lever is
in the neutral position.
●
The three point automatic seat belt only
works correctly when the backrest of the cen-
tral seat is correctly engaged.
103
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Transport and practical
equipment
Practical equipment
Storage compartment on the front
passenger side
Fig. 103 Passenger side: storage compart-
ment
Fig. 104 Storage compartment for instruction
manual.
The compartment can be opened by pulling
the lever ››› Fig. 103
.
Thi
s
compartment can hold documents in A4
format, a water bottle of 1.5 L, etc.
WARNING
Always keep the storage compartment cover
closed while the vehicle is in motion in order
to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sud-
den braking or by an accident.
Storage compartment on the driver
side.
Fig. 105 Compartment on the driver side
There is a storage compartment on the driver
side
104
Transport and practical equipment
Navigator mount on dash panel*
Fig. 106 Mounting bracket for navigator on
dash panel.
Fig. 107 Bracket with open cover for placing
the navigator.
Your vehicle can be equipped with a portable
navigator mounting bracket.
It is necessary to use a specific adapter for
each navigator, so consult technical services.
This bracket supplies power to the portable
navigator.
Storage compartment under the front
seats*
Fig. 108 Storage compartment under the
right front passenger seat.
To open
–
The compartment is opened by pulling on
the lever and assisting it with your hand.
To close
–
Press the cover inwards until the closed
drawer “clicks” into position.
Note
The storage drawer will hold a maximum
weight of 1.5 kg.
Seat storage pocket*
Fig. 109 Storage pocket.
There is a storage pocket on the rear of the
front seats.
Storage compartment in front door
panel*
In this storage compartment a 1.5l water bot-
tle, etc. can be stored.
105
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Front drink holder*
Fig. 110 Front drink holders in the centre con-
sole.
In the central console, in front of the gear lev-
er, there are two drinks holders ››› Fig. 110
.
WARNING
●
Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders.
During sudden or normal driving manoeuvres,
when braking suddenly or in case of an acci-
dent, the hot drink could spill. Risk of scald-
ing.
●
Never use rigid materials (for example,
glass or ceramic), since they could cause in-
jury in the case of an accident.
●
When travelling, the drinks holder should
always be closed to prevent risk in the event
of sudden breaking or accident.
Rear drink holder*
Fig. 111 Drinks holder in the centre console.
On the rear part of the centre console, behind
the handbrake, there is a drink holder* in-
stalled ››› Fig. 111
.
Thi
s
drinks holder has a capacity for a bottle
of up to 1 litre.
Front ashtray*
Fig. 112 Front ashtray.
Opening and closing the ashtray
–
To open the ashtray, lift the cover
››› Fig. 112
.
–
T
o c
lose, push the cover down.
Emptying the ashtray
–
Extract the ashtray and empty it.
WARNING
Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could
ignite the paper in the ashtray and cause a
fire.
106
Transport and practical equipment
Cigarette lighter*
Fig. 113 Lighter.
–
Press on the cigarette lighter ››› Fig. 113
to
activ
at
e it ›››
.
–
Wait for the lighter to spring out.
–
Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the
cigarette on the glowing coil.
WARNING
●
Improper use of the cigarette lighter can
lead to serious injuries or start a fire.
●
Using the lighter carefully. Carelessness or
negligence when using the cigarette lighter
can cause burns and serious injuries.
●
The lighter only works when the ignition is
turned on or the engine is running. To avoid
the risk of fire, never leave children alone in-
side the vehicle.
Power socket
Fig. 114 Front power socket.
The 12 Volt cigarette lighter power socket can
also be used for other electrical components
with a power rating of up to 120 Watt. When
the engine is switched off, however, the vehi-
cle battery will discharge. For further informa-
tion see ››› page 155
.
WARNING
The power sockets and the connected acces-
sories will only operate when the ignition is
on or when the engine is running. Improper
use of the sockets or electrical accessories
can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. To
avoid the risk of injury, never leave children
alone inside the vehicle.
Note
●
The use of electrical appliances with the
engine switched off will cause a battery dis-
charge.
●
Before using any electrical accessories, see
the instructions in ››› page 155.
Power socket in the luggage
compartment*
3 Applies to the model: IBIZA ST
Fig. 115 Detailed view of the side trim in the
luggage compartment: 12 volt socket
–
Lift the power socket cover ››› Fig. 115
.
–
In
ser
t the plug of the electrical appliance
into the power socket.
Electrical equipment can be connected to any
of the 12 volt sockets. The appliances con-
nected to the power socket must not exceed
a power rating of 100 W.
»
107
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
CAUTION
Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid
damaging the sockets.
Note
●
The power sockets will only work with the
ignition on.
●
The use of electrical appliances with the
engine switched off will cause a battery dis-
charge.
Auxiliary audio connection (AUX)*
Fig. 116 Centre console: AUX Connection.
–
Insert the pin as far as possible ››› Fig. 116
(››› Booklet Radio
).
L
ug
gage compartment
Loading the luggage compartment
Fig. 117 Position heavy items as far forward
as possible.
All luggage and other loose objects must be
safely secured in the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth
could affect safety or driving characteristics
of the vehicle by shifting the centre of gravity.
–
Distribute the load evenly in the luggage
compartment.
–
Place heavy objects as far forward as possi-
ble in the luggage compartment
››› Fig. 117
.
–
Pl
ac
e the heavy objects first.
–
Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening
rings* ››› page 109.
–
Secure loose loads with a luggage net* or
with non-elastic straps secured to the fas-
tening* rings ››› page 109.
WARNING
●
Loose luggage and other objects in the lug-
gage compartment could cause serious inju-
ries.
●
Always stow objects in the luggage com-
partment and secure them with the fastening
rings*.
●
During sudden manoeuvres or accidents,
loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring
vehicle occupants or even third parties. This
increased risk of injury will be further in-
creased if a loose object is struck by an inflat-
ing airbag. If this happens, objects may
shoot outward like a missile. Risk of fatal in-
jury.
●
Always keep all objects in the luggage com-
partment and use appropriate grips to secure
them, particularly in the case of heavy ob-
jects.
●
Never exceed the allowed axle weights or
allowed maximum weight. If said weights are
exceeded, the driving characteristics of the
vehicle may change, leading to accidents, in-
juries and damage to the vehicle.
●
Please note that the centre of gravity may
shift when transporting heavy objects; this
may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-
cident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust
your speed and driving style accordingly, to
avoid accidents.
108
Transport and practical equipment
●
Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe-
cially when the rear lid is open. Children
could climb into the luggage compartment,
closing the door behind them; they will be
trapped and run the risk of death.
●
Never allow children to play in or around
the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors and
rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before
you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are
no adults or children in the vehicle.
●
Please observe the notes on the ››› page 29.
CAUTION
Hard objects on the rear shelf could chafe
against the wires of the heating element in
the heated rear window and cause damage.
Note
●
The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord-
ing to the load. When necessary check the
tyre pressures on the label located on the in-
side fuel tank flap ››› page 177.
●
Air cir
culation in the vehicle helps reduce
fogging of the windows. Used air escapes
through ventilation slits in the side trim of
the luggage compartment. Ensure that the
ventilation slots are never covered.
●
Straps for securing the load to the fasten-
ing rings* are commercially available from ac-
cessory shops.
Fastening rings*
3 Applies to the model: IBIZA ST
Fig. 118 Location of fastening rings in lug-
gage compartment.
There may be four fastening rings included in
the luggage compartment for fastening lug-
gage and other objects ››› Fig. 118
(arrows).
–
A
lw
ays use suitable and undamaged straps
to secure luggage and other objects to the
fastening rings ›››
in Loading the lug-
gage compartment on page 108.
–
Pull up the fastening rings to attach the
straps.
Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying
unsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal col-
lision at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph), this
object generates a force corresponding to 20
times its weight. That means that the effec-
tive weight of the object increases to approxi-
mately 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of
the injuries which might be sustained if this
“object” strikes an occupant as it flies
through the interior of the vehicle. This in-
creased risk of injury will be further increased
if a loose object is struck by an inflating air-
bag.
WARNING
●
If pieces of baggage or other objects are se-
cured to the fastening rings with inappropri-
ate or damaged retaining cords, injuries
could result in the event of braking manoeu-
vres or accidents.
●
Never secure a child seat on the fastening
rings.
Luggage net*
3 Applies to the model: IBIZA ST
Fig. 119 Stretched luggage net.
»
109
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
The luggage net can be used to secure and
retain light items in the luggage compart-
ment.
Luggage net
–
Secure the luggage net to the four fasten-
ing rings ››› Fig. 119
(arrows).
WARNING
The luggage net should only be used to hold
objects weighing up to 5 kg. Heavier objects
cannot be safely secured (risk of injury).
Rear shelf
Fig. 120 Rear shelf.
Removing the shelf
–
Unhook the loops ››› Fig. 120
B
from
housings
A
.
–
Extract the cover from its slot, in its rest po-
sition and pull outwards.
WARNING
Do not place heavy or hard objects on the
rear shelf, because they will endanger the ve-
hicle occupants in case of sudden braking.
CAUTION
●
Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the
rear shelf is correctly fitted.
●
An overloaded luggage compartment could
mean that the rear shelf is not correctly seat-
ed and it may be bent or damaged.
●
If the luggage compartment is overloaded,
remove the tray.
Note
●
Ensure that, when placing items of clothing
on the luggage compartment cover, rear visi-
bility is not reduced.
Rear shelf with storage compartment*
3 Applies to the model: IBIZA ST
Fig. 121 Luggage compartment: removing
storage compartment.
Fig. 122 Accessing storage compartment.
To remove the storage compartment
–
Remove the rear shelf and pull the storage
compartment upwards holding it by the
edges ››› Fig. 121
.
110
Transport and practical equipment
The storage compartment can be accessed
from the rear seats by lifting the front part of
the rear shelf ››› Fig. 122.
WARNING
Do not place heavy or hard objects on the
rear shelf, because they will endanger the ve-
hicle occupants in case of sudden braking.
CAUTION
●
Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the
rear shelf is correctly fitted.
●
An overloaded luggage compartment could
mean that the rear shelf is not correctly seat-
ed and it may be bent or damaged.
●
If the luggage compartment is overloaded,
remove the tray.
●
The load in the storage compartment
should not exceed 3 kg.
Note
●
Ensure that, when placing items of clothing
on the luggage compartment cover, rear visi-
bility is not reduced.
●
If your vehicle has a storage compartment*,
only place light objects inside.
Roof carrier system*
Introduction
Please observe the following points if you in-
tend to carry loads on the roof:
●
For safety reasons, only luggage racks and
accessories supplied by SEAT Official Serv-
ices are recommended.
●
It is essential that you follow the assembly
instructions included with the bars exactly,
being especially careful to position front and
rear luggage compartment cover bars on the
special housings in the longitudinal bars.
You must also respect their position accord-
ing to the direction of travel indicated in the
assembly manual. Not following these in-
structions may damage the bodywork.
●
Pay special attention to the tightening tor-
que of the attachment bolts and check them
following a short journey. If necessary, re-
tighten the bolts and check them at regular
intervals.
●
Distribute the load evenly. A maximum load
of 40 kg is permitted for each roof rack sys-
tem support bar, the load must be distrib-
uted evenly along the entire length. However,
the maximum load permitted for the entire
roof (including the support system) of 75 kg
must not be exceeded nor the total weight
recommended for the entire vehicle. See the
“Technical Data” section.
●
When transporting heavy or large objects
on the roof, any change in the normal vehicle
behaviour due to a change in the centre of
gravity or an increased wind resistance must
be taken into account. For this reason, a suit-
able speed and driving style must be used.
●
On vehicles fitted with a sliding/tilting sun-
roof*, make sure it does not hit the load on
the roof upon opening.
111
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Securing the crossbars and the roof
carrier system
Fig. 123 Ibiza/Ibiza SC: attachment points for
the roof railings for the roof carrier system.
Fig. 124 Ibiza ST: attachment points for the
roof railings for the roof carrier system.
The crossbars are the basis of a series of spe-
cial roof carrier systems. For safety reasons,
special fixtures must be used to safely trans-
port luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or
boats on the roof. Suitable accessories can
be acquired at SEAT dealerships.
Always secure the crossbars and the roof car-
rier system properly. Always take the assem-
bly instructions that come with the crossbars
and the roof carrier system in question into
account.
Ibiza Model
The front and rear attachment points
1
and
2
are only visible when the doors are open
››› Fig. 123
A
.
Ibiza SC Model
The front attachment points
1
are only visi-
ble when the doors are open; the rear attach-
ment points
3
are marked on the top edge
of the side window with arrow heads
››› Fig. 123
B
.
Ibiza ST Model
The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail-
ings. The attachment points can be seen on
the inside of the roof railings ››› Fig. 124.
WARNING
Incorrect attachment and use of the cross-
bars and the roof carrier system may cause
the whole system to detach from the roof and
cause an accident and injuries.
●
Always take the manufacturer assembly in-
structions into account.
●
Use only crossbars and the roof carrier sys-
tem when they are in perfect condition and
are properly secured.
●
Always secure the crossbars and the roof
carrier system properly.
●
Check threaded joints and attachments
travelling and if necessary tighten them after
you have travelled a short distance. When
making long trips, check the threaded joints
whenever you stop for a rest.
●
Always fit the special roof carrier systems
correctly for wheels, skis and surfboards, etc.
●
Do not modify or repair the crossbars or
roof carrier system.
112
Air conditioning
Note
Always read the assembly instructions that
come with the crossbars and the roof carrier
system carefully and keep them in the vehi-
cle.
Air conditioning
General notes
The pollution filter
The pollution filter (a combined particulate
filter and active carbon filter) serves as a bar-
rier against impurities in the outside air, in-
cluding dust and pollen.
For the climate control system to work with
maximum efficiency, the pollution filter must
be replaced at the specified intervals in the
Maintenance Programme.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due
to use in areas reaching very high pollution
levels, the pollen filter must be changed
more frequently than stated in the Service
Schedule.
CAUTION
●
If you suspect that the air conditioner is
damaged, switch it off with the
A/C
button to
prevent further damage and have it checked
by a specialised workshop.
●
Repairs to the air conditioner require spe-
cialist knowledge and special tools. There-
fore, we recommend you to take the vehicle
to a specialised workshop.
Note
●
If the humidity and temperature outside the
vehicle are high, condensation can drip off
the evaporator in the cooling system and
form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is
normal and does not indicate a leak.
●
Keep the air intake slots in front of the
windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to en-
sure heating and cooling are not impaired,
and to prevent the windows from misting
over.
●
The air from the vents flows through the ve-
hicle interior and is extracted by slots in the
luggage compartment designed for this pur-
pose. Therefore, you should avoid obstruct-
ing these slots with any kind of object.
●
The air conditioner operates most effective-
ly with the windows and the sliding/tilting
sunroof* closed. However, if the temperature
inside the vehicle is excessive because of the
sun, the air inside can be cooled faster by
opening the windows for a short time.
●
Do not smoke while air recirculation mode
is on, as smoke drawn into the air condition-
ing system leaves residue on the evaporator,
producing a permanent unpleasant odour.
●
At low outside temperatures, the compres-
sor switches off automatically and cannot be
switched on even with the
AUTO
button.
●
It is advisable to turn on the air condition-
ing at least once a month, to lubricate the
system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de-
crease in the cooling capacity is detected, a
»
113
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Technical Service should be consulted to
check the system.
●
To ensure correct operation, the grilles on
both sides of the screen must not be obstruc-
ted
●
When the engine is under extreme strain,
switch off the compressor for a moment.
Heating
Controls
Fig. 125 Heating controls on the dash panel.
–
Using the controls
A
and
C
and with the
switch
B
››› Fig. 125
you can adjust the
t
emper
ature, the air distribution and the
blower speed.
–
Press the
D
button to switch air recircula-
tion mode on or off. When the function is
activated, a warning light on the button is
turned on.
Temperature
Switch
A
adjusts temperature. The desired
temperature inside the vehicle cannot be
lower than the ambient temperature. Maxi-
mum heat output, which is needed to defrost
the windows quickly, is only available when
the engine has reached its operating temper-
ature.
114
Air conditioning
Blower
The air flow can be set at four speeds with
switch
B
. The blower should always be set
at the lowest speed when driving slowly.
Air distribution
Control
C
for setting the flow of air in the re-
quired direction.
– Air distribution towards the windscreen
in or
der t
o demist. For safety reasons, it is
not recommended to switch air recirculation
on.
– Air distribution to upper body.
– Air distribution to footwell
– Air distribution to the windscreen and
the footwell.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode
D
on (a lamp lights
up in red) prevents strong odours from out-
side from entering the vehicle, for example
when passing through a tunnel or in a traffic
jam ››› .
When the outside temperature is low, air re-
circulation mode improves heating perform-
ance by heating air from the interior instead
of cold air from the outside.
WARNING
●
For your safety, the windows should never
be fogged up or covered with snow or ice.
This is essential to ensure good visibility.
Please familiarise yourself with the correct
operation of the heating and ventilation sys-
tem, including the demist/defrost functions
for the windows.
●
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from
the outside enters the vehicle interior. The
windows can quickly fog over if the heating is
switched off. Therefore, never leave the air re-
circulation mode switched on for a long time
(risk of accident).
Note
●
Please consider the general notes
››› page 113
.
115
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Vehicle ventilation or heating
Fig. 126 Heating controls on the dash panel.
Ventilating the vehicle interior
–
Turn the temperature selector ››› Fig. 126
A
anticlockwise.
–
Turn blower switch
B
to any of the head
settings 1 -4.
–
Set the airflow to the desired direction us-
ing air distribution control
C
.
–
Open the relevant air outlets.
Interior heating
–
Turn the temperature selector ››› Fig. 126
A
clockwise to select the desired tempera-
ture.
–
Turn blower switch
B
to any of the head
settings 1 -4.
–
Set the airflow to the desired direction us-
ing air distribution control
C
.
–
Open the relevant air outlets.
Defrosting the windscreen
–
Turn the temperature selector ››› Fig. 126
A
clockwise to reach the maximum tem-
perature.
–
Turn the blower switch
B
to setting 4.
–
Turn air distribution control to .
–
Close outlet
3
.
–
Open and turn outlet
4
towards the side
windows.
Keeping the windscreen and the side
windows demisted
–
Turn the temperature selector ››› Fig. 126
A
to the heating area.
–
Turn blower switch
B
to any of the head
settings 2 -3.
–
Turn air distribution control to
.
–
C
lo
se outlets
3
–
Open and turn outlets
4
towards side win-
dows.
Once the windows are demisted and as a pre-
ventive measure, the control
C
can be set in
position , thus obtaining greater comfort
while preventing the windows from misting
again.
116
Air conditioning
Heating
Maximum heat output, which is needed to
defrost the windows quickly, is only available
when the engine has reached its operating
temperature.
Note
Remember that the temperature of the engine
coolant should be optimum to ensure that the
heating system functions correctly (except in
vehicles fitted with additional heating*).
Air outlets
Fig. 127 Air vents
Air distribution
C
Symbol Main air output through out-
lets
1, 2
5
1, 2, 5
3, 4
Outlets
3
and
4
can be closed or opened
separately using the slats and the air flow di-
rected as required.
117
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Air conditioning*
Controls
Fig. 128 Air conditioning controls on the dash
panel.
The air conditioning system only works when
the engine is running and the fan is switched
on.
–
Controls ››› Fig. 128
A
and
C
and control
B
regulate the temperature, blower speed
and air distribution.
–
To switch a function on or off, press the ap-
propriate button
D
or
E
. When the func-
tion is activated, a red warning light on the
button is turned on.
To demist the windscreen:
–
Turn air distribution to .
–
Turn the fan control to one of the two levels
depending on the speed required.
–
Rotate the temperature control to the de-
sired level of comfort.
–
Close outlets
3
–
Open and turn outlets
4
towards side win-
dows.
Temperature selector ››› page 119
Blower control. There are four speed set-
tings for the blower. At low speed, it is
recommended to set the blower to a mini-
mum of 1 to improve the intake of fresh
air.
A
B
Air distribution control ››› page 119
Air recirculation button
››› page 120
A/C
button – Switches on the cooling
system ››› page 119
WARNING
For your safety, the windows should never be
fogged up or covered with snow or ice. This is
essential to ensure good visibility. Please fa-
miliarise yourself with the correct operation
of the heating and ventilation system, includ-
ing the demist/defrost functions for the win-
dows.
C
D
E
118
Air conditioning
Note
Please consider the general notes.
Vehicle interior heating or cooling system
Fig. 129 Air conditioning controls on the dash
panel.
Interior heating
–
Turn off the cooling system using the
››› Fig. 129
A/C
button (the button light
turns off).
–
Turn the temperature selector
A
to set the
desired temperature inside the vehicle.
–
Turn the blower switch to any of the set-
tings 1-4.
–
Set the air distribution control
C
to the air
flow configuration desired:
(towards the
windscreen),
(towards the chest),
(towards the footwell) and
(towards the
windscreen and footwell areas).
Interior cooling
–
Turn on the cooling system using the
A/C
button (the button light should
light up).
–
T
urn the t
emperature control switch until
the desired interior temperature is reached.
–
Turn the blower switch to any of the set-
tings 1-4.
–
Set the air distribution control to the air
flow configuration desired:
(towards the
windscreen),
(towards the chest),
(towards the footwell) and
(towards the
windscreen and footwell areas).
Heating
Maximum heat output, which is needed to
defrost the windows quickly, is only available
when the engine has reached its operating
temperature.
»
119
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Coolant system
When the air conditioning is switched on, the
temperature and the air humidity go down.
This way, if the outside humidity is extreme,
the air conditioning prevents the misting of
the windows and therefore, comfort is im-
proved.
If the air conditioning does not work, this
may be due to the following reasons:
●
The engine is stationary.
●
The fan blower is switched off.
●
The outside temperature is lower than ap-
proximately +3 °C (+37 °F).
●
The air conditioning system compressor
has been temporarily switched off because of
an increased engine coolant temperature.
●
The air conditioner fuse is faulty.
●
Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air
conditioning checked by a specialised work-
shop.
Air recirculation
Air recirculation mode on
›››
Fig. 129
(a
lamp lights up on the button) prevents strong
odours or contaminated air from the outside
air from entering in the vehicle, for example
when passing through a tunnel or in a traffic
jam.
When the outside temperature is low, air re-
circulation mode improves heating perform-
ance by heating air from the interior instead
of cold air from the outside.
When the outside temperature is high, air re-
circulation mode improves cooling perform-
ance by cooling air from the interior instead
of warm air from outside.
For safety reasons, the air recirculation
should not be switched on when the air dis-
tribution control is set to the windscreen set-
ting .
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the
outside enters the vehicle interior. If the air
conditioner is switched off, the windows can
quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the
air recirculation mode switched on for a long
time (risk of accident).
Note
●
When engaging reverse gear, the air recir-
culation is connected automatically to pre-
vent the entrance of exhaust gases in the ve-
hicle on travelling backwards. The control
lamp on the button
does not light up.
●
If the temperature control is turned to the
coldest setting (blue point) and the
A/C
but-
ton is on, the “Air recirculation” function is
automatically activated in order to cool the
vehicle faster using less energy, and its func-
tion control lamp will light up.
●
If the function is not deactivated by press-
ing the button, it will deactivate after approx-
imately 20 minutes.
Economic use of the air conditioning
When the air conditioning is switched on, the
compressor consumes engine power and has
influence on fuel consumption. Consider the
following points in order to have the system
operating in the minimum possible time.
●
If the vehicle interior has overheated due to
an excessive solar radiation, it is best to
open the windows or doors to allow the hot
air to escape.
●
While in motion, the air conditioning
should not be switched on if the windows or
the sunroof* are open.
120
Air conditioning
Climatronic*
Controls
Fig. 130 Climatronic controls on the dash panel.
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 21
The air conditioner only works when the en-
gine is running and the blower is on.
The functions will be switched on when its
buttons are pressed, turning on the air condi-
tioner if it was switched off, with the excep-
tion of button
17
(recirculation) When the
function is activated, a symbol is displayed
on the screen. Press the button again to
switch off the function.
To switch off the climatronic, press button
9
until the segments in column
1
go off. After
1 second has passed, press the button again
to switch off the display.
WARNING
For your safety, the windows should never be
fogged up or covered with snow or ice. This is
essential to ensure good visibility. Please fa-
miliarise yourself with the correct operation
of the heating and ventilation system, includ-
ing the demist/defrost functions for the win-
dows.
Note
Please consider the general notes.
Automatic mode
In this mode, air temperature, air flow and
distribution are automatically adjusted so
that a comfortable temperature is attained as
quickly as possible, and then maintained.
Switching on automatic mode
–
Press the
AUTO
button. It displays the indi-
cation ››› Fig. 130
3
.
–
Press keys ››› Fig. 130
10
and
11
to adjust
the desired temperature inside the vehicle.
We recommend +22 °C (+72 °F).
»
121
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
A comfortable interior climate is quickly
reached when a temperature of +22 °C
(+72 °F) is set in automatic mode. Therefore,
we recommend you not to change this adjust-
ment, except as necessary to suit individual
preferences or particular circumstances. It is
possible to select interior temperatures from
+18 °C (+64 °F) to +29 °C (+86 °F). If a lower
or higher temperature is selected, LO
or
HI
ar
e respectively displayed on the screen.
These are approximate temperatures which
may slightly vary depending on the outside
conditions.
Climatronic maintains an excellent, comforta-
ble temperature by automatically adjusting
the supplied air temperature, the blower
speed and the air distribution. The system al-
so considers the sunlight radiation, so there
is no need for manual readjustment. There-
fore, automatic mode always provides the
best comfort for the vehicle occupants
throughout the year.
Automatic mode is switched off whenever an
adjustment is made using the buttons for air
distribution or blower. The temperature con-
tinues to self-regulate.
To switch off Climatronic, press the
–
9
button repeatedly until the display switches
off.
Manual mode
In manual mode the air temperature, flow,
and the desired air distribution can be adjus-
ted.
Switching on manual mode
–
Press one of the buttons ››› Fig. 130
14
to
16
or press the blower control
8
and
9
.
The indicator is switched off
3
.
Temperature
It is possible to select interior temperatures
from +18 °C (+64 °F) to +29 °C (+86 °F).
These are approximate temperatures which
may slightly vary depending on the outside
conditions.
If you select temperatures below +18 ℃
(+17.78
℃
), the indication:
L
O
will appear on
the screen. In this setting the system runs at
maximum cooling output and the tempera-
ture is not regulated.
If a temperature above +29 °C (+86 °F) is se-
lected, the screen will show
HI
. In this setting
the system runs at maximum heating output
and the temperature is not controlled.
Blower
The blower can be adjusted using buttons
›››
Fig. 130
8
and
9
. If the blower is off
(level
1
is not shown on the screen) and
button
9
is pressed after 1 second, the Cli-
matronic switches off.
Air distribution
The air distribution is adjusted using the but-
tons
,
and
. It is also possible to
open and close some of the air outlets sepa-
rately.
Switching the air conditioning on and off
By pressing the
A/C
button, the air cooling
system can be switched off in order to save
fuel. The temperature continues to self-regu-
late. The set temperature can then only be
reached if it is higher than the outside tem-
perature.
In rain or high humidity, we recommend
switching the
A/C
on so that the evaporator
does not allow the windscreen to steam up.
Air recirculation mode
–
Press the button
to switch air recircula-
tion mode on or off. This is ON if the sym-
bol
›››
Fig. 130
is displayed on the
s
c
reen.
Air recirculation mode prevents strong
odours or contaminated air from the outside
air from entering in the vehicle, for example
when passing through a tunnel or in a traffic
jam.
122
Driving
When the outside temperature is low, air re-
circulation mode improves heating perform-
ance by heating air from the interior instead
of cold air from the outside.
When the outside temperature is high, air re-
circulation mode improves cooling perform-
ance by cooling air from the interior instead
of warm air from outside.
For safety reasons, the air recirculation
should not be switched on when the air dis-
tribution control is set to the windscreen set-
ting .
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the
outside enters the vehicle interior. If the air
conditioner is switched off, the windows can
quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the
air recirculation mode switched on for a long
time (risk of accident).
Note
When engaging reverse gear, the air recircu-
lation is connected automatically to prevent
the entrance of exhaust gases into the vehi-
cle upon travelling backwards. In this case
the symbol
for air recirculation is not dis-
played.
Driving
Starting and stopping the
engine
Ignition key positions
Fig. 131 Ignition key positions.
Ignition switched off, steering lock
1
In this position ››› Fig. 131, the ignition and
the engine are OFF and the steering may be
locked.
For the
Steering lock
to operate without the
ignition k
ey, turn the steering wheel until it
locks with an audible sound. You should al-
ways lock the steering wheel when you leave
your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle
theft ›››
.
Switching the ignition or the glow plug
system on
2
Turn the ignition key to this position and re-
lease it. If the key cannot be turned or it is
difficult to turn from position
1
to position
2
, move the steering wheel from one side to
the other; this will release it.
Starting
3
The engine is started when the key is in this
position. Electrical devices with high power
consumption are switched off temporarily at
the same time.
Each time that the vehicle is restarted, the ig-
nition key must be turned to position
1
. The
repetitive start prevention lock of the igni-
tion prevents possible damage to the starter
motor if the engine is already running.
WARNING
●
The ignition key must NOT be removed from
the lock until the vehicle comes to a stand-
still. Otherwise, the steering could be imme-
diately blocked- Risk of accident!
●
Always remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle, even if only for a
short period. This is especially important if
children or disabled people are left alone in
the vehicle. They could accidentally start the
engine or work electrical equipment such as
the electric windows, resulting in an acci-
dent.
»
123
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
●
Unsupervised use of the key could start the
engine or any electrical system, such as the
electric windows. This could result in serious
injury.
CAUTION
The starter motor will only work when the en-
gine is stopped (ignition key position
3
).
Electronic immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser prevents unau-
thorised persons from driving the vehicle.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates
the electronic immobiliser automatically
when the key is inserted into the ignition.
The electronic immobiliser will be activated
again automatically as soon as you pull the
key out of the ignition lock.
The engine can only be started using a genu-
ine SEAT key with its correct code.
Note
A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensured
if genuine SEAT keys are used.
Starting petrol engines
The engine can only be started using a genu-
ine SEAT key with its correct code.
–
Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi-
tion and depress the clutch pedal thor-
oughly and hold it in this position for the
starter to turn the engine on.
–
Turn the ignition key to the starting posi-
tion ››› page 123.
–
Let
go of the ignition key as soon as the en-
gine starts; the starter motor must not run
on with the engine.
After starting a very hot engine, you may
need to slightly press down the accelerator.
When starting a cold engine, it may be a little
noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres-
sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com-
pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause
for concern.
If the engine does not start immediately,
switch the starter off after 10 seconds and try
again after half a minute. If the engine still
does not start, the fuel pump fuse should be
checked
›››
page 195, Fuses.
WARNING
●
Never start or run the engine in unventila-
ted or closed rooms. The exhaust gases con-
tain carbon monoxide, an odourless and col-
ourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal acci-
dents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of
consciousness and result in death.
●
Never leave the vehicle unattended if the
engine is running.
●
Never use “cold start sprays”, they could
explode or cause the engine to run at high
revs. Risk of injury.
CAUTION
●
When the engine is cold, you should avoid
high engine speeds, driving at full throttle
and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine
damage.
●
The vehicle should not be pushed or towed
more than 50 metres to start the engine. Un-
burnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter
and damage it.
●
Before attempting to push-start or tow a ve-
hicle in order to start it, you should first try to
start it using the battery of another vehicle.
Please observe and follow the notes on the
››› page 188, Jump-starting
.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the
engine with the vehicle stationary. Start off
immediately, driving gently. This helps the
engine reach operating temperature faster
and reduces emissions.
124
Driving
Starting diesel engines
The engine can only be started using a genu-
ine SEAT key with its correct code.
–
Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi-
tion and depress the clutch pedal thor-
oughly and hold it in this position for the
starter to turn the engine on.
–
Turn the ignition key to position ››› Fig. 131
2
. The warning lamp will light for en-
gine pre-he
ating.
–
When the lamp turns off, turn the ignition
key to position
3
to start the engine. Do
not press the accelerator.
–
Release the ignition key as soon as the en-
gine starts. The starter motor should not
turn at the same time.
When starting a cold engine, it may be a little
noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres-
sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com-
pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause
for concern.
If there are problems starting the engine, see
the
›››
page 188
.
Glo
w p
lug system for the diesel engine
To avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat-
tery, do not use any other major electrical
equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heat-
ing.
Start the engine as soon as the glow plug
warning lamp goes out.
Starting a diesel engine after the fuel tank
has been completely run dry
If the fuel tank has been completely run dry,
it may take longer than normal (up to one mi-
nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling.
This is because the fuel system must elimi-
nate air first.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Starting
petrol engines on page 124.
CAUTION
●
When the engine is cold, you should avoid
high engine speeds, driving at full throttle
and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine
damage.
●
The vehicle should not be pushed or towed
more than 50 metres to start the engine. Un-
burnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter
and damage it.
●
Before attempting to push-start or tow a ve-
hicle in order to start it, you should first try to
start it using the battery of another vehicle.
Please observe and follow the notes on the
››› page 188, Jump-starting.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the
engine with the vehicle stationary. You
should drive off as soon as you start the en-
gine. This helps the engine reach operating
temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Switching off the engine
–
Stop the vehicle.
–
Turn the ignition key to position
›››
Fig. 131
1
.
After switching the engine off, the radiator
fan may run on for up to 10 minutes. The fan
may also turn on again if coolant temperature
increases from accumulated heat in the en-
gine compartment or due to its prolonged ex-
posure to solar radiation.
WARNING
●
Never switch the engine off until the vehi-
cle is completely stationary.
●
The brake servo works only when the en-
gine is running. With the engine switched off,
more strength is needed to brake. As normal
brake operation cannot be performed, risk of
accidents and serious injury may exist.
●
The steering lock can be immediately
blocked once the key is removed from the ig-
nition. The vehicle cannot be steered. Risk of
accident.
»
125
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
CAUTION
When the engine has been running under a
heavy load for a long period, heat can accu-
mulate in the engine compartment and cause
engine damage. For this reason, idle the en-
gine for approximately 2 minutes before
switching it off.
Braking and parking
Braking capacity and braking distance
The efficiency of the brakes depends directly
on the
brake pad
wear. This wear depends to
a gr
eat extent on the conditions under which
the vehicle is operated and the way the vehi-
cle is driven. If you often drive in town, drive
short distances or have a sporty driving style,
we recommend that you have the thickness
of your brake pads checked by technical serv-
ices more frequently than recommended in
the Maintenance Programme.
If you drive with wet brakes, for example, af-
ter crossing areas of water, on days of heavy
rainfall or even after washing the car, the ef-
fect of the brakes is reduced as the brake
discs are wet or even frozen (in winter): in
this case, the brakes should be “dried” by
pressing the brake pedal several times.
WARNING
Longer braking distances and faults in the
brake system increase the risk of accidents.
●
New brake pads must be run in and do not
have the correct friction during the first
200 km. This reduced braking capacity may
be compensated for by pressing on the brake
pedal a little harder, which also applies when
the brake pads have to be changed further
on.
●
If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are
driving on roads which have been salted,
braking power may be lower than normal.
●
On steep slopes, if brakes are excessively
used, they will overheat. Before driving down
a long steep slope, it is advisable to reduce
speed and change down into a lower gear or
range (depending on the type of transmis-
sion). Thus, make use of engine braking and
relieve the brakes.
●
Never let the brakes “drag” by applying
light pressure. Continuous braking will cause
the brakes to overheat and the braking dis-
tance will increase. Apply and then release
the brakes alternately.
●
Never let the vehicle run with the engine
switched off. The braking distance is in-
creased considerably when the brake servo is
not active.
●
If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is
subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles can
form in the brake system. This reduces the ef-
ficiency of the brakes.
●
Non-standard or damaged front spoilers
could restrict the airflow to the brakes and
cause them to overheat. Before purchasing
accessories please observe the relevant in-
structions ››› page 155, Technical modifica-
tions.
●
If a br
ake system circuit fails, the braking
distance will be increased considerably. Con-
tact a specialised workshop immediately and
avoid unnecessary journeys.
Handbrake
Fig. 132 Handbrake between the front seats.
The handbrake should be applied firmly to
prevent the vehicle from accidentally rolling
away. Always apply the handbrake when you
leave your vehicle and when you park.
126
Driving
Applying the handbrake
–
Pull the handbrake lever up firmly
››› Fig. 132
.
R
el
easing the handbrake
–
Pull the lever up slightly and press the re-
lease knob in the direction of the arrow
››› Fig. 132 and guide the handbrake lever
down fully ›››
.
Always pull the handbrake all the way up, so
there is less risk of driving off with it still en-
gaged ››› .
The handbrake warning lamp lights up
when the handbrake is applied and the igni-
tion switched on. The warning lamp turns off
when the handbrake is released.
WARNING
●
Never use the handbrake to stop the vehi-
cle when it is in motion. The braking distance
is considerably longer, because braking is
only applied to the rear wheels. Risk of acci-
dent!
●
If the handbrake is only partially released,
this will cause the rear brakes to overheat,
which can impair the function of the brake
system and could lead to an accident. This al-
so causes premature wear on the rear brake
pads.
CAUTION
Always apply the handbrake before you leave
the vehicle. Put it in 1st gear as well.
Parking
The handbrake should always be firmly ap-
plied when the vehicle is parked.
Always note the following points when park-
ing the vehicle:
–
Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
–
Apply the handbrake.
–
Put it in 1st gear.
–
Switch the engine off and remove the key
from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel
slightly to engage the steering lock.
–
Always take you keys with you when you
leave the vehicle
›››
.
Additional notes on parking the vehicle on
gradients:
Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle
rolls against the kerb if it started to roll.
●
If the vehicle is parked facing downhill,
turn the front wheels so that they point to-
wards the kerb.
●
If the vehicle is parked facing uphill
, turn
the fr
ont
wheels so that they point away from
the kerb.
●
Secure the vehicle as usual by applying the
handbrake firmly and putting it in 1st gear.
WARNING
●
Take measures to reduce the risk of injury
when you leave your vehicle unattended.
●
Never park where the hot exhaust system
could ignite inflammable materials, such as
dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.
●
Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in
the vehicle when it is locked. They would be
unable to open the vehicle from the inside,
and could become trapped in the vehicle in
an emergency. In the event of an emergency,
locked doors will delay assistance to vehicle
occupants.
●
Never leave children alone in the vehicle.
They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex-
ample, by releasing the handbrake or the
gearbox lever.
●
Depending on weather conditions, it may
become extremely hot or cold inside the vehi-
cle. This can be fatal.
Hill driving assistant*
This function is only included in vehicles with
ESC.
»
127
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
The hill driving assistant helps the driver to
move off and upward on a hill when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
The system maintains brake pressure for ap-
proximately two seconds after the driver
takes his foot off the brake pedal to prevent
the vehicle from lurching backward when it is
started. During these 2 seconds, the driver
has enough time to release the clutch pedal
and accelerate without the vehicle moving
and without having to use the handbrake,
making start-up easier, more comfortable
and safer.
These are the basic operation conditions:
●
being on a ramp or hill/slope,
●
doors closed,
●
vehicle completely stationary,
●
engine running and foot on the brake,
●
besides having a gear engaged or being in
neutral for manual gear change and with the
selector lever at position S
,
D
or R for an au-
tomatic gearbox.
This system is also active when reversing up-
hill.
WARNING
●
If you do not start the vehicle immediately
after taking your foot off the brake pedal, the
vehicle may start to roll back under certain
conditions. Depress the brake pedal or use
the hand brake immediately.
●
If the engine stalls, depress the brake ped-
al or use the hand brake immediately.
●
When following a line of traffic uphill, if you
want to prevent the vehicle from rolling back
accidentally when starting off, hold the brake
pedal down for a few seconds before starting
off.
Note
The Official Service or a specialist workshop
can tell you if your vehicle is equipped with
this system.
Manual gearbox
Driving with a manual gearbox
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 19
Certain versions of the model may include a
6-speed manual gearbox, and its diagram is
shown on the gearbox lever.
The reverse gear can only be engaged when
the car is stationary. When the engine is run-
ning and before engaging this gear, wait
about 6 seconds with the clutch pressed
down thoroughly in order to protect the gear-
box.
The reverse lights switch on when the reverse
gear is selected and the ignition is on.
WARNING
●
When the engine is running, the vehicle
will start to move as soon as a gear is engag-
ed and the clutch released.
●
Never select the reverse gear when the ve-
hicle is in motion. Risk of accident.
Note
●
Do not rest your hand on the gear lever
while driving. The pressure of your hand
could cause premature wear on the selector
forks in the gearbox.
●
When changing gear, you should always
depress the clutch fully to avoid unnecessary
wear and damage.
●
Do not “slip” the clutch to hold the vehicle
on a hill. This causes premature wear and
damage to the clutch.
●
Do not leave your foot on the clutch pedal;
although the pressure may seem insignifi-
cant, it can cause the premature wear of the
clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you do
not need to change gear.
128
Driving
Automatic gearbox*
Gearbox programmes
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 20
The automatic gearbox has got two gearbox
programmes.
Selecting the normal programme
–
Put the selector lever into position D.
Selecting the sport programme
–
Put the selector lever into position S.
If you select the normal programme, D
, you
w
i
ll drive in the economy mode, i.e. the pro-
gramme is designed to reduce fuel consump-
tion. The gearbox changes up into a higher
gear as soon as possible and down into a
lower gear as late as possible.
If you select the sport programme, S, you will
drive in a sporty mode, i.e. a programme in
which shifts into high gears are postponed in
order to use the full power of the engine.
Selector lever lock
Fig. 133 Automatic gearbox
Fig. 134 Automatic gearbox: instrument pan-
el display.
The selector lever lock in position P or N pre-
vents gears from being engaged inadvertent-
ly, which would cause the vehicle to move.
The selector lever lock is released as follows:
–
Switch the ignition on.
–
Hold the brake pedal pressed down and at
the same time, hold the selector lever lock
on the left of the selector lever also press-
ed down.
The warning lamp
on the instrument panel
lights
up when the brake pedal should be ap-
plied. This is essential when the selector lev-
er is taken from the P or N positions.
Level lock only engages with the vehicle sta-
tionary at a speed of up to 5 km/h (3 mph).
At speeds of over 5 km/h (3 mph) the selec-
tor lever lock is automatically deactivated in
position N.
The selector lever lock is not engaged if the
selector lever is moved quickly through posi-
tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This
makes it possible, for instance, to “rock” the
vehicle backwards and forwards if it is stuck
in snow or mud. The selector lever lock en-
gages automatically if the brake pedal is not
depressed and the lever is in position N for
more than about 1second.
129
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Driving a car with an automatic
gearbox
Fig. 135 Automatic gearbox
The gearbox changes gear ratios automatical-
ly as the vehicle moves.
Starting
–
Start the engine with the selector lever in
position
P
or
N.
Driving
–
Press and hold the brake pedal.
–
Holding down the lock button (button on
the selector lever), select R or D.
–
Release the lever and wait a little for the
gearbox to engage the gear (a slight move-
ment can be felt).
–
Release the brake and press the accelerator
›››
.
Stopping briefly
–
If stopping for a short time, keep the vehi-
cle stationary by pressing the foot brake
hard to prevent the vehicle moving back-
wards on a slope or “creeping” forwards,
e.g. at traffic lights. The selector lever does
not need to be put into the positions P
or N
f
or thi
s.
–
Do not press the accelerator.
Parking
–
Press and hold the brake pedal until the ve-
hicle comes to a standstill ›››
.
–
Apply the handbrake.
–
By pressing the lock button down, move
the selector lever to
P
and release the lock
b
utton.
Driving up and down hills
–
Press the selector lever from position “D”
to the right into the tiptronic selector gate.
–
Lightly press the selector lever back to
change down.
Holding the car on a hill
–
The brake must be always pressed down to
prevent the vehicle from “rolling back-
wards” ›››
. Do not try to prevent the vehi-
cle from “rolling backwards” by increasing
the engine speed while a range of gears is
selected.
Starting the vehicle up hills
–
Apply the handbrake.
–
With a selected gear, accelerate slowly and
at the same time, release the handbrake.
The steeper the slope, the lower the needed
gear. This increases the braking effect of the
engine. For example, when driving down a
very steep slope in third gear. If the engine
brake effect is not enough, the vehicle will
speed up. The automatic gearbox automati-
cally changes up to prevent the engine over-
revving. Use the foot brake to reduce speed
and change into 3rd gear using Tiptronic*
›››
.
Your vehicle has an automatic interlock
which prevents the selector lever from being
put into a position for driving forwards or in
reverse from positions P
or N
if the brake
ped
al is not depressed.
The ignition key cannot be removed unless
the selector lever is in position P.
Control lamp “Pressing brake pedal”
When the warning lamp next to the selector
lever lights up, press the brake pedal. This is
necessary when the automatic gearbox selec-
tor lever is moved out of positions P or N. A
text message or instructions to perform nec-
essary operations may appear on the instru-
ment panel.
130
Driving
WARNING
●
As a driver, you should never leave your ve-
hicle if the engine is running and a gear range
is engaged. If you have to leave your vehicle
while the engine is running, you must apply
the parking brake and put the selector lever
in position P.
●
If the engine is running and if D or R is en-
gaged, you will need to hold the car on the
foot brake. The car will creep forward as the
power transmission is not fully interrupted
even when the engine is idling.
●
Never accelerate when moving the selector
lever or you may cause an accident.
●
Never move the selector lever to R or P
when driving. Risk of accident!
●
Before driving down a long, steep slope, it
is advisable to reduce speed and change into
a lower gear.
●
If you stop the vehicle up hill, always hold
the foot brake strongly depressed down to
stop it from rolling back.
●
Never allow the brake to rub and do not use
the brake pedal too often or for long periods.
Constant braking will cause the brakes to
overheat and will considerably reduce the
brake effect. This increases the braking dis-
tance and could cause the brake system to
fail.
●
Never allow the car to roll down a gradient
with the gear in neutral N, or in selector lever
position D, even if the engine is not running.
CAUTION
●
If you stop the vehicle up hills, do not at-
tempt to stop it from rolling back by depress-
ing the accelerator when a gear has been se-
lected. Otherwise, the automatic gearbox
may overheat causing damage. Pull the hand-
brake up or fully depress the brake pedal to
prevent the vehicle from rolling away.
●
If you allow the vehicle to roll when the en-
gine is not running, or with the selector lever
in position N, a lack of lubrication in the auto-
matic gearbox will damage it.
Changing gear in tiptronic mode*
Fig. 136 Changing gear with Tiptronic.
Fig. 137 Steering wheel with paddle levers
for automatic gearbox.
The Tiptronic system allows the driver to se-
lect gears manually.
General information about driving in tiptronic
mode
Changing gear with the selector lever
–
Press the selector lever from position D
to
the right
int
o the tiptronic selector gate.
–
Lightly press the selector lever forward
››› Fig. 136
+
to change up to a higher
gear.
–
Lightly press the selector lever backward
››› Fig. 136
-
to change down to a lower
gear.
Changing gear with the steering wheel
paddle levers*
–
Press the right paddle lever
+
towards the
steering wheel to change up ››› Fig. 137
.
»
131
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
–
Press the left paddle lever
-
towards the
steering wheel to change down ››› Fig. 137.
Using the paddle levers on the steering
wheel, you can access manual driving mode
regardless of the pre-selected driving mode.
General information about driving in
tiptronic mode
When accelerating, the automatic gearbox /
DSG automatic gearbox goes into a higher
gear a little before the engine reaches its
maximum permitted revolutions.
If a lower gear is selected, the automatic
gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox will only
change down when the engine cannot go
over its maximum permitted revolutions.
If “tiptronic” is selected whilst the vehicle is
in motion and the automatic gearbox / DSG
automatic gearbox is in third gear and selec-
tor lever position
D
, “tiptronic” mode will
then al
so be in third gear.
Changing gears in the normal or sport
programme using the steering wheel paddle
levers
If the paddle levers ››› Fig. 137 are used in
the normal or sport programme, the system
switches temporarily to “tiptronic” mode. To
exit “Tiptronic” mode again, press the right
paddle lever
+
towards the steering wheel
for approximately one second. You will also
leave “tiptronic” mode if the paddle levers
are not moved for a certain time.
Note
●
The gear paddle levers on the steering
wheel can be operated with the selector lever
in any position and with the vehicle in mo-
tion.
Selector lever positions
Fig. 138 Automatic gearbox: instrument pan-
el display.
Selector lever positions
The selected gear is displayed on the side of
the selector lever and on the instrument pan-
el display. The currently selected gear for the
automatic gearbox will also be shown on the
display.
Tiptronic gear indicator
If the automatic gearbox is shifted manually,
the selected gears are shown on the screen.
P - parking lock
When the selector lever is in this position,
the driven wheels are locked mechanically.
Position P on the lever must only be selected
if the vehicle is stationary.
To move selector lever from position P, the
locking button on the selector lever handle
must be pressed and the brake pedal de-
pressed at the same time while the ignition is
switched on.
To put the selector lever in position P
, simply
pr
e
ss the lock button down and, if necessary,
depress the brake pedal down.
R - Reverse gear
The reverse gear is engaged in this position.
Reverse gear must be engaged only when the
vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling.
To move the selector lever to position R,
press the lock button down and, at the same
time, press the brake pedal down, with the
ignition switched on.
With the selector lever in position R and the
ignition switched on the following occurs:
●
Reverse lights light up.
132
Driving
●
The air conditioner automatically changes
the air recirculation mode.
●
The wiper starts if the windscreen washer is
on.
●
The parking distance warning system*
switches on.
N - Neutral (idling)
If this position is selected, the gearbox is in
neutral. Power is not transmitted to the
wheels and the engine does not have a brak-
ing function.
Never use the
N
position to drive down a long
hi
ll. There is no engine braking and the
brakes are subjected to excessive stain.
You could damage the automatic gearbox if
you drive down hills with the gearbox lever in
position N and the engine switched off.
D - Drive (forward)
In this position the gearbox automatically
changes to a lower or higher gear, according
to the engine's requirements, the driving
style and speed. The braking effect of the en-
gine when driving downhill is very limited
when the selector is in this position. The in-
strument panel display shows the selected
gear as well as the selector lever in position
D.
When travelling at speeds lower than 5 km/h
(3 mph) or when the vehicle is stationary,
press the brake pedal to change the selector
lever from position N to position D.
S - Standard driving position (Sport
programme)
When the selector lever is in position S, it will
automatically change up into a higher gear
later, and change down into a low gear, if
compared with position D. This way, it is pos-
sible to take full advantage of the engine re-
serve power, depending on the engine de-
mand, driving style and speed. The braking
effect of the engine when driving downhill is
very limited. On the instrument panel display
the selected gear is shown as well as the se-
lector lever to position S.
To select gear range S, press the lock button
on the selector lever.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Driving a
car with an automatic gearbox on page 131.
●
If the
vehicle moves with no control, an ac-
cident and serious injury may occur.
WARNING
Never switch the engine off until the vehicle
is stationary. You could lose control of your
vehicle. This could cause an accident and se-
rious injury.
●
The airbags and belt tensioners do not
work when the ignition is switched off.
●
The brake servo does not work with the en-
gine off. You need more force to stop the vehi-
cle.
●
Power steering does not work when the en-
gine is not running. That is why it is much
more difficult to turn the steering wheel.
●
Never remove the key from the ignition if
the vehicle is in motion. The steering lock
could suddenly engage, and you would not be
able to steer the vehicle.
CAUTION
If you allow the vehicle to move when the en-
gine is switched off or with the selector lever
in position “N”, take your foot off the acceler-
ator and wait until the engine starts idling
before returning to position “D”.
Kick-down feature
This feature allows maximum acceleration.
If you press the accelerator down thoroughly,
the gearbox automatically changes down, de-
pending on speed and engine speed, into a
lower gear to take full advantage of give the
vehicle maximum acceleration.
The gearbox does not change gear until the
engine reaches the maximum determined en-
gine speed for the gear.
»
133
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle if you ac-
celerate on slippery road surfaces. Risk of se-
rious injury.
●
Be particularly careful when using the kick-
down features on slippery road surfaces. With
a fast acceleration, the vehicle could lose
traction and skid.
●
You should use the kick-down feature only
when traffic and weather conditions allow it
to be used safely.
Gear-change indicator
3 Valid for vehicles: with a manual gearbox
The recommended gear for saving fuel is in-
dicated on the dash screen of certain vehi-
cles during driving.
Display Meaning
The optimal gear is selected.
Changing to a higher gear is recommended.
Changing to a lower gear is recommended.
Information regarding the “cleanliness” of
the diesel particulate filter
The exhaust system manager detects that the
diesel particulate filter is nearly saturated
and contributes to self-cleaning by recom-
mending the optimal gear. For this purpose,
it might be necessary to drive momentarily
with a high rpm ››› page 59.
WARNING
The gear change indicator is only an auxiliary
function and in no case should be a substi-
tute for careful driving.
●
The responsibility of choosing the correct
gear depending on the situation (e.g. over-
taking, driving up or down a slope or towing a
trailer) lies with the driver.
For the sake of the environment
Selecting the correct gear can help to save
fuel.
Note
The recommended gear display is switched
off when the clutch pedal is pressed.
Run-in and economical driving
Running in a new engine
The engine needs to be run in over the first
1,500 km.
Up to 1000 kilometres
–
Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3
the maximum speed.
–
Do not accelerate hard.
–
Avoid high engine revolutions.
–
Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 kilometres (600 to 900
miles)
–
Speeds can be gradually
increased to the
m
ax
imum road speed or maximum permis-
sible engine speed (rpm).
During its first few hours of running, the in-
ternal friction in the engine is greater than
later on, when all the moving parts have bed-
ded in.
For the sake of the environment
If the engine is run in gently, its life will be in-
creased and its oil consumption reduced.
Running in tyres and brake pads
New tyres should be run-in carefully for the
first 500 km (300 miles). New brake pads
should be run-in carefully for the first
200 km.
During the first 200 km, you can compensate
for the reduced braking effect by applying
more pressure to the brake pedal. In case of
a sharp braking, the braking distance will be
longer with new brake pads than with brake
pads which have been run-in.
134
Driving
WARNING
●
At first, new tyres do not give maximum
grip, and require running-in. This may cause
an accident. Drive particularly carefully in the
first 500 km.
●
New brake pads must be “run in” and do
not have the correct friction properties during
the first 200 km. However, the reduced brak-
ing capacity may be compensated by press-
ing on the brake pedal a little harder.
Environmental friendliness
Environmental protection is a top priority in
the design, choice of materials and manufac-
ture of your new SEAT.
Constructive measures to encourage
recycling
●
Joints and connections designed for easy
dismantling
●
Modular construction to facilitate disman-
tling
●
Increased use of single-grade materials.
●
Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in
accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and
ISO 1629.
Choice of materials
●
Use of recycled materials.
●
Use of compatible plastics in the same part
if its components are not easily separated.
●
Use of recycled materials and/or materials
originating from renewable sources.
●
Reduction of volatile components, includ-
ing odour, in plastic materials.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants.
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions
dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive
2000/53/EC):
cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa-
v
al
ent chromium.
Manufacturing methods
●
Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the
protective wax for cavities.
●
Use of plastic film as protection during ve-
hicle transport.
●
Use of solvent-free adhesives.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-
tems.
●
Recycling and energy recovery from resi-
dues (RDF).
●
Improvement in the quality of waste water.
●
Use of systems for the recovery of residual
heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,
etc.).
●
The use of water-soluble paints.
Catalytic converter
To maintain the useful life of the catalytic
converter
–
Use only unleaded petrol with petrol en-
gines, as lead damages the catalytic con-
verter.
–
Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.
–
For engine oil changes, do not replenish
with too much engine oil ››› page 170, Top-
ping up engine oil .
–
Never t
ow the vehicle to start it, use jump
leads if necessary
›››
page 188.
If you notice misfiring, uneven running or
loss of power when the vehicle is moving, re-
duce speed immediately and have the vehi-
cle inspected at the nearest specialised
workshop. In general, the exhaust warning
lamp will light up when any of the described
symptoms occur
›››
page 57. If this happens,
unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system
and escape into the environment. The cata-
lytic converter can also be damaged by over-
heating.
WARNING
The catalytic converter reaches very high
temperatures! Risk of fire!
●
Never park where the catalytic converter
could come into contact with dry grass or
flammable materials under the vehicle.
»
135
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
●
Do not apply additional underseal or anti-
corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, cata-
lytic converter or the heat shields on the ex-
haust system. These materials could catch
fire when the vehicle is being driven.
CAUTION
Never run the fuel tank completely dry be-
cause the irregularity of the fuel supply may
cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt
fuel to enter the exhaust system, which could
cause overheating and damage the catalytic
converter.
For the sake of the environment
Even when the emission control system is
working perfectly, there may be a smell of
sulphur from the exhaust gas under some
conditions. This depends on the sulphur con-
tent of the fuel used. Quite often the problem
can be solved by changing to another brand
of fuel.
Diesel engine particulate filter*
Fig. 139 Vehicle data sticker on back cover of
the Maintenance Programme.
Your vehicle is fitted with a DPF (Diesel partic-
ulate filter) if the vehicle data sticker (back
cover of the “Maintenance Programme)” lists
the PR code 7GG or 7MG ››› Fig. 139
.
The die
sel
engine particulate filter eliminates
most of the soot from the exhaust gas sys-
tem. Under normal driving conditions, the fil-
ter cleans itself. If this is not possible (for ex-
ample, multiple short trips) the filter will be
obstructed by soot and the diesel engine
particulate filter warning lamp will light up.
This does not represent a fault, it is a warning
that indicates that the filter has not been
able to regenerate automatically and that you
must perform a cleaning cycle, as indicated
in ››› page 59.
WARNING
●
The diesel engine particulate filter may
reach extremely high temperatures; the vehi-
cle should be parked so that the exhaust pipe
does not come into contact with flammable
materials underneath the vehicle. Otherwise
there is a risk of fire.
CAUTION
●
Your vehicle is not designed to use biodie-
sel fuel. Never, under any circumstances re-
fuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuel
could damage the engine and the fuel sys-
tem. The addition of biodiesel to diesel by
the diesel producer in accordance with stand-
ard EN 590 is authorised and will not cause
damage to the engine or the fuel system.
●
Using diesel fuel with a high sulphur con-
tent may significantly reduce the useful life of
the diesel particulate filter. Your Technical
Service will be able to tell you which coun-
tries have diesel with a high sulphur content.
Economical and environmentally
friendly driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution
and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de-
pends in large part on your driving style. By
adopting an economical driving style and an-
ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can
easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%.
136
Driving
Some tips on how to help you reduce pollu-
tion while saving money are listed below.
Active cylinder management (ACT
®
)
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle
may have active cylinder management
(ACT
®
).
The active cylinder management (ACT
®
) may
automatically deactivate some of the engine
cylinders if the driving situation does not re-
quire too much power. When it is switched
off, no fuel is injected into these cylinders,
hence total fuel consumption may be re-
duced.
Drive anticipating the traffic situation
A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating.
When you anticipate situations, you have to
brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If
it is possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear
engaged
, for example, if you see a red light
ahe
a
d. The braking effect achieved in this
way helps to reduce the wear of brakes and
tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are
reduced to zero (disconnection due to iner-
tia).
Change gear early to save energy
An effective way of saving fuel is to change
up quickly through the gears. Running the
engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses
an unnecessary amount of fuel.
Manual gearbox: shift up from first to second
gear as soon as possible. We recommend
that, whenever possible, you change to a
higher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Follow
the “recommended gear” indication that ap-
pears on the instrument panel ››› page 64.
Avoid driving at high speed
We advise you not to drive at the top speed
permitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption,
exhaust emissions and noise levels all in-
crease very rapidly at higher speeds. Driving
at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Avoid idling
It is worthwhile switching off the engine
when waiting in a traffic jam, at level cross-
ings or at traffic lights with a long red phase.
The fuel saved after only 30 - 40 seconds is
greater than the amount of fuel needed to re-
start the engine.
The engine takes a long time to warm up
when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-
tant emissions are also especially high dur-
ing this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore
best to drive off immediately after starting
the engine. Avoid running the engine at high
speed.
Periodic maintenance
Periodic maintenance work guarantees that,
before beginning a journey, you will not con-
sume more than the required amount of fuel.
A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit
of improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi-
mum reliability and an enhanced resale val-
ue.
A badly serviced engine can consume up to
10% more fuel than necessary.
Avoid short journeys
To reduce the consumption and emission of
polluting exhaust gases, the engine and the
exhaust gas filtration systems should reach
the optimum operating temperature.
With the engine cold, fuel consumption is
proportionally higher. The engine does not
warm up and fuel consumption does not nor-
malise until having driven approximately four
kilometres (2.5 miles). This is why we recom-
mend avoiding short trips whenever possi-
ble.
Maintain the correct tyre pressures
Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an ad-
equate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pres-
sure is just one bar (14.5 psi/100 kPa) too
low, fuel consumption can increase by as
much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resist-
ance, under-inflation also increases tyre wear
wear and impairs handling.
The tyre pressures should always be checked
when the tyres are cold.
»
137
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Do not use winter tyres all year round as they
increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.
Avoid unnecessary weight
Given that every kilo of extra weight
will in-
c
r
ease the fuel consumption, it is advisable
to always check the luggage compartment to
make sure that no unnecessary loads are be-
ing transported.
A roof rack is often left in place for the sake
of convenience, even when it is no longer
needed. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph)
and 120 km/h (75 mph) your vehicle will use
about 12% more fuel as a result of the extra
wind resistance caused by the roof rack even
when it is not in use.
Save electricity
The engine activates the alternator, which
produces electricity. With the need for elec-
tricity, fuel consumption also increases. Be-
cause of this, always turn off electrical devi-
ces when you do not need them. Examples of
devices that use a lot of electricity are: the
blower at high speeds, the rear window heat-
ing or the seat heaters*.
Note
●
If your vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not rec-
ommended that
you switch this function off.
●
It is recommended that you close the win-
dows when driving at more than 60 km/h
(37 mph)
●
Do not driv
e with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the
plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can
burn the clutch plate lining, causing a serious
fault.
●
Do not hold the car on a hill with the clutch,
use the foot brake or hand brake, using the
latter to start. The fuel consumption will be
lower and you will prevent the clutch plate
from being damaged.
●
On descents, use the engine brake, chang-
ing to the gear that is more suitable for the
slope. Fuel consumption will be “zero” and
the brakes will not suffer.
Driving abroad
To drive abroad, the following must be taken
into consideration:
●
For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter
ensure that unleaded petrol is available for
the journey. See the chapter “Refuelling”. Au-
tomobile organisations will have information
about service station networks selling unlea-
ded fuel.
●
In some countries, it is possible that your
car model is not sold, and therefore some
spare parts are not available or the technical
services may only be able to carry out limited
repairs.
SEAT importers and distributors will gladly
provide information about the technical prep-
aration that your vehicle requires and also
about necessary maintenance and repair
possibilities.
Adhesive strips for headlights
In countries where vehicles drive on the other
side of the road to your home country, the
asymmetric dipped beam may dazzle drivers
of oncoming vehicles.
To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers
to certain parts of the headlight lenses. Fur-
ther information is available at any Technical
Service.
In vehicles with adaptive headlights, the ro-
tation system must previously be disconnec-
ted. To do this, please go to a specialised
workshop.
138
Driver assistance systems
Driver assistance systems
Braking and stability systems
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*
Fig. 140 Detailed view of the dash panel: ESC
switch.
This Electronic Stability System reduces the
risk of skidding and improves the vehicle's
stability and ability to hold the road.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) contains
the electronic differential lock (EDL) and the
traction control system (ASR). The ESC works
together with the ABS. Both control lamps
will light up if the ESC or ABS systems are
faulty.
The ESC system is started automatically
when the engine is started.
The ESC system is always active and cannot
be switched off. The ESC switch only switches
the ASR off.
The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin
is desirable ››› page 141
.
F
or e
xample:
●
When driving with snow chains.
●
When driving in deep snow or on loose sur-
faces.
●
When the vehicle is stuck, to rock it back-
wards and forwards.
Press the button to switch the ASR back on
when you no longer need wheel spin.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*
The ESC reduces the risk of skidding by brak-
ing the wheels individually.
The system uses the steering wheel angle
and road speed to calculate the changes of
direction desired by the driver, and constant-
ly compares them with the actual behaviour
of the vehicle. When irregularities occur, for
example, if the vehicle begins to skid, the
ESC brakes the appropriate wheel automati-
cally.
The forces acting on the braked wheel bring
the vehicle back to a stable condition. If the
vehicle tends to oversteer (the rear end
slides out), the system will act on the front
wheel on the outside of the turn.
WARNING
●
Do not forget that the electronic stability
control ESC cannot defy the laws of physics.
This should be kept in mind, particularly on
slippery and wet roads and when towing a
trailer.
●
Always adapt your driving style to suit the
condition of the roads and the traffic situa-
tion. The greater safety provided by the ESC
should not encourage you to run any risks.
CAUTION
●
To ensure that the ESC works correctly, all
four wheels must be fitted with the same
tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of
the tyres can cause the system to reduce en-
gine power when this is not desired.
●
Any modifications made to the vehicle (for
example, to the engine, brake system, run-
ning gear or to the combination of wheels
and tyres) may affect the operation of the
ABS, EDL, ESC and ASR.
Electronic differential lock (EDL)*
EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accel-
erate and climb a gradient in slippery condi-
tions where this may otherwise be difficult or
even impossible.
It uses the ABS sensors to monitor the speed
of the driven wheels. In case of an EDL fault,
»
139
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
the warning light for ABS lights up
››› page 59
.
At
s
peeds of up to approximately 80 km/h
(50 mph), it is able to balance out differences
in the speed of the driven wheels of approxi-
mately 100 rpm/min caused by a partially
slippery road surface. It does this by braking
the wheel which has lost traction and distrib-
uting more driving force to the other driven
wheel via the differential.
To prevent the disc brake of the braking
wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out au-
tomatically if subjected to excessive loads.
The vehicle will continue to function normally
without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not
informed that the EDL has been switched off.
The EDL will switch on again automatically
when the brake has cooled down.
WARNING
●
When accelerating on a slippery surface,
for example on ice and snow, press the accel-
erator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven
wheels may start to spin. This could impair
the vehicle's stability.
●
Always adapt your driving style to suit road
conditions and the traffic situation. Do not let
the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you in-
to taking any risks when driving, this can
cause accidents.
CAUTION
Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the en-
gine, the brake system, running gear or any
components affecting the wheels and tyres)
could affect the efficiency of the EDL
››› page 155.
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)*
The function (Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA) is
only included in vehicles with ESC.
In an emergency, most drivers brake in time,
but not with maximum force. This results in
unnecessarily long braking distances.
This is when the brake assist system comes
into action. When pressing the brake pedal
rapidly, the assistant interprets it as an emer-
gency. It very quickly builds up the full brake
pressure so that the ABS can be activated
more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing
braking distance.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake ped-
al, since the brake assist system switches off
automatically as soon as you release the
brake.
Automatic hazard warning lights activation
The brake lights flash automatically to indi-
cate that the vehicle is braking suddenly or in
an emergency situation. If the emergency
braking continues until the vehicle comes to
a standstill, the hazard warning lights will
then come on and the brake lights will re-
main on permanently from that moment. The
warning lights will automatically switch off
when the vehicle begins to move again or
when the "warning" light button is pressed.
WARNING
●
The risk of accident is higher if you drive
too fast, if you do not keep your distance from
the vehicle in front, and when the road sur-
face is slippery or wet. The increased acci-
dent risk cannot be reduced by the brake as-
sist system.
●
The brake assist system cannot defy the
laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are
dangerous even with the brake assist system!
Therefore, it is essential that you adjust your
speed to suit the road and traffic conditions.
Do not let the extra safety features tempt you
into taking any risks when driving.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake (ABS) system prevents
the wheels from locking during braking and
is an important part of the vehicle's active
safety system.
How the ABS works
If one of the wheels turns too slowly in rela-
tion to the vehicle's speed, and is close to
locking, the system will reduce the braking
140
Driver assistance systems
pressure to this wheel. The driver is made
aware of this control process by a pulsating
of the brake pedal and audible noise. This is
a deliberate warning to the driver that one or
more of the wheels is tending to lock and the
ABS control function has intervened. In this
situation it is important to keep the brake
pedal fully depressed so the ABS can regu-
late the brake application. Do not “pump”.
If you brake hard on a slippery road surface,
the best possible control is retained as the
wheels do not lock.
However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee
shorter braking distances in all
conditions.
Br
ak
ing distance could even be further if you
brake on gravel or on fresh snow on a slip-
pery surface.
WARNING
●
The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the
laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are
dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that
the ABS is working (to counteract locked
wheels under braking), you should reduce
speed immediately to suit the road and traffic
conditions. Do not let the extra safety fea-
tures tempt you into taking any risks when
driving.
●
The effectiveness of ABS is also determined
by the tyres fitted ››› page 176.
●
If the ru
nning gear or brake system is modi-
fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se-
verely limited.
Traction control system (ASR)*
The traction control system prevents the driv-
en wheels from spinning when the vehicle is
accelerating. This system always includes
ABS.
Description and operation of the traction
control system during acceleration (ASR
On front-wheel drive vehicles, the ASR sys-
tem intervenes, reducing engine power and
preventing the driven wheels from slipping
during acceleration. The system works in the
entire speed range in conjunction with ABS.
If a failure occurs in the ABS, the ASR will al-
so stop working.
TCS helps the car to start moving, accelerate
and climb a gradient in slippery conditions
where this may otherwise be difficult or even
impossible.
The ASR automatically switches on when the
engine is started. If necessary, it may be
turned on or off by briefly pressing the ESC
button on the centre console.
When the ASR is off, the warning lamp lights
up . The ASR should normally be left on.
Only in exceptional circumstances, when
wheel spin is required, can they be turned off
using the ESC button, for example:
●
With compact temporary spare wheel.
●
When using the snow chains.
●
When driving in deep snow or on soft ter-
rain.
●
When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it
“by rocking it.”
The ASR should be switched on again as
soon as possible.
WARNING
●
Remember that not even the ASR can defy
the laws of physics. This should be kept in
mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads
and when towing a trailer.
●
Always adapt your driving style to suit the
condition of the roads and the traffic situa-
tion. The greater safety provided by the ASR
should not encourage you to run any risks.
CAUTION
●
To ensure that the ASR works correctly,
identical tyres should be fitted on all four
wheels. Any differences in the rolling radius
of the tyres can cause the system to reduce
engine power when this is not desired.
●
Any modifications made to the vehicle (for
example, to the engine, brake system, run-
ning gear or to the combination of wheels
and tyres) may affect the operation of the
ABS and ASR.
141
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
XDS*
When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-
tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turn
at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In
this way, the wheel that is turning faster (out-
er wheel) receives less drive torque than the
inner wheel. This may mean that in certain
situations the torque delivered to the inner
wheel is too high, causing the wheels to
spin. On the other hand, the outer wheel is
receiving a lower drive torque than it could
transmit. This causes an overall loss of lateral
grip on the front axle, resulting in understeer
or “lengthening” of the trajectory.
The XDS system can detect and correct this
effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.
Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside
wheel and counter the excess driving torque
of that wheel. This means that the driver's
desired trajectory is much more precise,
The XDS system works in combination with
the ESC and is always active, even when ASR
traction control is disconnected.
Brake servo
The brake servo increases the pressure you
apply to the brake pedal. It works only when
the engine is running.
If the brake servo is not functioning, e.g. due
to a malfunction, or if the vehicle is being
towed, you will have to press the brake pedal
considerably harder to make up for the lack
of servo assistance.
WARNING
The braking distance can also be affected by
external factors.
●
Never let the vehicle coast with the engine
switched off. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in an accident. The braking dis-
tance is increased considerably when the
brake servo is not active.
●
If the brake servo is not working, for exam-
ple when the vehicle is being towed, you will
have to press the brake pedal considerably
harder than normal.
Start-Stop System*
Description and operation
The Start-Stop function stops the engine
when the vehicle is stopped and starts it au-
tomatically when required.
–
When the vehicle is stopped, put it in neu-
tral and release the clutch pedal. The en-
gine will stop.
–
When the clutch pedal is pressed, the en-
gine starts again.
–
The instrument panel display shows infor-
mation about the status of the Start-Stop
function ››› Fig. 142
.
St
ar
t-Stop function conditions
●
The driver seat belt must be buckled.
●
The bonnet must be closed.
●
The engine must be at operating tempera-
ture.
●
The steering wheel must be straight.
●
The vehicle must be on flat ground.
●
The vehicle must not be in reverse.
●
A trailer must not be connected.
●
The temperature of the interior must be
within the comfort limits (
A/C
button should
be selected).
●
The windscreen de-mist function must be
off.
●
If in an increase in airflow is not
requested.
●
The t
emper
ature must not be set to HI or
LO.
●
The driver door must be closed.
●
The diesel particulate filter must not be in
regeneration mode, for diesel engines.
●
The battery charge must not be low for the
next start.
●
Battery temperature must be between -1 °C
(+30 °F) and +55 °C (+131 °F).
142
Driver assistance systems
Start-Stop function interruption
In the following situations, the Start-Stop
function will be interrupted and the engine
will automatically start:
●
The vehicle starts moving.
●
The brake pedal is pressed several times in
a row.
●
The battery has been discharged excessive-
ly.
●
The Start-Stop System is manually deacti-
vated.
●
The windscreen de-mist function is turned
on.
●
The temperature of the interior exceeds the
comfort limits (
A/C
button).
●
If the airflow is increased by more than 3
presses.
●
Temperature setting HI or LO is selected.
●
The engine coolant temperature is insuffi-
cient.
●
The alternator is faulty, for example the V-
belt has ruptured.
●
If any of the conditions described in the
previous section are not fulfilled.
WARNING
Never allow the vehicle to move with the en-
gine off for any reason. You could lose control
of your vehicle. This could cause an accident
and serious injury.
●
The brake servo does not work with the en-
gine off. You need more force to stop the vehi-
cle.
●
Power steering does not work when the en-
gine is not running. That is why it is much
more difficult to turn the steering wheel.
●
Turn off the Start-Stop system when driving
through water (fording streams, etc.).
Note
●
For vehicles with the Start-Stop function
and a manual gearbox, when the engine is
started, the clutch must be pressed.
●
When the conditions for the Start-Stop
function are not fulfilled, the instrument pan-
el displays the Start-Stop indicator dimmed.
●
If the steering wheel is turned more than
270°, it will not be possible to start the vehi-
cle again. To start the vehicle, straighten the
steering wheel so that it is turned less than
270°.
Activating and deactivating the Start-
Stop function
Fig. 141 The Start-Stop function button.
Every time the ignition is switched on, the
Start-Stop function is automatically activa-
ted.
Manually deactivating the Start-Stop
function
–
Press the
››› Fig. 141
button located on
the c
entr
e console. When the Start-Stop
function is switched off, the warning lamp
comes on.
–
If the Start-Stop function is operating then
the engine starts immediately.
»
143
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Switching the Start-Stop function on
manually
–
Press the
››› Fig. 141
button located on
the c
entr
e console. The warning lamp will
switch off.
Driver messages
Fig. 142 Display on the instrument panel dur-
ing Start-Stop function operation.
When the engine is turned off by the Start-
Stop function, this is displayed on the instru-
ment panel.
If the Start-Stop system is not switched on,
the
warning lamp will appear on the instru-
ment
panel.
Note
There are different versions of the dash pan-
el; the display of indications on the screen
may differ.
Rear Assist
Operating and safety warnings
WARNING
●
The Rear Assist does not make it possible
to precisely calculate the distance from ob-
stacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor can it
overcome the system's own limits, hence us-
ing it may cause serious accidents and inju-
ries if used negligently or without due care.
The driver should be aware of his/her sur-
roundings at all times to ensure safe driving.
●
The camera lens expands and distorts the
field of vision and displays the objects on the
screen in a different, vague manner. The per-
ception of distances is also distorted by this
effect.
●
Some objects may, due to the resolution of
the display screen - not be displayed in a sat-
isfactory manner or may not be displayed at
all. Take special care with thin posts, fences,
railings or trees that might not be displayed
on screen and could damage the vehicle.
●
The rear assist has blind spots where it is
not possible to represent people or objects
(small children, animals and certain objects
cannot be detected in its field of vision). Mon-
itor the vehicle's surrounding area at all
times.
●
Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice and
snow, and do not cover it.
●
The system is not a replacement for driver
awareness. Supervise the parking operation
at all times, as well as the vehicle's surround-
ing area. Adapt your speed and driving style
at all times to suit visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions.
●
Do not be distracted from the traffic by
looking at the screen.
●
The images on the rear assist screen are
only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial
depth, protruding parts or holes in the road,
for example, are more difficult to detect or
may not be seen at all.
●
Vehicle load modifies the representation of
the orientation lines displayed. The width
represented by the lines diminishes with ve-
hicle load. Pay special attention to the vehi-
cle's surroundings when the inside of the ve-
hicle of the luggage compartment is carrying
a heavy load.
144
Driver assistance systems
●
In the following situations, the objects or
other vehicles shown in the navigation sys-
tem display appear to be further away or
closer than they really are: Pay special atten-
tion:
–
On moving from a horizontal plane to a
slope.
–
On moving from a slope to a horizontal
plane.
–
If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the
rear.
–
When the vehicle approaches objects
that are not on the ground surface or are
jutting out from it. These objects may al-
so be outside the camera's angle of vi-
sion when reversing.
Note
It is important to take great care and pay spe-
cial attention if you are not yet familiar with
the system.
Instructions for use
Fig. 143 On the rear bumper: location of the
rear assist camera
A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver
during reverse parking or manoeuvring
››› Fig. 143
. The picture on the camera is dis-
p
l
ayed together with orientation lines projec-
ted by the system on the display on the left of
the interior rear view mirror. The bottom of
the screen displays part of the bumper corre-
sponding to the registration plate area that
will be used as reference by the driver.
Necessary conditions for parking and
manoeuvring with the
The system should not be used in the follow-
ing cases:
●
If the image displayed is not very reliable or
is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty
lens.
●
If the area behind the vehicle is not dis-
played very clearly or is incomplete.
●
If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.
●
If the position and installation angle of the
camera have been changed, e.g. after a rear-
end collision. Have the system checked by a
specialised workshop.
Familiarising yourself with the system
To familiarise yourself with the system, the
orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec-
ommends practising parking and manoeu-
vring with the rear assist in a place without
too much traffic or in a car park when there
are good weather and visibility conditions.
Cleaning the camera lens
Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snow
and ice:
●
Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-
based glass cleaning product and clean the
lens with a dry cloth.
●
Remove snow using a small brush.
●
Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.
CAUTION
●
Never use abrasive cleaning products to
clean the camera lens.
●
Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice
or snow from the camera lens. Doing so could
damage the camera.
145
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Parking and manoeuvring with the
rear assist
Fig. 144 View of the left side of the interior
rear view mirror on the display: orientation
lines.
Switching the system on and off
●
The rear assist will switch on when the igni-
tion is on or the engine running, on engaging
reverse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang-
ing the selector lever to the R
position (auto-
m
atic
gearbox).
●
The system switches off 8 seconds after
disengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox)
or removing the selector lever from the R po-
sition (automatic gearbox). The system will
also disconnect immediately after the igni-
tion is switched off.
Meaning of the orientation lines
››› Fig. 144
Side lines: extension of the vehicle (the
approximate width of the vehicle plus the
rear view mirrors) on the road surface.
End of the side lines: the area marked in
green ends approximately 2 m behind
the vehicle on the road surface.
Intermediate line: indicates a distance of
approximately 1 m behind the vehicle on
the road surface.
Red horizontal line: indicates a safe dis-
tance of approximately 40 cm at the rear
of the vehicle on the road surface.
Parking manoeuvre
●
Place the vehicle in front of the parking
space and engage reverse gear (manual
gearbox) or move the selector to the R posi-
tion (automatic gearbox).
●
Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel
so that the side orientation lines lead to-
wards the parking space.
●
Guide the vehicle into the parking space so
that the side orientation lines run parallel to
it.
1
2
3
4
Parking aid*
General information
Various aid systems are in place to help in
parking and manoeuvring depending on the
vehicle’s equipment:
The rear parking aid is an audible aid that
w
arns against obstacles behind the vehicle
››› page 147.
The front parking aid is an audible aid that
warns against obstacles both behind and in
front of the vehicle
›››
page 148.
Apart from the acoustic signals, when the ve-
hicle is equipped with a portable navigator
(PND), this visually displays information re-
garding front and/or rear areas.
WARNING
●
The sensors have blind spots in which ob-
stacles may not be detected.
●
Always look out for small children and ani-
mals because the system will not always de-
tect them. Pay attention when reversing to
avoid accidents.
●
The parking aid is not a replacement for
driver awareness. The driver must take full re-
sponsibility for parking and other manoeu-
vres.
146
Driver assistance systems
Rear parking aid
The parking aid system will use an audible
warning to indicate of the approach of any
object towards the rear of the vehicle.
Description
The acoustic parking aid system will measure
the distance between the rear of the vehicle
and any possible obstacle using four ultra-
sonic sensors located on the rear bumper.
The measuring range of the sensors starts
approximately and depending on the nature
of the obstacle at a distance of:
●
side of the rear bumper: 0.6 m
●
middle of the rear bumper: 1.6 m
Activation
The system is activated by engagement of
the reverse gear. A brief audible warning con-
firms the activation and correct function of
the system.
Reverse gear
The distance warning will begin as soon as
an obstacle is detected by the system. The
frequency of the bleeps emitted by the sys-
tem will increase rapidly as the vehicle ap-
proaches the obstacle. After a distance lower
than approximately 30 cm, a continuous sig-
nal sounds (stop signal). The driver should
not reverse any further.
Models with a factory-fitted towing bracket:
when the vehicle is less than 0.35 m away
the warning tone will sound continuously.
The driver should then not reverse any fur-
ther.
The warning tone volume decreases by 30%
3 seconds after it the system is triggered if
the detected obstacle stays at a constant dis-
tance from the vehicle.
Provided that it is not in continuous mode,
the tone on the parking aid system stops
when it detects a wall parallel to the vehicle.
Trailer towing
For vehicles factory-fitted with a towing bar,
the parking aid system will not be activated
by the engagement of the reverse gear when
pulling a trailer, as the trailer's electric con-
nector will be plugged into the vehicle.
Possible faults
If a continuous beep sounds for some sec-
onds when the reverse gear is engaged, this
indicates that there is a fault in the parking
aid system. If the fault continues until the ig-
nition is turned off, the audible warning of
the fault will not be emitted every time the
system is reactivated (by engaging the re-
verse gear). Thus, the system ready indica-
tion will not sound either. Have the fault re-
paired by technical services as soon as possi-
ble.
If there is no ready signal or no acoustic
warning signal, then the parking aid loud-
speaker is faulty and may not warn of obsta-
cles. To ensure that the system works proper-
ly, the sensors must be kept clean and free of
ice and snow.
CAUTION
●
Please note that low obstacles detected by
the system may no longer be registered by
the sensors as the car moves closer, so the
system will not give any further warning. Cer-
tain kinds of obstacles, such as wire fences,
chains, thin posts or trailer draw bars, high
kerbs or painted railings, etc., may not al-
ways be detected by the system, so there is a
risk of damaging the vehicle in such cases.
●
In some case, obstacles with edges and
bumps may not be detected immediately by
the system due to their geometry. Take spe-
cial care with this type of obstacle (corners,
rectangular objects, etc.), as they can cause
damage to the vehicle.
●
Be especially careful when manoeuvring in-
to a corner between two perpendicular walls.
Pay special attention to the side distance
from the wall using the mirrors.
●
The parking aid system does not replace
use of the mirrors for manoeuvres.
●
External ultra-sonic sources (pneumatic
drills, construction machinery, other vehicles
with PDC) may interfere with the operation of
the system.
»
147
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
●
Periodic cleaning of the sensors, take care
not to damage or scratch them. When clean-
ing with high pressure washers or steam
cleaners, the sensors should be sprayed for
only a very short period and from a distance
of more than 10 cm.
●
If the licence plate (especially the front
one) is bent in such a way that it noticeably
juts out from the bumper, false alarms may
sound for the area in front of the vehicle.
Rear parking aid with navigator view
Fig. 145 Parking aid view on the navigation
screen.
When the parking aid system has been acti-
vated, the navigation view screen is also si-
multaneously activated (if one of the doors or
the rear lid is open, it must be closed before
the on-screen information can be viewed).
The distance of separation from the obstacle
can be estimated ››› Fig. 145 with the help of
the segments around the vehicle. The white
segments represent obstacles located be-
tween 30 cm and 160 cm from the vehicle’s
rear. As the vehicle approaches an obstacle,
the segments are displayed closer to the ve-
hicle. The red segments represent obstacles
located at less than 30 cm from the front
bumper. At this point the driver should not
reverse any further.
Front parking aid
Description
The acoustic parking aid system measures
the distance between the vehicle and any
possible obstacle using 8 ultrasonic sensors
(4 of which are located on the rear bumper
and 4 of which are located on the front
bumper).
The measuring range of the sensors starts
approximately and depending on the nature
of the obstacle at a distance of:
●
side of the front bumper: 0.6 m
●
middle of the front bumper: 1.2 m
●
side of the rear bumper: 0.6 m
●
middle of the rear bumper: 1.6 m
Activation
The system may be activated in the following
ways:
●
Engage the reverse gear (a brief, sharp
acoustic signal confirms activation and the
correct operation of the system) or
●
Push the central console button (a brief
confirmation signal will sound and the but-
ton’s LED will light up).
Disconnection
The system may be deactivated in the follow-
ing ways:
●
Drive forwards at more than approx.
10 km/h (6 mph) or
●
Press the button, or
●
Switch the ignition off.
Manoeuvres
The distance warning will begin as soon as
an obstacle is detected in the system's field
of detection (front and rear). The frequency of
the bleeps emitted by the system will in-
crease rapidly as the vehicle approaches the
obstacle. Two speakers, one in the front and
one in the rear, indicate the location of the
obstacle ( front and rear, respectively).
After a distance lower than approximately 30
cm, a continuous signal sounds (stop signal).
At this point the driver should halt the vehi-
cle.
Models with a factory-fitted towing bracket:
when the vehicle is less than 0.35 m away
the warning tone will sound continuously.
148
Driver assistance systems
The driver should then not reverse any fur-
ther.
The warning tone volume decreases by 30%
3 seconds after it is triggered if the detected
obstacle stays at a constant distance from
the vehicle.
Provided that it is not in continuous mode,
the tone on the parking aid system stops
when it detects a wall parallel to the vehicle.
Trailer towing
For vehicles factory-fitted with a towing bar,
the parking aid system will not be activated
by the engagement of the reverse gear when
pulling a trailer, as the trailer's electric con-
nector will be plugged into the vehicle.
Possible faults
If a continuous, sharp beep sounds for a few
seconds, there is a fault in the parking aid
system.
If the fault continues until the ignition is
turned off, the audible warning of the fault
will not be emitted every time the system is
reactivated (by engaging the reverse gear or
pressing the button). Thus, the system
ready indication will not sound either. Have
the fault repaired by technical services as
soon as possible.
If there is no ready signal or no acoustic
warning signal, then the parking aid loud-
speaker is faulty and may not warn of obsta-
cles. To ensure that the system works proper-
ly, the sensors must be kept clean and free of
ice and snow.
CAUTION
●
Please note that low obstacles detected by
the system may no longer be registered by
the sensors as the car moves closer, so the
system will not give any further warning. Cer-
tain kinds of obstacles, such as wire fences,
chains, thin posts or trailer draw bars, high
kerbs or painted railings, etc., may not al-
ways be detected by the system, so there is a
risk of damaging the vehicle in such cases.
●
In some cases, obstacles with uniform
edges and bumps may not be detected imme-
diately by the system due to their geometry.
Take special care with this type of obstacle
(corners, rectangular objects, etc.), as they
can cause damage to the vehicle.
●
Be especially careful when manoeuvring in-
to a corner between two perpendicular walls.
Pay special attention to the side distance
from the wall using the mirrors.
●
The parking aid system does not replace
use of the mirrors for manoeuvres.
●
External ultra-sonic sources (e.g. pneumat-
ic drills, construction machinery or other ve-
hicles equipped with PND) may interfere with
the operation of the system.
●
Periodic cleaning of the sensors, take care
not to damage or scratch them. When clean-
ing with high pressure washers or steam
cleaners, the sensors should be sprayed for
only a very short period and from a distance
of more than 10 cm.
●
If the licence plate (especially the front
one) is bent in such a way that it noticeably
juts out from the bumper, false alarms may
sound for the area in front of the vehicle.
Front parking aid with navigator view
Fig. 146 Parking aid view on the navigation
screen.
When the parking aid system has been acti-
vated, the navigation view screen is also si-
multaneously activated (if one of the doors or
the rear lid is open, it must be closed before
the on-screen information can be viewed).
The distance of separation from the obstacle
can be estimated ››› Fig. 146 with the help of
the segments around the vehicle. At the
front, the white segments indicate obstacles
located between 30 cm and 120 cm from the
»
149
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
front of the vehicle. At the rear, these indi-
cate obstacles located between 30 cm and
160 cm from the vehicle’s rear. As the vehicle
approaches an obstacle, the segments are
displayed closer to the vehicle. The red seg-
ments represent obstacles located at less
than 30 cm from the bumper. At this point
the driver should not move forward/reverse
any further.
Cruise speed* (cruise control
system - CCS)
Description
The CCS is able to maintain the set speed in
the range from approx. 30 km/h (19 mph) to
180 km/h (112 mph).
Once the speed setting has been saved, you
may take your foot off the accelerator.
WARNING
It could be dangerous to use the cruise con-
trol system if it is not possible to drive at con-
stant speed.
●
Do not use the cruise control system when
driving in dense traffic, on roads with lots of
bends or on roads with poor conditions (with
ice, slippery surfaces, loose grit or gravel), as
this could cause an accident.
●
Always switch the cruise control system off
after using it in order to avoid involuntary
use.
●
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is
too high for the current road, traffic or weath-
er conditions. Risk of accident.
Note
The cruise control cannot maintain a constant
speed when descending downhill. It will in-
crease due to its own weight. Use the foot
brake to slow the vehicle.
Switching the cruise control system
on and off
Fig. 147 Turn signal and main beam head-
light lever: switch and rocker switch for the
cruise control.
Switching on the cruise control system
–
Move the control ››› Fig. 147
A
to the left
to
ON.
Sw
it
ching off the cruise control system
–
Move the control
A
to the right to OFF or
turn the ignition off when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
When the cruise control is on and a speed is
programmed, the indicator
on the instru-
ment
panel* is lit.
If the cruise control system is switched off,
the symbol is switched off. The system will
also be switched off fully when the 1st gear
is engaged.*
Setting speed*
Fig. 148 Turn signal and main beam head-
light lever: switch and rocker switch for the
cruise control.
150
Driver assistance systems
–
Press the lower part SET of the rocker
switch ››› Fig. 148
B
once briefly when you
have reached the speed you wish to set.
When you release the rocker switch, the cur-
rent speed is set and held constant.
Adjusting set speed*
The speed can be altered without touching
the accelerator or the brake.
Setting a higher speed
–
Press the upper part RES of the rocker
switch ››› Fig. 148
B
to increase the speed.
The vehicle will continue to accelerate as
long as you keep the rocker switch pressed.
When you release the switch, the new
speed is stored.
Setting a lower speed
–
Press the lower part of the rocker switch
SET–
›››
Fig. 148
B
to reduce the speed.
The vehicle will automatically reduce its
speed for as long as you keep the switch
pressed. When you release the switch, the
new speed is stored.
When you increase speed with the accelera-
tor and then release the pedal, the system
will automatically restore the set speed. This
will not be the case, however, if the vehicle
speed exceeds the stored speed by more
than 10 km/h (6 mph) for longer than 5 mi-
nutes. The speed will have to be stored
again.
Cruise control is switched off if you reduce
speed by depressing the brake pedal. Reacti-
vate the control by pressing once on the up-
per part of the rocker switch RES+ ››› Fig. 148
B
.
Switching off cruise control
temporarily*
Fig. 149 Turn signal and main beam head-
light lever: switch and rocker switch for the
cruise control.
The cruise control system will be switched off
in the following situations:
●
if the brake pedal is depressed,
●
if the clutch pedal is depressed,
●
if the vehicle is accelerated to over
180 km/h (112 mph),
●
when the lever
A
is moved in the direction
of OFF without fully being engaged.
To resume cruise control, release the brake or
clutch pedal or reduce the vehicle speed to
less than 180 km/h (112 mph) and press
once on the upper part of the rocker switch
RES ››› Fig. 149
B
.
Completely switching off the system
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
The system
is completely turned off b
y
mov-
ing the control
A
››› Fig. 149
all the way to
the right
h
and side (OFF engaged), or when
the vehicle is stationary, switching off the ig-
nition.
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox
To completely disengage the system, the se-
lector lever must be placed in one of the fol-
lowing positions: P, N, R or 1 or with the vehi-
cle stopped and the ignition turned off.
151
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
Towing bracket device
Trailer towing
What do you need to bear in mind
when towing a trailer?
Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer
when fitted with the correct equipment.
If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted tow-
ing br
acket it will already have the necessary
technical modifications and meet the statuto-
ry requirements for towing a trailer. If you
wish to retrofit a towing bracket, consult
›
››
page 153.
Connectors
Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector
for the electrical connection between the
trailer and the vehicle.
If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to
use an adapter cable. It is available at any
Technical Service.
Trailer weight/drawbar load
Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If
you do not load the trailer up to the maxi-
mum permitted trailer weight, you can then
climb correspondingly steeper slopes.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only
applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above
sea level. With increasing altitude the engine
power and therefore the vehicle climbing
ability are impaired because of the reduced
air density. The maximum trailer weight has
to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the
vehicle and trailer combination must be re-
duced by 10% for every further 1000 m (or
part thereof). The gross combination weight
is the actual weight of the laden vehicle plus
the actual weight of the laden trailer. When
possible, operate the trailer with the maxi-
mum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint
of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the
specified limit.
The figures for trailer weights and drawbar
loads that are given on the data plate of the
towing bracket are for certification purposes
only. The correct figures for your specific
model, which may be lower than these fig-
ures for the towing bracket, are given in the
vehicle documentation or in ››› chapter Tech-
nical Data.
Distributing the load
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy
objects are as near to the axle as possible.
Loads carried in the trailer must be secured
to prevent them moving.
Tyre pressure
Set tyre pressure to the maximum permissi-
ble pressure shown on the sticker on the in-
side of the fuel tank flap. Set the tyre pres-
sure of the trailer tyres in accordance with the
trailer manufacturer's recommendations.
Exterior mirrors
Check whether you can see enough of the
road behind the trailer with the standard rear
vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you
should have additional exterior mirrors fitted.
Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on
hinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrors
to give sufficient vision to the rear.
WARNING
Never transport people in a trailer. This could
result in fatal accidents.
Note
●
Towing a trailer places additional demands
on the vehicle. We recommend additional
services between the normal inspection inter-
vals if the vehicle is used frequently for tow-
ing a trailer.
●
Find out whether special regulations apply
to towing a trailer in your country.
Ball coupling of towing bracket*
The ball coupling is provided with instruc-
tions on fitting and removing the ball cou-
pling of the towing bracket.
152
Towing bracket device
WARNING
The towing bracket ball coupling must be
stored securely in the luggage compartment
to prevent them being flung through the vehi-
cle and causing injury.
Note
●
By law, the ball coupling must be removed
if a trailer is not being towed if it obscures
the number plate.
Driving tips
Driving with a trailer always requires extra
care.
Weight distribution
The weight distribution of a loaded trailer
with an unladen vehicle is very unfavourable.
However, if this cannot be avoided, drive ex-
tra slowly to allow for the unbalanced weight
distribution.
Speed
The stability of the vehicle and trailer is re-
duced with increasing speed. For this reason,
it is advisable not to drive at the maximum
permissible speed in an unfavourable road,
weather or wind conditions. This applies es-
pecially when driving downhill.
You should always reduce speed immediately
if the trailer shows the slightest sign of snak-
ing
. Never try to stop the “snaking” by in-
c
r
easing speed.
Always brake in due course. If the trailer has
an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at
first and then, firmly. This will prevent the
jerking that can be caused by locking of trail-
er wheels. Select a low gear in due course
before going down a steep downhill. This en-
ables you to use the engine braking to slow
down the vehicle.
Reheating
At very high temperatures and during pro-
longed slopes, driving with a low gear and
high engine speed; always monitor whether
the excessive coolant temperature gauge is
activated ››› page 63.
Electronic Stability Control*
The ESC* system helps to stabilise the trailer
in case of skidding or rocking.
Fitting a towing bracket*
Fig. 150 IBIZA/IBIZA SC: attachment points
for towing bracket.
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the ve-
hicle is purchased, this must be completed
according to the instructions of the towing
bracket manufacturer.
»
153
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Operation
The attachment points
A
for the towing
bracket are underneath the vehicle.
The distance between the centre of the ball
coupling and the ground should never be
lower than the indicated value, even with a
fully loaded vehicle and including the maxi-
mum drawbar load.
Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:
IBIZA IBIZA SC IBIZA ST
B
65 mm (minimum)
C
350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)
D
959 mm
E
438 mm 379 mm
F
209 mm 386 mm
Fitting a towing bracket
●
Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort
for the vehicle. Therefore, before fitting a
towing bracket, please contact a Technical
Service to check whether your cooling system
needs modification.
●
The legal requirements in your country
must be observed (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-
rate control lamp).
●
Certain vehicle components, for example
the rear bumper, must be removed and rein-
stalled. The towing bracket securing bolts
must be tightened using a torque wrench,
and a power socket must be connected to the
vehicle electrical system. This requires speci-
alised knowledge and tools.
●
Figures in the illustration show the eleva-
tion value and the attachment points which
must be considered if you are retrofitting a
towing bracket.
WARNING
The towing brackets should be fitted at a spe-
cialised workshop.
●
If the towing bracket is incorrectly instal-
led, there is a serious danger of accident.
●
For your own safety, please observe the tow
bracket manufacturer's instructions.
CAUTION
●
If the power socket is incorrectly installed,
this could cause damage to the vehicle elec-
trical system.
Note
●
SEAT recommends that the towing hooks
be fitted at a specialised workshop. In certain
versions this may entail fitting a heat insulat-
ing plate, which is why it is recommended
that you go to a SEAT Dealer. In the event that
the plate is not installed correctly, SEAT is ex-
empt from any liability.
●
Due to the specific design of the exhaust,
the fitting of a conventional towing hook is
not recommended for some sportier versions.
Please consult your Technical Service.
154
Care and maintenance
Advice
Care and maintenance
Accessories and modifications
to the vehicle
Accessories, replacement of parts and
modifications
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high
standard of active and passive safety.
Before purchasing accessories and parts,
and before making technical changes to your
vehicle, we recommend that you consult your
Technical Service.
SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide
you with the latest information about the
use, legal requirements and recommenda-
tions from the manufacturer regarding acces-
sories and spare parts.
We recommend you use only SEAT Approved
Accessories
®
and
SEAT Approved Spare
P
ar
ts
®
. This way, SEAT can guarantee that
the product in question is suitable, reliable
and safe. SEAT Technical Services have the
necessary experience and facilities to ensure
that parts are correctly and professionally in-
stalled.
Despite a continuous observation of the mar-
ket, SEAT is not able to assess the reliability,
safety and suitability of parts that SEAT has
not approved. For this reason, SEAT cannot
assume responsibility for any non-genuine
parts used, even if these parts have been ap-
proved by an official testing agency or are
covered by an official approval certificate.
Any retro-fitted equipment which has a direct
impact on the driver's control of the vehicle,
such as a cruise control system or electroni-
cally-controlled suspension, must be ap-
proved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and
bear the e mark (the European Union's au-
thorisation symbol).
If any additional electrical devices are fitted
which do not serve to control the vehicle it-
self, such as refrigerator boxes, laptops or
ventilator fans, they must bear the CE mark
(European Union manufacturer conformity
declaration).
WARNING
Accessories, for example telephone holders
or cup holders, should never be fitted on the
covers, or within the working range, of the
airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger of in-
jury if the airbag is triggered in an accident.
Technical modifications
Modifications must always be carried out ac-
cording to our specifications. Unauthorised
modifications to the electronic components
or software in the vehicle may cause malfunc-
tions. Due to the way the electronic compo-
nents are linked together in networks, other
indirect systems may be affected by the
faults. This can seriously impair safety, lead
to excessive wear of components, and also
invalidate your vehicle registration docu-
ments.
SEAT Technical Services cannot be held liable
for any damage caused by modifications
and/or work incorrectly performed. For this
reason, we recommend having all work per-
formed by a SEAT Technical Service using
SEAT
®
Original Spare Parts.
WARNING
Any type of work or modification performed
incorrectly on your vehicle can lead to mal-
functions and can cause accidents.
Roof aerial*
The vehicle can be fitted with a foldable* and
anti-theft* roof aerial which can be folded
backwards, for example when going through
an automatic car wash.
»
155
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
To fold
Unscrew the aerial rod, tilting it backwards
into a horizontal position and then screw in
again.
To return to working position
Continue in the reverse order to the previous
instruction.
CAUTION
If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, be-
fore entering the tunnel, put the aerial down
parallel to the roof and do not tighten to
avoid damage.
Mobile phones and two-way radios
SEAT has approved for your vehicle the use of
mobile telephones and two-way radios pro-
viding under the following conditions:
●
The external aerial should be correctly in-
stalled.
●
The transmitting power should be a maxi-
mum 10 watts.
The optimal reach of the equipment is only
achieved with an external aerial.
First consult your Technical Service if you
wish to use a mobile telephone or a two-way
radio with a transmitting power output in ex-
cess of 10 watts. Here you will receive infor-
mation concerning the technical possibilities
for retrofitting this equipment.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios
should be only fitted by a specialised work-
shop, for example a SEAT dealership.
WARNING
●
Always concentrate primarily on driving. If
you are distracted while driving you could
have an accident.
●
Never attach the telephone mountings to
the surfaces covering the airbag units or
within the range of the airbags. There is a
high danger of injury if the airbag is trig-
gered.
●
Using your mobile telephones or two-way
radios in the vehicle without an external aer-
ial, electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle
could exceed authorised limits. This also may
occur to external aerials that have not been
correctly installed.
CAUTION
Failure to consider the above-mentioned con-
ditions could cause the electronics to mal-
function. The most common causes of faults
are:
●
no external aerial,
●
external aerial incorrectly installed,
●
transmitting power output in excess of 10
watts.
Note
Please observe the operating instructions of
your mobile telephone/two-way radio.
Care and cleaning
General notes
Vehicle maintenance
Regular care and washing help to maintain
the value of the vehicle. This may also be one
of the requirements for acknowledging war-
ranty claims in the event of bodywork corro-
sion or paint defects.
The best way to protect your vehicle against
the harmful effects of the environment is
through correct maintenance and frequent
washing. The longer substances such as in-
sect remains, bird droppings, resinous tree
sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or
road salt and other aggressive materials re-
main on the vehicle, the more damage they
do to the paintwork. High temperatures, for
instance in strong sunlight, further intensify
the corrosive effect.
After winter, a period when salt is put on the
roads, it is important to have the underside
of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
156
Care and maintenance
Products for vehicle maintenance
Car-care products are available in your Tech-
nical Services. Keep the product instructions
until you have used them up.
WARNING
●
Car-care products can be toxic. Because of
this, they must always be kept closed in their
original container. Keep them out of the reach
of children. Failure to comply could result in
poisoning.
●
Always read and observe the instructions
and warnings on the package before using
car-care products. Improper use could cause
health problems or damage the vehicle. The
use of certain products may produce noxious
vapours; they should be used in well ventila-
ted areas.
●
Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail
varnish remover or other volatile fluids.
These are toxic and highly flammable. Risk of
fire and explosion.
●
Before washing your vehicle, or carrying
out any maintenance, switch the engine off,
apply the handbrake firmly and remove the
key from the ignition.
CAUTION
Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if
the surface of the vehicle is dry. Never use a
dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes.
This could damage the paintwork or the win-
dows of your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust
with plenty of water.
For the sake of the environment
●
When purchasing products for your vehicle
maintenance, select the ones which are not
harmful to the environment.
●
The waste from car-care products should
not be disposed of with ordinary household
waste. Observe the disposal information on
the package.
Care of the vehicle exterior
Automatic car washing tunnel
The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the
vehicle can normally be washed without
problems in an automatic car wash tunnel.
However, the paintwork wear depends to a
large extent on the kind of the car wash tun-
nel, the brushes used, its water filtering and
the type of cleaning and preservative prod-
ucts.
Before going through a car wash, be sure to
take the usual precautions such as closing
the windows and sunroof. There is nothing to
note apart from that.
If the vehicle has special accessories such as
spoilers or a roof rack or two-way radio aerial,
etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash
tunnel operator first.
After washing, the brakes could take some
time to respond as the brake discs and pads
could be wet, or even frozen in winter. “Dry”
the brakes by braking several times.
WARNING
Water, ice and salt on the brake system can
reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-
dent.
CAUTION
Before putting the vehicle through the car
wash, do not tighten the aerial if it is folded
because it can be damaged.
Washing by hand
Vehicle washing
–
First soften the dirt and rinse it off with wa-
ter.
–
Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with
a soft sponge, a glove or a brush. Use very
light pressure.
–
Rinse the sponge or glove often with clean
water.
–
Special car shampoo should only be used
for very stubborn dirt.
–
Leave the wheels, sill panels etc. until last,
using a different sponge or glove.
»
157
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
–
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water.
–
Dry the vehicle surface gently with a cha-
mois leather.
–
In
cold temperature
, dry the rubber seals
and their s
urfaces to prevent them from
freezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber
seals.
After washing the vehicle
–
After washing, avoid sudden and sharp
braking. “Dry” the brakes by braking sever-
al times.
WARNING
●
Wash your vehicle with the ignition switch-
ed off.
●
Protect your hands and arms from cuts on
sharp metal edges when cleaning the under-
body, the inside of the wheel housings etc.
Risk of injury.
●
Water, ice and salt on the brake system can
reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-
dent.
CAUTION
●
Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehi-
cle surface is dry. Never use a dry cloth or
sponge for cleaning purposes. This could
scratch the paintwork or glass on your vehi-
cle.
●
Washing the vehicle in low temperatures:
when washing the vehicle with a hose, do not
direct water into the lock cylinders or the
gaps around the doors, rear lid, or sunroof.
Risk of freezing.
For the sake of the environment
To protect the environment, the vehicle
should be washed only in specially provided
wash bays, to prevent toxic, oil-laden waste
water from entering the sewer system. In
some places, washing vehicles outside wash
bays is prohibited.
Note
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Washing the vehicle with a high
pressure cleaner
Be particularly careful when using a high
pressure cleaner!
–
Always observe the instructions for the
high-pressure cleaner, particularly those
concerning the
pressure and the spraying
di
s
tance.
–
Increase the spraying distance for soft ma-
terials and painted bumpers.
–
Do not use a high pressure cleaner to re-
move ice or snow from windows
››› page 159.
–
Never use concentrated jet nozzles (“rotat-
ing jets”) ›››
.
–
After washing, avoid sudden and sharp
braking. “Dry” the brakes by braking sever-
al times ››› page 126
.
WARNING
●
Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet
(“rotating nozzle”). Even at large spraying
distances and short cleaning times, damage
can occur to the tyres. This may cause an ac-
cident.
●
Water, ice and salt on the brake system can
reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-
dent.
CAUTION
●
Do not use water hotter than +60 °C
(+140 °F). This could damage the vehicle.
●
To avoid damage to the vehicle, keep a suf-
ficient distance from sensitive materials such
as flexible hoses, plastic, soundproofing ma-
terial, etc. This also applies to bumpers pain-
ted in the colour of the bodywork. The closer
the nozzle is to the surface, the greater the
wear on the material.
158
Care and maintenance
Vehicle paint maintenance
Regular waxing protects the paintwork.
You need to apply wax to your vehicle if water
does not form small drops and run off the
paintwork when it is clean.
Good quality har
d wax products are available
at your Technical Service.
Regular wax applications help to protect the
paintwork from environmental contaminants
››› page 156. It is also effective in protecting
against minor scratches.
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the
vehicle washing tunnel, it is advisable to pro-
tect the paint with a hard wax coating at least
twice a year.
Polishing the paintwork
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has
lost its shine, and the gloss cannot be
brought back by applying wax. Polishing
products can be purchased in your Technical
Service.
The vehicle must be waxed after polishing if
the polish used does not contain wax com-
pounds to seal the paint
›››
page 159, Vehicle
paint maintenance.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the paintwork:
●
Do not use polishes and hard wax on pain-
ted parts with a matt finish or on plastic
parts.
●
Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or
dusty environment.
Caring for plastic parts
If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts,
clean them with approved solvent-free plas-
tic cleaning and care products.
CAUTION
●
The use of liquid air freshener directly over
the air vents of the vehicle may damage plas-
tic parts if the liquid is accidentally spilled.
●
Cleaning products which contain solvents
will damage the material.
Cleaning windows and exterior
mirrors
Cleaning windows
–
Moisten the windows with commercially
available, alcohol based glass cleaner.
–
Dry the windows with a clean chamois
leather or a lint-free cloth.
Removing snow
–
Use a small brush to remove snow from the
windows and mirrors.
Removing ice
–
Use a de-icer spray.
Use a clean cloth or chamois leather to dry
the windows. The chamois leathers used on
painted surfaces are not suitable to clean
windows because they are soiled with wax
deposits which could smear the windows.
If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove
ice. If you use an ice scraper, push it in one
direction only without swinging it.
Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to
clean rubber, oil, grease and silicone depos-
its off.
Wax deposits can only be removed with a
special cleaner available at your Technical
Service. Wax deposits on the windscreen
could cause the wiper blades to judder. Add-
ing a window cleaner that dissolves wax to
the windscreen washer fluid prevents wiper
blades from juddering, but wax deposits are
not removed.
CAUTION
●
Never use warm or hot water to remove
snow and ice from windows and mirrors. This
could cause the glass to crack!
»
159
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
●
The heating element for the rear window is
located on the inner side of the window. To
prevent damage, do not put stickers over the
heating elements on the inside of the win-
dow.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
Clean wiper blades improve visibility.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt
from the windscreen wiper blades.
2. Use window cleaner to clean the wind-
screen wiper blades. Use a sponge or a
cloth to remove stubborn dirt.
Rubber seals maintenance
If rubber seals are well looked after, they will
not freeze so quickly.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt
from the rubber seals.
2. Apply a specialist care product to the rub-
ber seals.
The rubber strips on the doors, windows, etc.
will remain pliable and last longer if they are
treated with a suitable rubber care product
from time to time (for example silicone
spray).
Caring for rubber seals will also prevent pre-
mature ageing and leaks. The doors will be
easier to open. If rubber seals are well looked
after, they will not freeze so quickly in winter.
Door lock cylinders
The door lock cylinders can freeze up in win-
ter.
To de-ice the lock cylinders you should only
use spray with lubricating and anti-corrosive
properties.
Cleaning chrome parts
1. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth.
2. Polish chrome parts with a soft, dry cloth.
If this does not provide satisfying results, use
a specialist chrome cleaning product.
Chrome cleaning products will remove stains
from the surface.
CAUTION
To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:
●
Never use an abrasive cleaning product on
chrome.
●
Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a
sandy or dusty environment.
Steel wheel rims
–
Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a
separate sponge.
Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake
dust. Any damage to the paint on steel wheel
rims should be repaired before starting to
rust.
WARNING
●
Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even
at large spraying distances and short clean-
ing times, damage can occur to the tyres.
This may cause an accident.
●
Water, ice and salt on the brake system can
reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-
dent. Directly after washing, avoid sudden
and sharp braking. “Dry” the brakes by brak-
ing several times ››› page 126, Braking ca-
pacity and braking distance.
Alloy wheel rims
Every two weeks
–
Wash salt and brake dust from alloy
wheels.
–
Use an acid free detergent to clean the
wheel rims.
Every 3 months
–
Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.
160
Care and maintenance
Alloy wheels require regular attention to pre-
serve their appearance. If road salt and brake
dust are not often removed, the aluminium
finish will be impaired.
Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy
wheel rims.
Car polish or other abrasive agents should
not be used for maintaining the rims. If the
protective coating is damaged, e.g. by flying
stones, the damaged area should be re-
paired immediately.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Steel
wheel rims on page 160.
Underbody protection
The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it
from chemical and mechanical damage.
The protective coating can be damaged when
driving. We recommend that you check the
protective coating under the body and on the
running gear, and retouch it if necessary, be-
fore and after the winter season.
We recommend that you go to your Technical
Service to carry out repair work and addition-
al anti-corrosion work.
WARNING
Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion
coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con-
verter or the heat shields on the exhaust sys-
tem. The heat of the exhaust system or the
engine could cause them to ignite. Risk of
fire.
Cleaning the engine compartment
Take special care when cleaning the engine
compartment.
Anti-corrosion treatment
The engine compartment and the surface of
the power unit are given anti-corrosion treat-
ment at the factory.
Good corrosion protection is particularly im-
portant in winter when the vehicle is fre-
quently driven on salted roads. To prevent
the salt corroding the vehicle, the entire en-
gine compartment should be thoroughly
cleaned before and after winter.
Technical Services have the proper products
for cleaning and preservation as well as the
necessary workshop equipment. For this rea-
son, we recommend having this work per-
formed by them.
The anti-corrosion protection is usually re-
moved if the engine compartment is cleaned
with grease removing solutions, or if you
have the engine cleaned. On commissioning
this work, ensure that all surfaces, seams,
joints and components in the engine com-
partment are given anti-corrosion treatment.
WARNING
●
When working in the engine compartment,
always observe the safety warnings
››› page 166.
●
Bef
ore opening the bonnet, switch the en-
gine off, apply the handbrake firmly and al-
ways remove the key from the ignition.
●
Allow the engine to cool before you clean
the engine compartment.
●
Do not clean, for example, the vehicle un-
derbody, wheel arches or wheel trims without
protecting your hands and arms. You may cut
yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. Failure
to comply could result in injury.
●
Moisture, ice and salt on the brake system
may affect braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-
dent. Directly after washing, avoid sudden
and sharp braking.
●
Never touch the radiator fan. It is tempera-
ture-controlled and could start automatically,
even when the key is removed from the igni-
tion!
For the sake of the environment
Fuel, grease and oil deposits can be removed
when the engine is washed. The polluted wa-
ter must be cleaned in an oil separator. For
this reason, engine washing should be
»
161
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
carried out only by a specialised workshop or
a petrol station.
Caring for the vehicle interior
Cleaning plastic parts and the
instrument panel
–
Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic
parts and the dash panel.
–
If this does not provide satisfactory results,
use a special solvent-free plastic cleaning
product.
WARNING
Never clean the dash panel and the airbag
module surface with cleaners containing sol-
vents. Solvents cause the surface to become
porous. If the airbag triggered, plastic parts
could become detached and cause injuries.
CAUTION
Cleaning products which contain solvents will
damage the material.
Wooden trim cleaning*
–
Clean the wooden trim with a water-mois-
tened clean cloth.
–
If this does not provide satisfactory results,
use a
gentle
soap solution.
CAUTION
Cleaning products which contain solvents will
damage the material.
Cloth seat covers and fabric trim
cleaning
Cloth seat covers and fabric trim on the
doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned with a
special interior cleaner or with dry foam and
a soft brush.
Cleaning the radio and climate
controls
To clean the radio and/or climate controls,
use a soft damp cloth. For more resistant dirt,
a neutral soap solution may be used.
Leather cleaning*
Normal cleaning
–
Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with wa-
ter and wipe over the leather surfaces.
Cleaning stubborn stains
–
More stubborn dirt can be removed using a
mild soap solution (pure liquid soap; two
tablespoons diluted in one litre of water)
and a cloth.
–
Do not let the water soak through the leath-
er or soak into the seams.
–
Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
Leather maintenance
–
The leather should be treated twice a year
with a special leather-care product, availa-
ble at Technical Services.
–
Apply these products very sparingly.
–
Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
SEAT does everything possible to preserve
the genuine qualities of this natural product.
Due to the natural properties of the specially
selected hides employed, the finished leath-
er has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt,
etc. so a degree of care is required in every-
day use and when looking after the leather.
Dust and grit in the pores and seams can
scratch and damage the surface. If the vehi-
cle is under solar radiation for long periods,
the leather should be protected to prevent it
from fading. However, slight colour variations
in high-quality natural leather are normal.
162
Checking and refilling levels
CAUTION
●
Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe
cream, spot removers or similar products on
leather.
●
To avoid damage, stubborn stains should
be removed by a specialised workshop.
Seat belt cleaning
A dirty belt may not work properly. Check all
seat belts regularly and keep them clean.
Seat belts cleaning
–
Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll
it.
–
Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle
soap
so
lution.
–
A
llow it to dry.
–
Do not roll the seat belt up until it is dry.
If large stains form on the belts, the automat-
ic belt retractor will not work correctly.
WARNING
●
Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the
seat belts, as this can impair the strength of
the webbing. Ensure that seat belts do not
come into contact with corrosive fluids.
●
Check the condition of the seat belts at reg-
ular intervals. If you notice that the belt web-
bing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle
of any of the belts is damaged, the belt must
be replaced by a specialised workshop.
●
Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat
belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-
moved or modified in any way.
CAUTION
After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry com-
pletely before rolling them up. Otherwise, the
belt retractors could become damaged.
Checking and refilling levels
Fuel
Refuelling
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 23
The tank flap is released manually and is lo-
cated at the rear of the vehicle on the right.
The tank holds approximately 45 litres.
Opening the fuel tank cap
–
Lift the lid.
–
Hold the cap firmly with one hand, then in-
sert the key into the lock and rotate 180° to
the left.
–
Unscrew the cap, turning it anticlockwise.
Closing the fuel tank cap
–
Screw the tank cap to the right until it
“clicks”.
–
Turn the key in the lock, without releasing
the cap, clockwise through 180°.
–
Remove the key and close the flap until it
clicks into place. The tank cap is secured
with an anti-loss attachment
If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor-
rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as the
»
163
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
tank is “full”. Never attempt to fill beyond
this point, as this will fill the expansion
chamber. Fuel may leak out if ambient condi-
tions are warm.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-
en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank
flap.
WARNING
●
Fuel is highly flammable and can cause se-
rious burns and other injuries.
–
Never smoke or come into contact with
sparks when filling the fuel tank of the
vehicle or a spare fuel canister with fuel.
This is an explosion hazard.
–
Follow legal requirements for the use of
spare fuel canisters.
–
For safety reasons we do not recommend
carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi-
cle. The canister could be damaged in an
accident and leak.
●
If, in exceptional circumstances, you have
to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe
the following:
–
Never fill the spare fuel canister inside
the vehicle or on it. An electrostatic
charge could build up during filling, caus-
ing the fuel fumes to ignite. This could
cause an explosion. Always place the
canister on the ground to fill it.
–
Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of
the canister as far as possible.
–
If the spare fuel canister is made of met-
al, the filling nozzle must be in contact
with the canister during filling. This
helps prevent an electrostatic charge
building up.
–
Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the
luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are
explosive. Danger of death.
CAUTION
●
Fuel spills should be removed from the
paintwork immediately.
●
Never run the tank completely dry. Irregular
fuel supply can cause misfiring. As a result,
unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic convert-
er and cause damage.
●
When filling the fuel tank after having run it
completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel en-
gine the ignition must be switched on for at
least 30 seconds before starting the engine.
Subsequently, when you start the engine it
may take longer than normal to start firing
(up to one minute). This is due to the fact that
the fuel system has to purge itself of air be-
fore starting.
For the sake of the environment
Do not try to put in more fuel after the auto-
matic filler nozzle has switched off; this may
cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.
Petrol
Petrol types
The correct petrol types are listed on a sticker
inside the fuel tank flap.
Only unleaded petrol conforming to standard
DIN EN 228 may be used for vehicles with
cat
alytic converters (EN = “European Stand-
ard”).
Types of petrol differ from each other accord-
ing to the octane rating, for example: 91, 95,
98 RON (RON = “R
esearch Octane Number”,
unit for determining the knock resistance of
petrol). You may use petrol with a higher oc-
tane number than the one recommended for
your engine. However, this has no advantage
in terms of fuel consumption and engine
power.
CAUTION
●
Even one tankful of leaded fuel would per-
manently impair the efficiency of the catalyt-
ic converter.
●
High engine speed and full throttle can
damage the engine when using petrol with an
octane rating lower than the correct grade for
the engine.
164
Checking and refilling levels
For the sake of the environment
Just one full tank of leaded fuel would seri-
ously impair the efficiency of the catalytic
converter.
Petrol additives
The quality of the fuel influences the behav-
iour, power and service life of the engine.
This is why the petrol you use should carry
suitable additives already included by the
petrol industry, free of metals. These addi-
tives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the
fuel system clean and prevent deposits from
building up in the engine.
If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi-
tives is not available or engine problems
arise, the necessary additives must be added
when refuelling.
Not all petrol additives have been shown to
be effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad-
ditives may cause significant damage to the
engine and the catalytic converter. Metal ad-
ditives should never be used. Metal additives
may also be contained in petrol additives for
improving anti-detonation ratings or octane
ratings.
SEAT recommends “genuine Volkswagen
Group fuel additives for petrol engines”.
These additives can be bought at SEAT deal-
ers, where information on how to use them
can also be obtained.
CAUTION
Do not refuel if the filler indicates that the
fuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacement
petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of
metal additives. Using them may damage the
engine!
Diesel
Diesel*
Diesel fuel must conform to DIN EN 590 (EN =
“European Standard”). It must have a cetane
number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane num-
ber indicates the ignition quality of the diesel
fuel.
Notes on refuelling
›››
page 163.
Biodiesel*
CAUTION
●
Your vehicle is not designed to use biodie-
sel fuel. Never, under any circumstances re-
fuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuel
could damage the engine and the fuel sys-
tem. The addition of biodiesel to diesel fuel
by the diesel manufacturer in accordance
with standard EN 590 or DIN 51628 is author-
ised and will not cause damage to the engine
or the fuel system.
●
The diesel engine has been designed to be
used exclusively with diesel fuel conforming
to standard EN 590. Never refuel or use pet-
rol, kerosene, fuel oil or any other type of
fuel. If you accidentally fill up the vehicle
with the wrong type of fuel, do not start the
engine. Seek assistance from specialised per-
sonnel. The composition of these fuels may
severely damage the fuel system and the en-
gine.
Winter operation
Winter-grade diesel
When using “summer-grade diesel fuel”, dif-
ficulties may be experienced at temperatures
below 0 °C (+32 °F) because the fuel thickens
due to wax separation. For this reason, “win-
ter-grade diesel fuel” is available in some
countries during the cold months. It can be
used at temperatures as low as -22 °C (-8 ºF).
In countries with different climatic conditions
the diesel fuel generally sold has different
temperature characteristics. Check with the
Technical Services or filling stations in the
country concerned regarding the type of die-
sel fuels available.
»
165
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
Filter pre-heater
Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter glow
plug system, making it well equipped for op-
eration in winter. This ensures that the fuel
system remains operational to approx. -24 °C
(-11 ºF), provided you use winter-grade die-
sel which is safe to -15 °C (+5 °F).
However, if the fuel has waxed to such an ex-
tent that the engine will not start at tempera-
tures of under -24 °C (-11 °F), simply place
the vehicle in a warm place for a while.
CAUTION
Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called “thin-
ners”, or similar additives with diesel fuel.
Working in the engine
compartment
Safety instructions on working in the
engine compartment
Before starting any work on the engine or in
the engine compartment:
1. Switch off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition.
2. Apply the handbrake.
3. Move the gear lever to neutral or the selec-
tor lever to position P.
4. Wait for the engine to cool down.
5. Keep children away from the vehicle.
6. Raise the bonnet ››› page 167.
You should not do any work in the engine
compartment unless you know exactly how to
carry out the jobs and have the correct tools!
Have the work carried out by a specialised
workshop if you are uncertain.
All service fluids and consumables, e.g. cool-
ant, engine oil, spark plugs and batteries,
are under constant development. SEAT pro-
vides a constant flow of information to Tech-
nical Services concerning modifications. For
this reason, we recommend you have service
fluids and consumables replaced by a Techni-
cal Service. Please observe the relevant in-
structions ››› page 155
. The engine compart-
ment
of
the vehicle is a hazardous area ›››
.
WARNING
All work on the engine or in the engine com-
partment, e.g. checking and refilling fluids,
involves the danger of injury and burns, acci-
dents and even fire.
●
Never open the bonnet if you see steam,
smoke or coolant escaping from the engine
compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of
sustaining burns. Wait until no more steam or
coolant is emitted, then allow the engine to
cool before carefully opening the bonnet.
●
Switch off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition.
●
Apply the handbrake and move the gear
lever to neutral or selector lever to position P.
●
Keep children away from the vehicle.
●
Never touch hot engine parts. There is a
risk of burns.
●
Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a
hot exhaust gas system. This is a fire hazard.
●
Avoid causing short-circuits in the electri-
cal system, particularly at the points where
the jump leads are attached ››› page 188. The
battery could explode.
●
Never touch the radiator fan. It is tempera-
ture controlled and could start automatically,
even when the engine has been switched off
and the key removed from the ignition!
●
Never cover the engine with additional in-
sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of
fire!
●
Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant ex-
pansion tank when the engine is hot. If the
coolant is hot, the cooling system will be
pressurised!
●
Protect face, hands and arms by covering
the cap with a large, thick cloth to protect
against escaping coolant and steam.
●
Always make sure you have not left any ob-
jects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in the
engine compartment.
●
If you have to work underneath the vehicle,
you must use suitable stands additionally to
166
Checking and refilling levels
support the vehicle, there is a risk of acci-
dent!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for se-
curing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury.
●
If any work has to be performed when the
engine is started or with the engine running,
there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety
risk from the rotating parts, such as the drive
belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and from
the high-voltage ignition system. You should
also observe the following:
–
Never touch the electrical wiring of the
ignition system.
–
Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing and
long hair do not get trapped in rotating
engine parts. Danger of death. Before
starting any work remove jewellery, tie
back and cover hair, and wear tight-fit-
ting clothes.
–
Never accelerate with a gear engaged
without taking the necessary precau-
tions. The vehicle could move, even if the
handbrake is applied. Danger of death.
●
If work has to be carried out on the fuel
system or on electrical components, you
must observe the following safety notes in
addition to the above warnings:
–
Always disconnect the battery from the
on-board network. The vehicle must be
unlocked when this is done, otherwise
the alarm will be triggered.
–
Do not smoke.
–
Never work near naked flames.
–
Always have a fire extinguisher on hand.
CAUTION
When topping up service fluids, make sure
not to mistake them. Using the wrong fluids
could cause serious malfunctions and engine
damage!
For the sake of the environment
Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi-
ronment. For this reason you should make
regular checks on the ground underneath
your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other
fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a speci-
alised workshop.
Opening the bonnet
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 10
The bonnet is released from inside the vehi-
cle.
Before opening the bonnet ensure that the
windscreen wipers are in rest position.
WARNING
Hot coolant can scald!
●
Never open the bonnet if you see steam,
smoke or coolant escaping from the engine
compartment.
●
Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant
is emitted from the bonnet, then carefully
open the bonnet.
●
When working in the engine compartment,
always observe the safety warnings
››› page 166.
Closing the bonnet
–
Slightly lift the bonnet.
–
Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its
support.
–
At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fall
so it locks.
If the bonnet does not close, do not press
downwards. Open it again and let it fall as
mentioned above.
WARNING
If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could
open while you are driving and completely
obscure your view of the road. Risk of acci-
dent.
●
After closing the bonnet, always check that
it is properly secured. The bonnet must be
flush with the surrounding body panels.
●
If you notice that the bonnet latch is not se-
cured when the vehicle is moving, stop the
vehicle immediately and close the bonnet
properly. Risk of accident.
167
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
Checking fluid levels
Fig. 151 Diagram for the location of the various elements.
Fig. 152 For vehicles with the battery in the
luggage compartment.
From time to time, the levels of the different
fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never
fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious
damage to the engine may be caused.
Coolant expansion tank
1
Engine oil level dipstick
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir
Vehicle battery
Windscreen washer reservoir
The checking and refilling of service fluids
are carried out on the components men-
tioned above. These operations are descri-
bed in the ››› page 166
.
Ov
er
view
You will find further explanations, instruc-
tions and restrictions on the technical speci-
fications as of ››› page 208.
2
3
4
5
6
Note
The layout of parts may vary depending on
the engine.
Engine oil
General notes
The engine comes with a special, multi-grade
oil that can be used all year round.
Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-
tial for the correct operation of the engine
and its long useful life, when topping up or
changing oil, use only those oils that comply
with VW standards.
168
Checking and refilling levels
The specifications (VW standards) set out in
the following page should appear on the con-
tainer of the service oil; when the container
displays the specific standards for petrol and
diesel engines together, it means that the oil
can be used for both types of engines.
We recommend that the oil change indicated
in the Maintenance Programme, be per-
formed by a technical service or specialised
workshop.
The correct oil specifications for your engine
are listed in the ››› page 169, Oil properties.
Service intervals
Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife
service) or fixed (dependent on time/dis-
tance travelled).
If the PR code that appears on the back of the
Maintenance Programme booklet is PR QI6,
this means that your vehicle has the LongLife
service program. If it lists the codes QI1, QI2,
QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service is de-
pendent on the time/distance travelled.
Flexible service intervals (LongLife service
intervals*)
Special oils and processes have been devel-
oped which, depending on the characteris-
tics and individual driving profiles, enable
the extension of the oil change service (Long-
Life service intervals).
Because this oil is essential for extending the
service intervals, it must only be used ob-
serving the following indications:
●
Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service in-
tervals.
●
Only in exceptional circumstances, if the
engine oil level is too low ››› page 170 and
LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to
top up (once) with oil for fixed service inter-
vals
›
›› p
age 169 (up to a maximum of 0.5 li-
tres).
Fixed service intervals*
If your vehicle does not have the “LongLife
service interval” or it has been disabled (by
request), you may use oils for fixed service
intervals, which also appear in ››› page 169,
Oil properties. In this case, your vehicle must
be serviced after a fixed interval of 1
year/15,000 km (10,000 miles)(whatever
comes first) ››› Booklet Maintenance Pro-
gramme.
●
In exceptional circumstances, if the engine
oil level is too low ››› page 170 and you can-
not obtain the oil specified for your vehicle,
you can add a small quantity of oil conform-
ing to the specification ACEA A2 or ACEA A3
(petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (die-
sel engines) (up to 0.5 l).
Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*
The Maintenance Programme states whether
your vehicle is fitted with a diesel particulate
filter.
Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash
formation, may be used in diesel engines
equipped with particulate filter. Using other
types of oil will cause a higher soot concen-
tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-
fore:
●
Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.
●
Only in exceptional circumstances, if the
engine oil level is too low ››› page 170 and
you cannot obtain the oil specified for your
vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil
(once) conforming to the VW 506 00,
VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or
ACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l).
Oil properties
Engine type Specification
Petrol without flexible serv-
ice interval
VW 502 00/VW 504 00
Petrol with flexible service
interval (LongLife)
VW 504 00
Diesel. Engines without Par-
ticulate filter (DPF)
VW 505 01/VW 506
01/VW 507 00
»
169
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
Engine type Specification
Diesel. Particulate Filter En-
gines (DPF).
With or without flexible
service interval (with and
without LongLife)
a)
VW 507 00
a)
Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the
engine.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the
engine oil. The deterioration caused by these
additives is not covered by the warranty.
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding an
engine oil that conforms to the correspond-
ing VW specifications and recommend keep-
ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en-
gine oil will always be available for a top-up if
needed.
Checking the engine oil level
Fig. 153 Engine oil dipstick.
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 24
Checking oil level
–
Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
–
Briefly run the engine at idle speed until
the operating temperature is reached and
then stop.
–
Wait for about two minutes.
–
Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with
a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it
in as far as it will go.
–
Then pull it out again and check the oil lev-
el. Top up with engine oil if necessary.
Depending on how you drive and the condi-
tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-
sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil
consumption is likely to be higher for the first
5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level
must be checked at regular intervals, prefera-
bly when filling the tank and before a jour-
ney.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compart-
ment or on the engine must be carried out
cautiously.
●
When working in the engine compartment,
always observe the safety warnings
››› page 166.
CAUTION
If the oil level is above the area
A
do not
start the engine. This could result in damage
to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact
a Technical Service.
Topping up engine oil
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 24
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe
the warnings
›››
in Safety instructions on
working in the engine compartment on
page 166
.
The po
s
ition of the oil filler opening is shown
in the corresponding engine compartment il-
lustration
›››
page 168.
170
Checking and refilling levels
Engine oil specification ››› page 169.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil
comes into contact with hot engine compo-
nents when topping up.
CAUTION
If the oil level is above the area
A
do not
start the engine. This could result in damage
to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact
a specialised workshop.
For the sake of the environment
The oil level must never be above area
A
.
Otherwise oil can be drawn in through the
crankcase breather and escape into the at-
mosphere via the exhaust system.
Changing engine oil
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 24
The engine oil must be changed at the inter-
vals given in the service schedule.
We recommend that you have the engine oil
changed by a Technical Service.
The oil change intervals are shown in the
Maintenance Programme.
WARNING
Only change the engine oil yourself if you
have the specialist knowledge required!
●
Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-
serve the warnings ››› page 166, Safety in-
structions on working in the engine compart-
ment.
●
Wait
for the engine to cool down. Hot oil
may cause burn injuries.
●
Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such
as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil.
●
When removing the oil drain plug with your
fingers, keep your arm horizontal to help pre-
vent oil from running down your arm.
●
Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into
contact with engine oil.
●
Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be
stored in a safe place out of the reach of chil-
dren.
CAUTION
No additives should be used with engine oil.
This could result in engine damage. Any dam-
age caused by the use of such additives
would not be covered by the factory warranty.
For the sake of the environment
●
Because of disposal problems and the spe-
cial tools and specialist knowledge required,
we recommend that you have the engine oil
and filter changed by a Technical Service.
●
Never pour oil down drains or into the
ground.
●
Use a suitable container when draining the
used oil. It must be large enough to hold all
the engine oil.
Cooling system
Engine coolant specifications
The engine cooling system is supplied from
the factory with a specially treated mixture of
water and, at least, 40 % of the additive G 13
(TL-VW 774 J). The engine coolant additive is
recognisable by its purple colour. This mix-
ture of water and additive gives the necessa-
ry frost protection down to -25°C (-13 F) and
protects the light alloy parts of the cooling
system against corrosion. It also prevents
scaling and considerably raises the boiling
point of the coolant.
To protect the engine cooling system, the
percentage of additive must always
be at
l
e
ast 40 %, even in warm climates where an-
ti-freeze protection is not required.
If greater frost protection is required in very
cold climates, the proportion of additive can
be increased. However, the percentage of ad-
ditive should not exceed 60%, as this would
reduce the frost protection and, in turn, de-
crease the cooling capacity.
»
171
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture
of distilled water
and, at least, 40 % of the G
13 or G 12 p
lu
s-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive
(both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti-
corrosion protection ›››
. The mixture of G
13 with G 12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G 12 (red) or
G 11 (green-blue) engine coolants will signifi-
cantly reduce the anticorrosion protection
and should, therefore be avoided ››› .
WARNING
If there is not enough anti-freeze in the cool-
ant system, the engine may fail leading to se-
rious damage.
●
Please make sure that the percentage of
additive is correct with respect to the lowest
expected ambient temperature in the zone in
which the vehicle is to be used.
●
When the outside temperature is very low,
the coolant could freeze and the vehicle
would be immobilised. In this case, the heat-
ing would not work either and inadequately
dressed passengers could die of cold.
CAUTION
The original additives should never be mixed
with coolants which are not approved by
SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causing
severe damage to the engine and the engine
cooling system.
●
If the fluid in the expansion tank is not pur-
ple but is, for example, brown, this indicates
that the G 13 additive has been mixed with
an inadequate coolant. The coolant must be
changed as soon as possible if this is the
case! This could result in serious faults and
engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Coolants and additives can contaminate the
environment. If any fluids are spilled, they
should be collected and correctly disposed
of, with respect to the environment.
Checking the coolant level and
topping up
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 24
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe
the warnings ››› in Safety instructions on
working in the engine compartment on
page 166
.
Openin
g the c
oolant expansion tank
–
Switch off the engine and allow it to cool.
–
To prevent scalding, cover the cap on the
coolant expansion tank with a thick cloth
and carefully unscrew the cap ›››
.
Checking coolant level
–
Look into the open coolant expansion tank
and read off the coolant level.
–
If the level is below the “MIN” mark, top up
with coolant.
Topping up coolant
–
Only use new
coolant liquid.
–
Do not
fi
ll above the “MAX” mark.
Closing the coolant expansion tank
–
Screw the cap on again tightly.
The position of the coolant expansion reser-
voir is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment illustration ››› page 168.
Ensure the coolant conforms to the required
specifications. Do not use a different type of
additive if additive G 12++ is not available. In
this case use only water and bring the cool-
ant concentration back up to the correct level
as soon as possible by putting in the speci-
fied additive.
Always top up with new coolant.
Do not fill above the “MAX” mark. Otherwise
the excess coolant will be forced out of the
cooling system when the engine is hot.
The additive G 12++ can be mixed with the G
12+ in any proportion.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compart-
ment or on the engine must be carried out
cautiously.
172
Checking and refilling levels
●
When working in the engine compartment,
always observe the safety warnings
››› page 166.
●
When the engine i
s warm or hot, the cool-
ing system is pressurised! Do not unscrew
the cap on the coolant expansion tank when
the engine is hot. This is a burn injury risk.
CAUTION
●
If you notice a change in the colour of the
liquid because it has been in use for a long
time, it is recommended to change it, as it
will have lost some of its properties and
could cause damage to the engine.
●
If a lot of coolant fluid has been lost, wait
for the engine to cool. This avoids damaging
the engine. Large coolant losses are an indi-
cation of leaks in the cooling system. See a
specialised workshop immediately and have
the cooling system checked. Otherwise, there
is a risk of engine damage.
Brake fluid
Checking the brake fluid level
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 25
The position of the brake fluid reservoir is
shown in the corresponding engine compart-
ment illustration ››› page 168
. The brake fluid
r
e
servoir has a black and yellow cap.
The brake fluid level drops slightly when the
vehicle is being used as the brake pads are
automatically adjusted as they wear.
However, if the level goes down noticeably in
a short time, or drops below the “MIN” mark,
there may be a leak in the brake system. A
display on the instrument panel will warn you
if the brake fluid level is too low ››› page 57.
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet to check the brake
fluid level, read and observe the warnings
››› page 166.
Changing the brake fluid
The Maintenance Programme indicates brake
fluid change intervals.
We recommend that you have the brake fluid
changed by a Technical Service.
Before opening the bonnet, please read and
follow the warnings
›››
in Safety instruc-
tions on working in the engine compartment
on page 166
in section “Safety notes for
w
ork
ing in the engine compartment”.
In the course of time, brake fluid becomes
hygroscopic and absorbs water from the am-
bient air. If the water content in the brake flu-
id is too high, the brake system could cor-
rode. This also considerably reduces the boil-
ing point of the brake fluid. Heavy use of the
brakes may then cause a vapour lock which
could impair the braking effect.
Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid.
Only use brake fluid that expressly meets the
VW 501 14 standard.
You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluid
in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official Serv-
ice. If none is available, use only high-quality
brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4
standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT
4.
Using any other kind of brake fluid or one
that is not of a high quality may affect opera-
tion of the brake system and reduce its effec-
tiveness. Never use a brake fluid if the con-
tainer does not state that it complies with VW
501 14, DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or
USA standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.
WARNING
Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid im-
pairs the braking effect.
●
Before opening the bonnet to check the
brake fluid level, read and observe the warn-
ings ››› page 166.
●
Brak
e fluid should be stored in the closed
original container in a safe place out of reach
of children. There is a toxic risk.
»
173
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
●
Perform the brake fluid change according to
the Maintenance Programme. Heavy use of
the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the
brake fluid is left in the brake system for too
long. This would seriously affect the effec-
tiveness of the brakes and the safety of the
vehicle. This may cause an accident.
CAUTION
Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork.
Wipe off any brake fluid from the paintwork
immediately.
For the sake of the environment
The brake pads and brake fluid must be col-
lected and disposed of according the applica-
ble regulations. The SEAT Technical Service
network has the necessary equipment and
qualified personnel for collecting and dispos-
ing of this waste material.
Windscreen washer reservoir
Topping up washer fluid
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 25
The
windscreen washer
and the
headlight
washers are supplied with fluid from the
windscreen washer fluid container in the en-
gine compartment. The container holds ap-
prox. 2 litres; in vehicles with headlight
washers* it holds approx. 4.5 litres.
The tank is in the engine compartment.
Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-
screen and headlights. We recommend that
you always add a product to the windscreen
washer fluid. Approved windscreen cleaning
products exist on the market with high deter-
gent and anti-freeze properties, these may be
added all-year-round. Please follow the dilu-
tion instructions on the packaging.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compart-
ment or on the engine must be carried out
cautiously.
●
When working in the engine compartment,
always observe the safety warnings
››› page 166.
CAUTION
●
Never put radiator anti-freeze or other addi-
tives into the windscreen washer fluid.
●
Always use approved windscreen cleansing
products diluted as per instructions. If you
use other washer fluids or soap solutions,
the tiny holes in the fan-shaped nozzles
could become blocked.
Vehicle battery
Warnings on handling the battery
Wear eye protection
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protec-
tive gloves and eye protection!
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are pro-
hibited!
A highly explosive mixture of gases is released
when the battery is under charge.
Keep children away from acid and batteries!
WARNING
Always be aware of the danger of injury and
chemical burns as well as the risk of accident
or fire when working on the battery and the
electrical system:
●
Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes,
skin and clothing from acid and particles con-
taining lead.
●
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear
protective gloves and eye protection. Do not
tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through
the vents. Rinse battery acid from eyes imme-
diately for several minutes with clear water.
Then seek medical care immediately. Neutral-
ise any acid splashes on the skin or clothing
with a soapy solution, and rinse off with plen-
ty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake,
consult a doctor immediately.
174
Checking and refilling levels
●
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are
prohibited. When handling cables and electri-
cal equipment, avoid causing sparks and
electrostatic charge. Never short the battery
terminals. High-energy sparks can cause in-
jury.
●
A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-
leased when the battery is under charge. The
batteries should be charged in a well-ventila-
ted room only.
●
Keep children away from acid and batteries.
●
Before working on the electrical system,
you must switch off the engine, the ignition
and all electrical devices. The negative cable
on the battery must be disconnected. When a
light bulb is changed, you need only switch
off the light.
●
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlock-
ing the vehicle before you disconnect the bat-
tery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.
●
When disconnecting the battery from the
vehicle on-board network, disconnect first
the negative cable and then the positive ca-
ble.
●
Switch off all electrical devices before re-
connecting the battery. Reconnect first the
positive cable and then the negative cable.
Never reverse the polarity of the connections.
This could cause an electrical fire.
●
Never charge a frozen battery, or one which
has thawed. This could result in explosions
and chemical burns. Always replace a battery
which has frozen. A flat battery can also
freeze at temperatures close to 0 °C (+32 °F).
●
Ensure that the vent hose is always connec-
ted to the battery.
●
Never use a defective battery. This could
cause an explosion. Replace a damaged bat-
tery immediately.
●
For vehicles with the battery in the luggage
compartment: Check that the battery gas
ventilation hose is securely attached.
CAUTION
●
Never disconnect the battery if the ignition
is switched on or if the engine is running.
This could damage the electrical system or
electronic components.
●
Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight
over a long period of time, as the intense ul-
traviolet radiation can damage the battery
housing.
●
If the vehicle is left standing in cold condi-
tions for a long period, protect the battery
from “freezing”. If it freezes it will be dam-
aged.
Checking the electrolyte level
The electrolyte level should be checked regu-
larly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun-
tries and in older batteries.
–
Open the bonnet and open the battery cov-
er at the front ››› in Safety instructions
on working in the engine compartment on
page 166
›
›› in Warnings on handling
the battery on page 174. For vehicles with
the battery under the spare wheel, open
the rear lid and lift the floor covering. The
battery is located next to the spare wheel.
–
Check the colour display in the "magic eye"
on the top of the battery.
–
If there are air bubbles in the window, tap
the window gently until they disperse.
The position of the battery is shown in the
corresponding engine compartment diagram
››› page 168
. The location of the battery in
the lug
g
age compartment can be seen in
››› Fig. 152.
The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top
of the battery changes colour, depending on
the charge state and electrolyte level of the
battery.
There are two different colours:
●
Black: correct charge status.
●
Transparent/clear yellow: the battery must
be replaced. Contact a specialised workshop.
Charging and changing the vehicle
battery
The battery is maintenance-free and is
checked during the inspection service. All
work on the vehicle battery requires special-
ist knowledge.
»
175
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
If you often drive short distances or if the ve-
hicle is not driven for long periods, the bat-
tery should be checked by a specialised
workshop between the scheduled services.
If the battery has discharged and you have
problems starting the vehicle, the battery
might be damaged. If this happens, we rec-
ommend you have the vehicle battery
checked by a Technical Service where it will
be re-charged or replaced.
Charging the battery
The vehicle battery should be charged by a
specialised workshop only, as batteries us-
ing special technology have been installed
and they must be charged in a controlled en-
vironment.
Replacing a vehicle battery
The battery has been developed to suit the
conditions of its location and has special
safety features.
Genuine SEAT batteries meet the mainte-
nance, performance and safety specifications
of your vehicle.
WARNING
●
We recommend you use only maintenance-
free or cycle free leak-proof batteries which
comply with standards T 825 06 and
VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of
2001.
●
Before starting any work on the batteries,
you must read and observe the warnings
››› in Warnings on handling the battery on
page 174.
For the sake of the environment
Batteries contain toxic substances such as
sulphuric acid and lead. They must be dis-
posed of appropriately and must not be dis-
posed of with ordinary household waste.
Wheels
Wheels and tyres
General notes
Avoiding damage
–
If you have to drive over a kerb or similar
obstacle, drive very slowly and at a right
angle.
–
Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
–
Inspect the tyres regularly for damage
(cuts, cracks or blisters, etc.). Remove any
foreign objects embedded in the treads.
Storing tyres
–
When you remove the tyres, mark them in
order to maintain the same direction of ro-
tation when they are installed again.
–
When removed, the wheels and/or tyres
should be stored in a cool, dry and prefera-
bly dark location.
–
Store tyres in a vertical position, if they are
not fitted on wheel rims.
New tyres
New tyres must be run in
›››
page 134.
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-
cording to the type and make of tyre and the
tread pattern.
176
Wheels
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily
visible. If you notice unusual vibrations or the
vehicle pulling to one side, this may indicate
that one of the tyres is damaged. They
should be checked immediately by a Techni-
cal Service.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-
rection of rotation on tyres with directional
tread. Always observe the direction of rota-
tion indicated when fitting the wheel. This
guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid
aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.
WARNING
●
New tyres do not have maximum grip dur-
ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly care-
fully to avoid possible accidents.
●
Never drive with damaged tyres. This may
cause an accident.
●
If you notice unusual vibrations or if the ve-
hicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the
vehicle immediately and check the tyres for
damage.
Checking tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the
sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap.
1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure
from the sticker. The values refer to Sum-
mer tyres.
2. The tyre pressures should only be checked
when the tyres are cold. The slightly raised
pressures of warm tyres must not be re-
duced.
3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you
are carrying.
Tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure is especially impor-
tant at high speeds. The pressure should
therefore be checked at least once a month
and before starting a journey.
WARNING
A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too
low, causing an accident!
●
At continuously high speeds, a tyre with in-
sufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it
becomes too hot, and this can cause tread
separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe
the recommended tyre pressures.
●
If the tyre pressure is too low or too high,
the tyres will wear prematurely and the vehi-
cle will not handle well. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-
sumption.
Tyre useful life
Fig. 154 Tyre tread wear indicators.
Fig. 155 Diagram for changing wheels
The useful life of tyres is dependent on tyre
pressure, driving style and fitting.
Wear indicators
The original tyres on your vehicle have
1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators”
››› Fig. 154
, running across the tread.
»
177
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
Depending on the make, there will be 6 to 8
of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Mark-
ings on the tyre sidewall (for instance the let-
ters “TWI” or other symbols) indicate the po-
sitions of the tread wear indicators. The mini-
mum tread depth required by law is 1.6 mm
(measured in the tread grooves next to the
tread wear indicators). Worn tyres must be re-
placed. Different figures may apply in export
countries ››› .
Tyre pressure
Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature
wear and could cause tyre blow-out. For this
reason, the tyre pressure should be checked
at least once per month ››› page 177.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard
braking all increase tyre wear.
Changing wheels around
If the front tyres are worn considerably more
than the rear ones it is advisable to change
them around as shown ››› Fig. 155
. The use-
f
u
l life of all the tyres will then be about the
same time.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.
However, various factors encountered in nor-
mal driving can cause them to become unbal-
anced, which results in steering vibration.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as
they otherwise cause excessive wear on
steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must
also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive
tyre wear, impairing the safety of the vehicle.
If tyres show excessive wear, you should
have the wheel alignment checked by a Tech-
nical Service.
WARNING
There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre
bursts during driving!
●
The tyres must be replaced at the latest
when the tread wear indicators are worn
››› page 177. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in an accident. Worn tyres do not
grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There
is also a greater risk of “aquaplaning”.
●
At continuously high speeds, a tyre with in-
sufficient pressure flexes more. This causes it
to overheat. This can cause tread separation
and tyre blow-out. Risk of accident. Always
observe the recommended tyre pressures.
●
If tyres show excessive wear, you should
have the running gear checked by a Technical
Service.
●
Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake
fluid away from tyres.
●
Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-
placed immediately!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-
sumption.
New tyres and wheels
New tyres and wheels have to be run in.
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential
part of the vehicle's design. Those approved
by SEAT are specially matched to the charac-
teristics of the vehicle and make a major con-
tribution to good road-holding and safe han-
dling
›››
.
Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and
not individually (i.e. both front tyres or both
rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre des-
ignations makes it easier to choose the cor-
rect tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designa-
tions marked on the sidewall, for example:
195/65 R15 91T
This contains the following information:
Tyre width in mm
Height/width ratio in %
Tyre construction:
R
adial
Rim di
ameter in inches
Load rating code
Speed rating
195
65
R
15
91
T
178
Wheels
The tyres could also have the following infor-
mation:
●
A direction of rotation symbol
●
“Reinforced” denotes heavy-duty tyres.
The manufacturing date is also indicated on
the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the inner
side of the wheel).
“DOT ... 1103 ...” means, for example, that
the tyre was produced in the 11th week of
2003.
We recommend that work on tyres and
wheels be carried out by a Technical Service.
They are familiar with the procedure and
have the necessary special tools and spare
parts as well as the proper facilities for dis-
posing of the old tyres.
Any technical service has full information on
the technical requirements when installing or
changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims.
Note for Italy:
A SEAT Service Centre should
be c
on
sulted whether different sized wheels
or tyres to those originally fitted by SEAT may
be fitted, as well as the combinations al-
lowed between the front axle (axle 1) and
back axle (axle 2).
WARNING
●
We recommend that you use only wheels
and tyres which have been approved by SEAT
for your model. Failure to do so could impair
vehicle handling. Risk of accident.
●
Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are
more than 6 years old. If you have no alterna-
tive, you should drive slowly and with extra
care at all times.
●
Never use old tyres or those with an un-
known “history of use”.
●
If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must en-
sure that the flow of air to the brakes is not
restricted. This could cause the brake system
to overheat.
●
All four wheels must be fitted with radial
tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumfer-
ence) and the same tread pattern.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of according to
the laws in the country concerned.
Note
●
For technical reasons, it is not generally
possible to use the wheels from other vehi-
cles. This can also apply to wheels of the
same model. The use of wheels or tyres
which have not been approved by SEAT for
use with your model may invalidate the vehi-
cle's type approval for use on public roads.
●
If the spare tyre is not the same as the
tyres that are mounted on the vehicle (e.g.
winter tyres) you should only use the spare
tyre for a short period of time and drive with
extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as
soon as possible.
Wheel bolts
The design of wheel bolts is matched to the
rims. If different wheel rims are fitted, the
correct wheel bolts with the right length and
correctly shaped bolt heads must be used.
This ensures that wheels are fitted securely
and that the brake system functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you should not use
wheel bolts from a different vehicle, even if it
is the same model ››› page 155.
WARNING
If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly,
the wheel could become loose while driving.
Risk of accident.
●
The wheel bolts must be clean and turn
easily. Never apply grease or oil to them.
●
Use only wheel bolts which belong to the
wheel.
●
If the prescribed torque of the wheel bolts
is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehi-
cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight-
ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and
threads can be damaged.
»
179
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
CAUTION
The prescribed tightening torque for wheel
bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
Winter service
Winter tyres
In winter conditions winter tyres will consid-
erably improve the vehicle's handling. The
design of summer tyres (width, rubber com-
pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice
and snow.
Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure of
0.2 bar (2.9 psi/20 kPa) higher than the pres-
sures specified for summer tyres (see sticker
on fuel tank flap).
Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.
Information on permitted winter tyre sizes
can be found in the vehicle's registration
documentation. Use only radial winter tyres.
All tyre sizes listed in the vehicle documenta-
tion also apply to winter tyres.
Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the
tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm.
The speed rating code
›››
page 178, New
tyres and wheels determines the following
speed limits
for winter tyres:
›
›
›
max. 160 km/h (99 mph)Q
max. 180 km/h (112 mph)
max. 190 km/h (118 mph)
max. 210 km/h (130 mph)
In some countries, vehicles which can exceed
the speed rating of the fitted tyre must have
an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of
view. These stickers are available from your
technical service. The legal requirements of
each country must be followed.
Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessa-
rily long periods. Vehicles with summer tyres
handle better when the roads are free of
snow and ice.
If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the
notes on the spare wheel ››› page 178, New
tyres and wheels.
WARNING
The maximum speed for the winter tyres must
not be exceeded. Otherwise, this could lead
to damage and risk of accident.
For the sake of the environment
Fit your summer tyres again as soon as possi-
ble. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly
and reduce fuel consumption.
S
T
H
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front
wheels, and only for the following tyres:
175/70R14
185/60R15
Chains with links not exceeding 15 mm
(including the chain closure)
215/45R16 Chains with links not exceeding 9 mm (in-
cluding the chain closure)
215/40R17 Chains with links not exceeding 7 mm (in-
cluding the chain closure)
Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings be-
fore fitting snow chains. For safety reasons,
cover caps, available in any Technical Serv-
ices, must then be fitted over the wheel
bolts.
WARNING
Snow chains should be correctly tightened in
accordance with the manufacturer's instruc-
tions. This will prevent the chains coming in-
to contact with the wheel housing.
CAUTION
Remove the snow chains to drive on roads
without snow. Otherwise they will impair
handling, damage the tyres and wear out very
quickly.
180
Emergencies
Note
In some countries, the maximum permitted
speed with snow chains is 50 km/h (31 mph).
The legal requirements of each country must
be followed.
Emergencies
Emergency equipment
Warning triangle*
Fig. 156 IBIZA ST model: Housing for the
emergency warning triangle in the luggage
compartment.
The use of reflective warning triangles is
obligatory in emergencies in some countries.
As are the first aid kit and a set of spare light
bulbs.
The warning triangle is under the storage
compartment which is located under the lug-
gage compartment floor.
Note
●
The warning triangle is not part of the vehi-
cle's standard equipment.
●
The warning triangle should meet legal re-
quirements.
First-aid kit and fire extinguisher*
Fig. 157 IBIZA ST model: Housing for the first-
aid kit in the luggage compartment.
The first-aid kit can go in the storage com-
partment which is located under the luggage
compartment floor.
The fire extinguisher* is attached to the lug-
gage compartment carpet with Velcro.
Note
●
The first-aid kit and the fire extinguisher
are not part of the vehicle's standard equip-
ment.
●
The first aid kit must comply with legal re-
quirements.
»
181
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
●
Observe the expiry date of the contents of
the first aid kit. After it has expired you
should purchase a new one.
●
The fire extinguisher must comply with le-
gal requirements.
●
Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully
functional. The fire extinguisher should,
therefore, be checked regularly. The sticker
on the fire extinguisher will inform you of the
next date for checking.
●
Before acquiring accessories and emergen-
cy equipment see the instructions in “Acces-
sories and spares” ››› page 155.
Vehicle Tools
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 27
Some of the items listed are only provided in
certain model versions, or are optional ex-
tras.
WARNING
●
The factory-supplied jack is only designed
for changing wheels on this model. On no ac-
count attempt to use it for lifting heavier ve-
hicles or other loads. Risk of injury.
●
Use the jack only on a firm, level ground.
●
Never start the engine when the vehicle is
on the jack. Risk of accident.
●
If work is to be carried out underneath the
vehicle, this must be secured by suitable
means. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.
Note
The jack does not generally require any main-
tenance. If required, it should be greased us-
ing universal type grease.
Spare wheel (temporary spare
wheel)*
The temporary spare wheel is stored under
the floor panel in the luggage compartment
and is attached by a thumbnut.
How to use the temporary spare wheel
If you ever have a punctured tyre or loss of
pressure, the temporary spare wheel is only
intended for temporary use until you reach a
workshop. Change it for a duty wheel as soon
as possible.
Please note the following restrictions when
using the temporary spare wheel. This tem-
porary spare wheel has been specially de-
signed for your vehicle, thus, it cannot be
changed with the temporary spare wheel
from another vehicle.
No other type of tyre (normal summer or win-
ter tyre) may be fitted on the compact tempo-
rary spare wheel rim.
Snow chains
For technical reasons, snow chains must not
be used on the temporary spare wheel.
If you have a puncture on one of the front
wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-
porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear
wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel
that you have removed and replace the punc-
tured front wheel with this wheel.
WARNING
●
After fitting the temporary spare wheel,
check the tyre pressures as soon as possible.
Failure to do so may cause an accident. The
tyre pressures are listed on the inside of the
fuel tank flap.
●
Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)
when the temporary spare wheel is fitted on
the vehicle: risk of accident!
●
Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and
fast cornering: risk of accident!
●
Never use more than one temporary spare
wheel at the same time, risk of accident.
●
No other type of tyre (normal summer or
winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact
temporary spare wheel rim.
182
Emergencies
Wheel change
Preparation work
–
If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the
vehicle as far away from the flow of traffic
as possible. Choose a location that is as
level as possible.
–
All vehicle occupants should leave the ve-
hicle. They should wait in a safe area (for
instance behind the roadside crash barri-
er).
–
Switch the engine off. Switch the hazard
warning lights on and place the warning tri-
angles in position.
–
Apply the handbrake
firmly.
–
En
g
age the first gear, or put the selector
lever to position P for those vehicles with
an automatic gearbox.
–
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from
your vehicle.
–
Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheel
out of the luggage compartment.
WARNING
●
Switch on the hazard warning lights and
place the warning triangles in position. This
is for your own safety and also warns other
road users.
●
If you change the wheel on a slope, block
the wheel on the opposite side of the car with
a stone or similar to prevent the vehicle from
moving.
Changing a wheel
Change the wheel as described below:
–
Remove the hub caps or the integral trim.
–
Slac
ken the wheel bolts.
–
Raise the vehicle with the jack at the corre-
spondin
g area.
–
Remove the wheel and put on the spare
one.
–
Lower the vehicle.
–
Tighten the wheel bolts firmly with the box
spanner.
–
Replace the hub cap.
After changing a wheel
–
Put the tools back in their storage location.
–
Place the wheel with the defective tyre in
the luggage compartment and secure it.
–
Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted
tyre as soon as possible.
–
Have the tightening torque of the wheel
bolts checked as soon as possible with a
torque wrench. The prescribed torque must
be 120 Nm.
Note
●
If you notice that the wheel bolts are corro-
ded and difficult to turn when changing a
wheel, they must be replaced before having
the wheel bolt tightening torque checked.
●
For safety reasons, drive at moderate
speeds until the wheel bolt tightening torque
has been checked.
Wheel covers*
Fig. 158
Remove the wheel cover.
The wheel covers must be removed for access
to the wheel bolts.
»
183
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
Removing
–
Remove the wheel cover using the wire
hook ››› Fig. 158
.
–
Hook
thi
s into one of the cut-outs of the
wheel cover.
Fitting
–
Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by
pressing it firmly. Put pressure initially on
the point of the cut-out for the valve. Next
fit the rest of the hubcap
Loosening the wheel bolts
Fig. 159 Changing a wheel: loosen the wheel
bolts.
The wheel bolts must be loosened before
raising the vehicle.
Loosening
–
Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over
the wheel bolt.
–
Grasp the box spanner by the end turn it
about one full turn to the left
›
›› Fig. 159
.
Tightening
–
Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over
the wheel bolt.
–
Grasp the box spanner close to the end and
turn the bolt to the right until it is secured.
–
An adapter is required to unscrew or tight-
en the anti-theft wheel bolts.
WARNING
Loosen the wheel bolts (only about one turn)
before raising the vehicle with the jack, oth-
erwise there is a risk of accident.
Note
●
If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be
able to loosen it by pushing the end of the
spanner down carefully with your foot. Hold
on to the vehicle for support and take care
not to slip.
Raising the vehicle
Fig. 160 Jack position points
Fig. 161 Fitting the jack.
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 27
In order to remove the wheel, the vehicle
must be raised with a jack.
–
Locate the jacking point under the door sill
closest to the punctured wheel ››› Fig. 160
.
184
Emergencies
–
Place the jack under the jacking point and
turn the crank until the arm of the jack is di-
rectly below the vertical rib under the door
sill.
–
Align the jack so that the arm of the jack
fits around the rib under the door sill and
the movable base plate of the jack is flat on
the ground ››› Fig. 161
.
–
R
ai
se the vehicle until the defective wheel
is just clear of the ground.
Recesses at the front and rear of the door
sills mark the jacking points ››› Fig. 160.
There is only one jacking point for each
wheel. Do not fit the jack anywhere else.
An unstable surface under the jack may
cause the vehicle to slip off the jack. There-
fore, it must be fitted on solid ground offer-
ing good support. Use a large and stable
base, if necessary. On a hard, slippery sur-
face (such as tile) use a rubber mat or similar
to prevent the jack from slipping.
WARNING
●
Take all precautions so that the base of the
jack does not slip. Failure to follow this in-
struction could result in an accident.
●
The vehicle can be damaged if the jack is
not applied at the correct jacking points.
There is also a risk of injury since the jack can
slip off suddenly if it is not properly engaged.
Removing and fitting the wheel
Change the wheel as described below after
loosening the wheel bolts and raising the ve-
hicle with the jack.
Removing a wheel
–
Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box
spanner and place them on a clean surface.
Fitting a wheel
–
Screw on the wheel bolts in position and
tighten them loosely with a box spanner.
The wheel bolts should be clean and easily
screwed. Before fitting the spare wheel, in-
spect the wheel condition and hub mounting
surfaces. These surfaces must be clean be-
fore fitting the wheel.
If tyres with a specific direction of rotation
are fitted, note the direction of rotation.
Anti-theft wheel bolts*
Fig. 162 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and
adapter.
A special adapter is required to turn the anti-
theft wheel bolts. This is found in the tool
box.
–
Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and
push it on as far as it will go ››› Fig. 162
.
–
Fit
the bo
x spanner as far as it will go over
the adapter.
–
Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appro-
priate.
Code
The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt
is stamped onto the front part of the adaptor.
The code number should be noted and kept
in a safe place, as it is only by using the code
number that a duplicate adaptor can be ob-
tained from SEAT Official Services.
185
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
Tyres with directional tread pattern
A directional tread pattern can be identified
by arrows on the sidewall that point in the di-
rection of rotation. Always note the direction
of rotation indicated when fitting the wheel.
This is important so that these tyres can give
maximum grip and avoid excessive noise,
tread wear and aquaplaning.
If, in an emergency, you have to mount the
spare wheel so it rotates in the wrong direc-
tion, you must drive extremely carefully. The
tyre will not give optimum performance. This
is particularly important when driving on wet
roads.
To benefit from the advantages of tyres with
this type of tread pattern, the defective tyre
should be replaced as soon as possible so
that all tyres again rotate in the correct direc-
tion.
Tyre repair
TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 26
The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)
will reliably seal punctures caused by the
penetration of a foreign body of up to about
4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign ob-
jects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.
After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,
you must again check the tyre pressure about
10 minutes after starting the engine.
You should only use the tire mobility set if
the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are
familiar with the procedure and you have the
necessary tire mobility set! Otherwise, you
should seek professional assistance.
The tyre sealant must not be used in the
following cases:
●
If the wheel rim has been damaged.
●
In outside temperatures below -20 °C
(-4 °F).
●
In the event of cuts or perforations in the
tyre greater than 4 mm.
●
If you have been driving with very low pres-
sure or a completely flat tyre.
●
If the sealant bottle has passed its use by
date.
WARNING
Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-
gerous, especially when filling the tyre at the
roadside. Please observe the following rules
to minimise the risk of injury:
●
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
Park it at a safe distance from surrounding
traffic to fill the tyre.
●
Ensure the ground on which you park is flat
and solid.
●
All passengers and particularly children
must keep a safe distance from the work area.
●
Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn
other road users.
●
Use the tyre mobility system only if you are
familiar with the necessary procedures. Oth-
erwise, you should seek professional assis-
tance.
●
The tyre mobility set is intended for tempo-
rary emergency use only until you can reach
the nearest specialised workshop.
●
Replace the repaired tyre with the tire mo-
bility set as soon as possible.
●
The sealant is a health hazard and must be
cleaned immediately if it comes into contact
with the skin.
●
Always keep the tire mobility set out of the
reach of small children.
●
Never use an equivalent jack, even if it has
been approved for your vehicle.
●
Always stop the engine, apply the hand-
brake lever firmly and engage gear if using a
manual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk of
vehicle involuntary movement.
WARNING
A tyre filled with sealant does not have the
same performance properties as a conven-
tional tyre.
●
Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
186
Emergencies
●
Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and
fast cornering.
●
Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check
the tyre.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of used or expired sealant observing
any legal requirements.
Note
●
A new bottle of sealant can be purchased at
SEAT dealerships.
●
Take into account the separate instruction
manual of the tyre mobility set* manufactur-
er.
Contents of the tyre mobility system*
Fig. 163 Standard representation: Contents
of the tyre mobility system.
The tyre mobility set is located underneath
the floor covering in the luggage compart-
ment. It includes the following components
››› Fig. 163
:
T
y
re valve remover
Sticker indicating maximum speed “max.
80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”
Filler tube with cap
Air compressor
Tube for inflating tyres
Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-
toring system (it can also be integrated in
the compressor).
1
2
3
4
5
6
Air bleed screw (in its place, the compres-
sor may have a button).
ON/OFF switch
12 volt connector
Bottle of sealant
Spare tyre valve
The
valve insert remover
1
has a gap at the
lower end for a valve insert. The valve insert
can only be screwed or unscrewed in this
way. This also applies to its replacement part
11
.
WARNING
When inflating the wheel, the air compressor
and the inflator tube may become hot.
●
Protect hands and skin from hot parts.
●
Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or
hot air compressor on flammable material.
●
Allow them to cool before storing the de-
vice.
●
If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at
least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is
too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a
good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-
tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
CAUTION
Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-
mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid over-
heating! Before switching on the air compres-
sor again, let it cool for several minutes.
7
8
9
10
11
187
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
Check after 10 minutes of driving
Screw in the inflator tube ››› Fig. 163
5
again and check the pressure on the gauge
6
.
1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:
●
Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed
sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.
●
You should obtain professional assistance
››› .
1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:
●
Set the tyre pressure to the correct value
again.
●
Carefully resume your journey until you
reach the nearest specialised workshop with-
out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
●
Have the damaged tyre replaced.
WARNING
Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous
and can cause accidents and serious injury.
●
Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure
is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.
●
Seek specialist assistance.
Jump-starting
Jump leads
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire
cross section.
If the engine fails to start because of a dis-
charged battery, the battery can be connec-
ted to the battery of another vehicle to start
the engine.
Jump leads
Jump leads must comply with standard DIN
72553
(see cable manufacturer's instruc-
tion
s).
The wire cross section must be at least
25 mm
2
for petrol engines and at least
35 mm
2
for diesel engines.
Note
●
The vehicles must not touch each other,
otherwise electricity could flow as soon as
the positive terminals are connected.
●
The discharged battery must be properly
connected to the on-board network.
How to jump start: description
Fig. 164 Diagram of connections for vehicles
without Start-Stop system.
Fig. 165 Diagram of connections for vehicles
with Start-Stop system.
Jump lead terminal connections
1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles
››› .
188
Emergencies
2. Connect one end of the red
jump lead to
the po
s
itive
+
terminal of the vehicle
with the flat battery
A
››› Fig. 164
.
3.
C
onnect the other end of the red jump
lead to the positive terminal
+
in the ve-
hicle providing assistance
B
.
4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system:
connect one end of the black jump lead to
the negative terminal
–
of the vehicle
providing the current
B
››› Fig. 164
.
–
F
or
vehicles with Start-Stop system: con-
nect one end of the black jump lead
X
to a
suitable ground terminal, to a solid piece of
metal in the engine block, or to the engine
block itself ››› Fig. 165
.
5.
C
onnect the other end of the black jump
lead
X
to a solid metal component bolted
to the engine block or to the engine block
itself of the vehicle with the flat battery.
Do not connect it to a point near the bat-
tery
A
.
6. Position the leads in such a way that they
cannot come into contact with any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
Starting
7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
boosting battery and let it run at idling
speed.
8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat
battery and wait 2 or 3 minutes until the
engine is “running”.
Removing the jump leads
9. Before you remove the jump leads, switch
off the dipped beam headlights (if they
are switched on).
10. Turn on the heater blower and heated
rear window in the vehicle with the flat
battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks
which are generated when the leads are
disconnected.
11.
When the engine is running, disconnect
the l
e
ads in reverse order to the details
given above.
Connect the battery clamps so they have
good metal-to-metal contact with the battery
terminals.
If the engine fails to start, switch off the start-
er after about 10 seconds and try again after
about a minute.
WARNING
●
Please note the safety warnings referring to
working in the engine compartment
››› page 166, Working in the engine compart-
ment.
●
The batt
ery providing assistance must have
the same voltage as the flat battery (12 V)
and approximately the same capacity (see
imprint on battery). Failure to comply could
result in an explosion.
●
Never use jump leads when one of the bat-
teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even af-
ter the battery has thawed, battery acid could
leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery
freezes, it should be replaced.
●
Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes
away from batteries, danger of explosion.
Failure to comply could result in an explo-
sion.
●
Observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the jump leads.
●
Do not connect the negative cable from the
other vehicle directly to the negative terminal
of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the
battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of
explosion.
●
Do not attach the negative cable from the
other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to
the brake line.
●
The non-insulated parts of the battery
clamps must not be allowed to touch. The
jump lead attached to the positive battery
terminal must not touch metal parts of the ve-
hicle, this can cause a short circuit.
●
Position the leads in such a way that they
cannot come into contact with any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
●
Do not lean on the batteries. This could re-
sult in chemical burns.
»
189
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other, oth-
erwise electricity could flow as soon as the
positive terminals are connected.
Towing or tow starting
Tow-starting*
We recommend that you do not tow-start your
vehic
le. Jump-starting is preferable
›››
page 188.
How
ever, if your vehicle has to be tow-
started:
–
Engage 2
nd
or 3
rd
gear.
–
Keep the clutch pressed down.
–
Switch the ignition on.
–
Once both vehicles are moving, release the
clutch.
–
As soon as the engine starts, press the
clutch and move the gear lever into neutral.
This helps to prevent driving into the tow-
ing vehicle.
WARNING
The risk of accidents is high when tow-start-
ing. The vehicle being towed can easily col-
lide with the towing vehicle.
CAUTION
When tow-starting, fuel could enter the cata-
lytic converter and damage it.
Comments
Please observe the following points if you
use a tow rope:
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
–
Drive slowly at first until the tow rope is
taut. Then accelerate gradually.
–
Begin and change gears cautiously. If you
are driving an automatic vehicle, accelerate
gently.
–
Remember that the brake servo and power
steering are not working in the vehicle you
are towing. Brake sooner than normal and
pressing the pedal gently.
Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle
–
Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at all
times when towing.
Tow rope or tow bar
It is easier and safer for the vehicle to be tow-
ed using a tow bar. You should only use a
tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar.
A tow rope should be slightly elastic to re-
duce the loading on both vehicles. It is advis-
able to use a tow rope made of synthetic fi-
bre or similarly elastic material.
Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to the
towline anchorages provided or a towing
bracket.
Driving style
Towing requires some experience, especially
when using a tow rope. Both drivers should
be familiar with the technique required for
towing. Inexperienced drivers should not at-
tempt to tow.
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle
and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope.
When towing on an unpaved road, there is al-
ways a risk of overloading and damaging the
anchorage points.
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must
be switched on to prevent the steering wheel
from locking and also to allow the use of the
turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and
washers.
The brake servo only works when the engine
is running. When not running, you must ap-
ply considerably more pressure to the brake
pedal.
As the power assisted steering does not work
if the engine is not running, you will need
more strength to steer than you normally
would.
190
Emergencies
Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox
●
Put the selector lever into position “N”.
●
Do not drive faster than 50 km/h (31 mph).
●
Do not tow further than 50 km.
●
If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle
must be towed with the front wheels raised.
Note
●
Observe legal requirements when towing or
tow-starting.
●
Switch on the hazard warning lights of both
vehicles. However, observe any regulations
to the contrary.
●
For technical reasons, vehicles with an au-
tomatic gearbox must not be tow-started.
●
If there is no lubricant in the gearbox as the
result of a fault, you must raise the driven
wheels while the vehicle is being towed.
●
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
50 km (30 miles), the front wheels should be
raised during towing, and towing should be
carried out by a qualified person.
●
The steering wheel is locked when the vehi-
cle has no electrical power. The vehicle must
then be towed with the front wheels raised.
Towing should be carried out by a qualified
person.
●
The towline anchorage should always be
kept in the vehicle.
Front towline anchorage
Fig. 166 Towline anchorage at the front of the
vehicle
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 28
Fitting the towline anchorage
–
Take the towline anchorage from the on-
board tool set.
–
Remove the front cover by pressing down
on its left-hand side. For FR finishes, press
down and pull outwards. For the rest of the
Sport finishes, remove the cover by insert-
ing a screwdriver into the lower slot and
levering gently.
–
Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left
, in
the dir
ection of
the arrow ››› Fig. 166.
Rear towline anchorage
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 28
There is a towline anchorage at the rear on
the right below the rear bumper.
191
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
Emergency locking and
unlocking
Emergency opening of the rear lid
Fig. 167 IBIZA/IBIZA SC: Unlocking the rear
lid manually.
Fig. 168 IBIZA ST: Unlocking the rear lid man-
ually.
This allows the vehicle to be opened if the
central locking does not work (for example, if
the battery is flat)
There is a groove in the luggage compart-
ment allowing access to the emergency
opening mechanism.
Opening the rear lid from inside the luggage
compartment
–
Insert the key in the groove and unlock the
locking system, turning the key from right
to left, as shown by the arrow ››› Fig. 167
,
›
›
› Fig. 168.
Manual release of the selector lever
Fig. 169 Manual release of the selector lever.
If there is a fault in the power system to the
electronic selector lever lock system (flat bat-
tery, blown fuse) or the system itself is faulty,
the selector lever cannot be moved from po-
sition P in the normal manner, which pre-
vents the vehicle from being moved. The se-
lector lever must be unlocked using the man-
ual release.
–
Apply the handbrake.
–
Pull gently on both sides at the front of the
selector lever cover.
–
Also loosen the cover at the rear.
–
Press the yellow plastic part with your fin-
ger in the direction indicated by the arrow
››› Fig. 169
.
–
Pr
e
ss the interlock button on the selector
lever knob at the same time and move the
selector lever to position N (if the selector
lever is moved back to position P, it will
lock again).
192
Emergencies
Changing the wiper blades
Changing windscreen wiper blades
Fig. 170 Wipers in service position
Fig. 171 Changing the windscreen wiper
blade.
Perfect wiper blade condition is essential for
clear vision. Damaged wiper blades should
be replaced immediately.
To change the blades it is necessary to move
the wipers from the rest position into the
service position.
Do not change the windscreen wipers when
out of the service position, as it could cause
paint to flake off the bonnet due to friction
with the windscreen wiper arm.
Service position (for changing wiper blades)
–
Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
–
Turn the ignition on and off and then (with-
in approximately 9 seconds) push the
windscreen wiper lever down (short wipe).
The windscreen wipers will move to the
service position ››› Fig. 170
.
R
emo
ving the wiper blade
–
Lift the windscreen wiper arm.
–
Press the securing tab down
1
››› Fig. 171
.
–
Extr
act
the wiper blade from the wiper arm.
Fitting the wiper blade
–
Insert the wiper blade onto the windscreen
wiper arm until it clicks into place.
–
Place the windscreen wiper arms to their in-
itial position.
If the windscreen wipers scratch, they should
be replaced if they are damaged, or cleaned
if they are soiled.
If this does not produce the desired results,
the setting angle of the windscreen wiper
arms might be incorrect. They should be
checked by a specialised workshop and cor-
rected if necessary.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility
through all windows!
●
Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all
windows regularly.
●
The wiper blades should be changed once
or twice a year.
CAUTION
●
Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could
scratch the windscreen.
●
Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint
thinner or similar products to clean the win-
dows. This could damage the windscreen
wiper blades.
●
Never move the windscreen wiper or wind-
screen wiper arm manually. This could cause
damage.
●
To prevent damage to the bonnet and the
windscreen wiper arms, the latter should only
be lifted off the windscreen when in service
position.
»
193
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
Note
●
The windscreen wiper arms can be moved
to the service position only when the bonnet
is properly closed.
●
You can also use the service position, for
example, if you want to fix a cover over the
windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of
ice.
Changing the rear wiper blade
Fig. 172 Removing and fitting the rear win-
dow wiper blade.
Perfect rear wiper blade condition is essential
for clear rear vision. Damaged wiper blades
should be replaced immediately.
Removing the wiper blade
–
Lift the wiper arm away from the glass
–
Slide the blade adapter in the direction of
the arrow and remove the blade ››› Fig. 172
A
.
Fittin
g the w
iper blade
–
With one hand, hold the top end of the wip-
er arm.
–
Place the blade as shown in ››› Fig. 172 B
and slide the adapter along until it engag-
es.
Check the condition of the wiper blade regu-
larly. Change as required.
If the windscreen wiper scrapes, it should be
replaced if damaged, or cleaned if soiled.
If this is not sufficient, refer to a specialised
workshop.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility
through all windows!
●
Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all
windows regularly.
●
The wiper blades should be changed once
or twice a year.
CAUTION
●
A damaged or dirty window wiper could
scratch the rear window.
●
Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint
thinner or similar products to clean the win-
dow as they may damage the blades.
●
Never move the windscreen wiper by hand.
This could cause damage.
194
Fuses and bulbs
Fuses and bulbs
Fuses
Introduction
Due to the constant updating of vehicles,
fuse assignments based on equipment and
the use of the same fuse for various electrical
components, it is not possible to provide an
up-to-date summary of the fuse positions for
the electrical components at the time this
manual was printed. For detailed information
about the fuse positions, please consult a
technical service.
In general, a fuse can be assigned to various
electrical components. Likewise, an electrical
component can be protected by several
fuses.
Only replace fuses when the cause of the
problem has been solved. If a newly inserted
fuse blows after a short time, you must have
the electrical system checked by a special-
ised workshop as soon as possible.
Additional information and warnings:
●
Working in the engine compartment
›››
page 166
.
WARNING
The high voltages in the electrical system can
give serious electrical shocks, causing burns
and even death!
●
Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni-
tion system.
●
Take care not to cause short circuits in the
electrical system.
WARNING
Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or
bridging a current circuit without fuses can
cause a fire and serious injury.
●
Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only
replace fuses with a fuse of the same amper-
age (same colour and markings) and size.
●
Never repair a fuse.
●
Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple
or similar.
CAUTION
●
To prevent damage to the vehicle's electric
system, before replacing a fuse always turn
off the ignition, the lights and all electrical
elements and remove the key from the igni-
tion.
●
If you replace a fuse with higher-rating
fuse, you could cause damage to another part
of the electrical system.
●
Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-
vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can
damage the electrical system.
Note
●
One component may have more than one
fuse.
●
Several components may run on a single
fuse.
Vehicle fuses
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 25
Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same
amperage (same colour and markings) and
size.
»
195
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
Identifying fuses situated below the driver-
side dash panel by colours
Colour Amp rating
Grey 2
Purple 3
Light brown 5
Brown 7.5
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
White or trans-
parent
25
Green 30
Orange 40
CAUTION
●
Always carefully remove the fuse box cov-
ers and refit them correctly to avoid problems
with your vehicle.
●
Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid
the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humid-
ity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to
the electrical system.
Note
In the vehicle, there are more fuses than
those indicated in this chapter. These should
only be changed by a specialised workshop.
Replacing a blown fuse
Fig. 173 Image of a blown fuse
Preparation
●
Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec-
trical equipment.
●
Open the corresponding fuse box
››› page 195
.
Identif
y
ing a blown fuse
A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured
›››
Fig. 173.
Point a lamp at the fuse. This will make it
easier to see if the fuse is blown.
To replace a fuse
●
Remove the fuse.
●
Replace the blown fuse by one with an
identical amperage rating (same colour and
markings) and identical size ›››
.
●
Replace the cover again or close the fuse
box lid.
CAUTION
If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse,
you could cause damage to another part of
the electrical system.
Changing the bulbs
General notes
Before changing any bulb, first turn off the
failed device.
Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with
your bare hands. The fingerprints left on the
glass will vaporise as a result of the heat gen-
erated by the bulb, reducing bulb life and
causing condensation on the reflector sur-
face, thus reducing effectiveness.
A bulb must only be replaced by one of the
same type. The type is indicated on the bulb,
either on the glass part or on the base.
Below, the light source used for all functions
is broken down.
196
Fuses and bulbs
Double headlights
- H7 Long Life
- H7
- W5W Long Life
- PY 21W
Single headlight
- H4 Long Life
- W5W Long Life
- PY 21W
Xenon
1)
/ adaptive headlights*
- D1S
2)
- LED
3)
- LED
3)
- PY 21W
Dipped beam
Main beam
Position
Turn signal
Dipped/Main
Position
Turn signal
Dipped and full beam
Position
DRL (day light)
Turn signals
Front fog light
- H11
WARNING
●
Take particular care when working on com-
ponents in the engine compartment if the en-
gine is warm, there is a risk of burns.
●
Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The
glass can break when you touch the bulb,
causing injury.
●
The high voltage element of gas discharge
bulbs* (xenon light) must be handled correct-
ly. Otherwise, there is a risk of death.
●
When changing bulbs, please take care not
to injure yourself on sharp parts in the head-
light housing.
Fog light/cornering
CAUTION
●
Remove the ignition key before working on
the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit
could occur.
●
Switch off the lights or parking lights be-
fore you change a bulb.
For the sake of the environment
Please ask your specialist retailer how to dis-
pose of used bulbs in the proper manner.
Note
●
Depending on weather conditions (cold or
wet), the front lights, the fog lights, the tail
lights and the turn signals may be temporari-
ly misted. This has no influence on the useful
life of the lighting system. By switching on
the lights, the area through which the beam
of light is projected will quickly be demisted.
»
1)
With this type of headlight, the user can replace
the turn signal bulb. Replacement of the dip-
ped/main beam bulb must be done by Technical
Services, given that complex elements must be re-
moved from the vehicle and the automatic control
system that incorporates it must be reset.
2)
The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.5 times the light flux
and have an average lifespan of 5 times more than
that of halogen bulbs, this means that, except due to
unusual circumstances, there is no need to change
the bulbs for the whole life of the vehicle.
3)
In the event that there is a fault in the LEDs, the
complete headlight must be replaced.
197
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
However, the edges may continue to be mis-
ted.
●
Please check at regular intervals that all
lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on
your vehicle is functioning properly. This is
not only in the interest of your own safety,
but also that of all other road users.
●
Before changing a bulb, make sure you
have the correct new bulb.
●
Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with
your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel
instead. The residue left by the fingerprints
would vaporise as a result of the heat gener-
ated by the bulb, they will be deposited on
the reflector and will impair its surface.
Single headlight bulb change
Single headlight bulbs
Fig. 174 Single headlight.
Side lights - Dipped beam/main beam.
Turn signal.
Turn signal bulb
Fig. 175 Single turn signal lamp.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Turn bulb holder ››› Fig. 175
A
to the left
and pull.
–
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the
same time.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
A
B
Dipped/main beam headlights
Fig. 176 Dipped beam/main beam of the sin-
gle headlight.
Fig. 177 Dipped beam/main beam of the sin-
gle headlight.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Move the loop ››› Fig. 176
1
in the direc-
tion of the arrow and remove the cover.
–
Remove connector ››› Fig. 177
2
from the
bulb.
198
Fuses and bulbs
–
Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 177
3
pressing inwards to the right.
–
Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so
that the lug on the base fits into the recess
on the reflector.
–
Fit the connector.
–
Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure
that the gasket sits well on the casing cover
during the operation.
–
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Side light
Fig. 178 Side lights.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Move the loop ››› Fig. 176
1
in the direc-
tion of the arrow and remove the cover.
–
Remove the bulb holder
4
››› Fig. 178
out-
w
ar
ds.
–
Replace the bulb by pulling it out and in-
serting the replacement.
–
Installation is done in the reverse order.
Double headlight bulb change
Double headlight bulbs
Fig. 179 Double headlight.
Side lights
Main beam headlights
Dipped beam headlights
Turn signal lights
A
B
C
D
Side light
Fig. 180 Side lights.
Fig. 181 Side lights.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Move the loop
1
in the direction of the ar-
row and remove the cover ››› Fig. 180
.
–
R
emo
ve connector ››› Fig. 181
2
by pulling
outward.
»
199
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
–
Remove the bulb by pulling it out and fit-
ting the new one.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
–
Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure
that the gasket sits well on the casing cover
during the operation.
–
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Main beam headlight
Fig. 182 Main beam headlight.
Fig. 183 Main beam headlight.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Move the loop
1
in the direction of the ar-
row and remove the cover ››› Fig. 182
.
–
R
emo
ve connector ››› Fig. 183
2
by pulling
outward.
–
Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so
that it sits correctly into the cut-out on the
reflector.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
–
Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure
that the gasket sits well on the casing cover
during the operation.
–
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Dipped beam headlight
Fig. 184 Dipped beam headlights.
Fig. 185 Dipped beam headlights.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Move the loop ››› Fig. 184
1
in the direc-
tion of the arrow and remove the cover.
–
Remove connector ››› Fig. 185
2
from the
bulb.
200
Fuses and bulbs
–
Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 185
3
pressing inwards to the right.
–
Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so
that the lug on the base fits into the recess
on the reflector.
–
Fit the connector.
–
Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure
that the gasket sits well on the casing cover
during the operation.
–
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Turn signal lamp
Fig. 186 Turn signal light.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Turn bulb holder ››› Fig. 186
A
to the left
and pull.
–
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the
same time.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
AFS headlight bulb change
AFS headlight bulbs
Fig. 187 AFS headlight bulbs.
Turn signal lights
Xenon headlight (dipped beam/main
beam)
Changing the xenon bulb
The procedure for changing the bulb is the
same on both sides of the vehicle.
A
B
WARNING
This type of bulb should be changed at a spe-
cialised workshop.
Turn signal bulb
Fig. 188 Turn signal light.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Turn bulb holder ››› Fig. 188
A
to the left
and pull.
–
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the
same time.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
201
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
Changing the fog light bulbs
Front fog light bulb
Fig. 189 Front fog light.
Fig. 190 Front fog light.
–
Remove the bolt ››› Fig. 189
1
from the fog
light grille with a screwdriver.
–
Subsequently, remove the clips located on
the edge of the grill with gentle leverage.
–
Remove the 3 bolts ››› Fig. 190
2
to re-
move the fog light.
–
Remove the metal clip situated on the up-
per part of the fog light by pulling towards
the exterior of the vehicle ››› Fig. 190
3
.
Fog light, FR version
Fig. 191 Fog light: access to the connector
and to the light bulb holder.
–
Remove the 4 bolts
A
››› Fig. 191
from the
in
s
ide of the wheel housing and the 2 bot-
tom bolts
B
››› Fig. 191 from the bumper
with a screwdriver.
–
Pull the bumper to release it from its an-
chorages to access the connector and the
light bulb holder.
Note
Due to the difficulty of accessing fog light
bulbs, have them replaced at a Technical
Service or specialised workshop.
Remove the bulb holder
Fig. 192 Front fog light.
–
Remove connector ››› Fig. 192
1
from the
bulb.
–
Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 192
2
to the
left and pull.
–
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it counter-clockwise at
the same time.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
–
Check that the bulb works properly.
202
Fuses and bulbs
Changing the rear bulbs
Summary of LED tail lights
3 Applies to the model: IBIZA/IBIZA SC
LED
●
Brak
e lights
●
Side lights
Bulbs
●
Retro fog light
●
Reverse lights
●
Turn signal
Tail lights
3 Applies to the model: IBIZA SC
Fig. 193 Left tail light.
Fig. 194 Right tail light.
Turn signals
Side and brake
Position
Retro-fog light (left tail light)
Reverse light (right tail light)
Note
In countries driving on the right (left-driving),
both the
D
and
E
bulbs are located the oth-
er way round (Retro-fog light on driver side
and reverse light on passenger side).
A
B
C
D
E
Access to tail lights
3 Applies to the model: IBIZA/IBIZA SC
Fig. 195 Access to tail lights.
–
Open the rear lid.
–
Turn the bolt in the direction of the arrow,
by hand or with a screwdriver ››› Fig. 195
.
–
R
emo
ve the tail light, by pulling it out-
wards.
203
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
Changing the tail light bulbs
3 Applies to the model: IBIZA/IBIZA SC
Fig. 196 Changing the tail light bulbs
Fig. 197 Changing the tail light bulbs
–
Remove the connector from housing
A
›››
Fig. 195
.
–
R
emo
ve the bulb holder, separating it from
the casing. To do this, press tabs
B
in the
direction of the arrows ››› Fig. 196
.
–
When the b
u
lb holder has been removed,
press in the direction of the arrow
1
and
at the same time, turn in the direction of
the arrow
2
››› Fig. 197
Changing bulbs. LED lamps
Carry out the same operations as in lights fit-
ted with bulbs.
If necessary, remove the socket, as if it were
a bulb.
If the brake light and/or side light with LEDs
have to be replaced, the tail light must be re-
placed.
Changing the tail light bulbs
(on the side panel)
Overview of tail lights
3 Applies to the model: IBIZA ST
Tail lights on side panel Bulb lamps
●
Brake lights
●
Side lights
●
Turn signal
Tail lights on side panel LED lamps
●
Brake light (LED)
●
Side light (LED)
●
Turn signal
Accessing the side light bulbs
3 Applies to the model: IBIZA ST
Fig. 198 Lights on the side.
–
Open the rear lid.
–
Look for a lid with a grill behind the side
lights.
–
Remove the lid with a flat screwdriver, plac-
ing it in notch
A
››› Fig. 198
.
204
Fuses and bulbs
Changing bulbs
3 Applies to the model: IBIZA ST
Fig. 199 Removing the bulb holder.
–
Remove the bulb holder by pressing the
fastening clip
B
››› Fig. 199
and pulling it
outw
ar
ds.
–
Replace the faulty bulb, rotating it to the
left and outwards.
–
To refit follow the steps in reverse order,
taking special care when fitting the bulb
holder.
Changing bulbs. LED lamps
Carry out the same operations as in lights fit-
ted with bulbs.
If necessary, remove the socket, as if it were
a bulb.
If the brake light and/or side light with LEDs
have to be replaced, the tail light must be re-
placed.
Changing the tail light bulbs
(on the rear lid)
Overview of tail lights
3 Applies to the model: IBIZA ST
Lights
on the rear lid Bulb lamps
●
Reverse lights
●
Side lights
●
Fog lights
Lights on the rear lid LED lamps
●
Reverse lights
●
Side light (LED)
●
Fog lights
Accessing the rear lid lights
3 Applies to the model: IBIZA ST
Fig. 200 Lights on the boot.
–
Open the rear lid.
–
On the rear lid lining there is a lid behind
each light.
–
Remove the lid with a flat screwdriver, plac-
ing it in notch
A
››› Fig. 200
.
Ch
an
ging bulbs
3 Applies to the model: IBIZA ST
Fig. 201 Removing the bulb holder.
–
Remove the bulb holder by pressing the
fastening clips
B
››› Fig. 201
and pulling
outw
ar
ds.
–
Replace the faulty bulb, rotating it to the
left and outwards.
–
To refit follow the steps in reverse order,
taking special care when fitting the bulb
holder.
»
205
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Advice
Changing bulbs. LED lamps
Carry out the same operations as in lights fit-
ted with bulbs.
If necessary, remove the socket, as if it were
a bulb.
If the brake light and/or side light with LEDs
have to be replaced, the tail light must be re-
placed.
Changing the side and interior
bulbs
Turn signals
Fig. 202 Turn signals.
–
Press the turn signal to the left or to the
right to remove the bulb.
–
Remove the bulb holder from the turn sig-
nal.
–
Remove the failed bulb and replace with a
new bulb.
–
Insert the bulb holder in the turn signal
guide until it clicks into place.
–
First fit the turn signal in the opening in the
chassis, fastening the tabs
1
››› Fig. 202
,
and then fit
in the b
ulb as shown by the ar-
row
2
››› Fig. 202
.
Number p
l
ate light
3 Applies to the model: IBIZA/IBIZA SC
–
Insert the flat part of a screwdriver into the
special slot and remove the bulb.
–
Remove the bulb holder, by turning it until
it is free.
–
Change the bulb.
–
Replace the bulb holder, by turning it until
it fits fully.
–
Fit the light into the space and press until
you hear a “click”.
Number plate light
3 Applies to the model: IBIZA ST
Fig. 203 Remove the number plate light.
–
Insert the flat part of a screwdriver into the
special slot and remove the number plate
light from its moulding.
–
Remove the connector and extract the bulb.
After changing the bulb, fit the connector
again.
–
Place the light in its moulding, pressing the
left side. Once it is fitted into place, press
the right side until you hear a click.
206
Fuses and bulbs
Interior light and front reading lights
Fig. 204 Front reading light.
To remove the glass
–
Insert a fine screwdriver between the cas-
ing and the glass ››› Fig. 204
.
–
C
ar
efully remove the glass, levering it to
avoid possible damage.
To replace the bulbs
–
Pull the bulbs outwards.
–
To remove the central bulb, hold and press
to one side.
Assembly
–
Proceed in the reverse order, pressing gen-
tly on the outer edge of the side light.
–
First fit the glass with the fastening tabs
over the frame of the switch. Next press the
front part until the two long tabs click on
the support.
Additional brake light*
Given the difficulty involved in the replace-
ment of this light it should be done by Tech-
nical Services.
Luggage compartment light*
Fig. 205 Boot light.
Fig. 206 Boot light.
–
Remove the tulip-shaped fitting by pressing
on its inside edge (arrow) using the flat
side of a screwdriver ››› Fig. 205
.
–
Pr
e
ss the bulb sideways and remove it from
its housing ››› Fig. 206.
207
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Technical features
Important information
Important
The information in the vehicle documentation
always takes precedence over the informa-
tion in this Instruction Manual.
All technical specifications provided in this
documentation are valid for the standard
model in Spain. The vehicle data card inclu-
ded in the Maintenance Programme or the
vehicle registration documents shows which
engine is installed in the vehicle.
The figures may be different depending
whether additional equipment is fitted, for
different models, for special vehicles and for
other countries.
Abbreviations used in the technical
specifications section
Abbrevia-
tion
Meaning
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
PS
Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly used
to denote engine power.
rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
litres per
100 km
Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km (70
miles).
g/km
Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per
km (mile) travelled.
CO
2
Carbon dioxide
CN
Cetane number, indication of the diesel
combustion power.
RON
Research octane number, indication of
the knock resistance of petrol.
Vehicle identification data
Fig. 207 Vehicle data sticker (boot).
Fig. 208 Chassis number.
208
Technical features
Vehicles for certain export countries do not
have an identification plate.
Identification plate
The identification plate is located on the right
rib inside the engine compartment.
Vehicle data
The data sticker is placed on the inside of the
spare wheel well, in the boot and on the rear
cover of the Maintenance Programme.
The following information is provided on the
vehicle data sticker: ››› Fig. 207
Vehicle identification number (chassis
number)
Vehicle type, model, capacity, engine
type, finish, engine power and gearbox
type
Engine code, gearbox code, external
paint code and internal equipment code
Optional extras and PR numbers
Consumption values (l/100 km) and CO
2
emissions (g/km)
A
Urban cycle consumption
B
Out-of-town consumption
C
Combined consumption and CO
2
emissions
1
2
3
4
5
Chassis number
The vehicle identification number can be
read from outside the vehicle through a view-
er in the windscreen ››› Fig. 208
. The viewer is
loc
at
ed near the lower corner of the wind-
screen. The chassis number is printed on the
right water drain channel. The water drain
channel is located between the suspension
turret and the fender. To access the chassis
number, open the bonnet ››› page 166.
Information on fuel
consumption
Fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions
The consumption and emission details
shown on the vehicle data sticker differ from
one vehicle to another.
Vehicle fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions
appear on the vehicle data sticker in the
spare wheel well, inside the boot and on the
rear cover of the Maintenance Programme.
The fuel consumption and CO
2
emission val-
ues refer to the weight category assigned to
your vehicle according to the engine and
gearbox combination, as well as the specific
equipment fitted, and is only used to com-
pare between the different models.
The fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions do
not depend only on the performance of the
vehicle, they can also differ from the estab-
lished values depending on other factors
such as driving style, road conditions, traffic
conditions, environmental conditions, load
and number of passengers.
Calculation of fuel consumption
The consumption values have been calcula-
ted based on measurements performed or
supervised by certified CE laboratories ac-
cording to the latest version of directives
715/2007/EC and 80/1268/CEE (for more in-
formation consult the European Union Publi-
cations Office at EUR-Lex: © European Union,
http://eur-lex.europa.eu/en/index.htm) and
are valid for the kerb weight indicated for the
vehicle.
Note
In practice, and considering all the factors
mentioned here, consumption values can dif-
fer from those calculated in the current Euro-
pean regulations.
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a
fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without
optional extras. The figure quoted includes
75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver.
»
209
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Technical specifications
Special versions, optional equipment fittings
or retro-fitting accessories will increase the
weight of the vehicle ››› .
WARNING
●
Please note that the centre of gravity may
shift when transporting heavy objects; this
may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-
cident. Always adjust your speed and driving
style to suit road conditions and require-
ments.
●
Never exceed the gross axle weight rating
or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per-
missible axle load or the permissible total
weight is exceeded, the driving characteris-
tics of the vehicle may change, leading to ac-
cidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Towing a trailer
Trailer weights
Trailer weight
The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap-
proved are selected in intensive trials accord-
ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap-
proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in
the
EU
for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50
mph) (in c
ertain circumstances up to 100
km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be different
in other countries. All data in the official vehi-
cle documentation takes precedence over
these data at all times ›››
.
Drawbar loads
The
maximum
permitted drawbar load on the
b
all joint of the towing bracket must not ex-
ceed 75 kg.
In the interest of road safety, we recommend
that you always tow approaching the maxi-
mum drawbar load. The response of the trail-
er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar
load is too small.
If the maximum permissible drawbar load
cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and
light-weight single axle trailers or tandem
axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1
metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer
weight is legally required for the drawbar
load.
WARNING
●
For safety reasons, you should not drive at
speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing
a trailer. This also applies in countries where
higher speeds are permitted.
●
Never exceed the maximum trailer weights
or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle
load or the permissible total weight is excee-
ded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle
may change, leading to accidents, injuries
and damage to the vehicle.
Wheels
Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel
bolts
Tyre pressures
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can
be found on the inside of the fuel tank flap.
The tyre pressure values given there are for
cold tyres. Do not reduce the slightly raised
pre
ssures of warm tyres ›››
.
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front
wheels, and only for the following tyres:
175/70R14
185/60R15
Chains with links not exceeding 15 mm
(including the chain closure)
215/45R16 Chains with links not exceeding 9 mm
(including the chain closure)
215/40R17 Chains with links not exceeding 7 mm
(including the chain closure)
Wheel bolts
After the wheels have been changed, the
tightening torque
of the wheel bolts should
be c
hec
ked as soon as possible with a torque
wrench
›››
. The tightening torque for steel
and alloy wheels is 120
Nm.
210
Technical features
WARNING
●
Check the tyre pressure at least once per
month. Checking the tyre pressure is very im-
portant. If the tyre pressure is too high or too
low, there is an increased danger of accidents
- particularly at high speeds.
●
If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
is too low, they could loosen while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight-
ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and
threads can be damaged.
Note
We recommend that you ask your Technical
Service for information about appropriate
wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
211
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Technical specifications
Engine specifications
Petrol engine 1.2 44 kW (60 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
44 (60)/5,200 108/3,000 3/1,198 Super 95 RON
a)
/Normal 91 RON
b)
a)
Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b)
Slight power loss.
Performance IBIZA IBIZA SC IBIZA ST
Top speed (km/h) 155 (4) 155 (4) 155 (4)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 10.3 10.3 10.8
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 15.9 15.9 16.7
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,540 1,540 1,605
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,049 1,049 1,110
Gross front axle weight 820 820 835
Gross rear axle weight 770 770 820
Permitted roof load 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 520 520 550
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,000 1,000 1,000
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 800 800 800
212
Technical features
Petrol engine 1.2 51 kW (70 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
51 (70)/5,400 112/3,000 3/1,198 Super 95 RON
a)
/Normal 91 RON
b)
a)
Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b)
Slight power loss.
Performance IBIZA IBIZA SC IBIZA ST
Top speed (km/h) 163 (4) 163 (4) 163 (4)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 9 9 9.4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 13.9 13.9 14.6
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,540 1,540 1,605
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,049 1,049 1,110
Gross front axle weight 820 820 835
Gross rear axle weight 770 770 820
Permitted roof load 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 520 520 550
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,000 1,000 1,000
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 800 800 800
213
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 63 kW (85 PS) Start-Stop
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
63 (85)/4,800 160/1,500-3,500 4/1,197 Super 95 RON
a)
/Normal 91 RON
b)
a)
Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b)
Slight power loss.
Performance IBIZA IBIZA SC IBIZA ST
Top speed (km/h) 180 (5) 180 (5) 180 (5)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.4 7.4 7.7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.3 11.3 11.7
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,570 1,570 1,605
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,095 1,095 1,150
Gross front axle weight 870 870 860
Gross rear axle weight 770 770 820
Permitted roof load 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 540 540 570
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,200 1,200 1,200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,000 1,000 1,000
214
Technical features
Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (85 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
63 (85)/5,000 132/3,800 4/1,390 Super 95 RON
a)
/Normal 91 RON
b)
a)
Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b)
Slight power loss.
Performance IBIZA IBIZA SC IBIZA ST
Top speed (km/h) 177 (5) 177 (5) 177 (5)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.6 7.6 8
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.8 11.8 12.4
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,560 1,560 1,605
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,075 1,075 1,130
Gross front axle weight 840 840 835
Gross rear axle weight 770 770 820
Permitted roof load 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 530 530 560
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,200 1,200 1,200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,000 1,000 1,000
215
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 77 kW (105 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
77 (105)/5,000 175/1,550-4,100 4/1,197 Super 95 RON
a)
/Normal 91 RON
b)
a)
Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b)
With a slight power loss
Performance
IBIZA
Manual
IBIZA
Automatic
IBIZA SC
Manual
IBIZA SC
Automatic
IBIZA ST
Manual
IBIZA ST
Automatic
Top speed (km/h) 190 (5) 190 (6) 190 (5) 190 (6) 190 (5) 190 (6)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.8 6.7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.8 9.7 9.8 9.7 10.2 10
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,580 1,590 1,580 1,590 1,605 1,640
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,090 1,115 1,090 1,115 1,145 1,165
Gross front axle weight 860 890 860 890 860 880
Gross rear axle weight 770 770 770 770 820 820
Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 540 550 540 550 570 580
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200
216
Technical features
Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 77 kW (105 PS) Start-Stop
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
77 (105)/5,000 175/1,550-4,100 4/1,197 Super 95 RON
a)
/Normal 91 RON
b)
a)
Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b)
Slight power loss.
Performance IBIZA IBIZA SC IBIZA ST
Top speed (km/h) 190 (5) 190 (5) 190 (5)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.5 6.5 6.8
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.8 9.8 10.2
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,570 1,570 1,605
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,095 1,095 1,150
Gross front axle weight 870 870 860
Gross rear axle weight 770 770 820
Permitted roof load 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 540 540 570
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,200 1,200 1,200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,200 1,200 1,200
217
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.6 77 kW (105 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
77 (105)/5,600 153/3,800 4/1,598 Super 95 RON
a)
/Normal 91 RON
b)
a)
Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b)
Slight power loss.
Performance
IBIZA
Manual
IBIZA
Automatic
IBIZA SC
Manual
IBIZA SC
Automatic
IBIZA ST
Manual
IBIZA ST
Automatic
Top speed (km/h) 189 (5) 188 (6) 189 (5) 188 (6) 189 (5) 188 (6)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.8 6.9 6.8 6.9 7.1 7.1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.4 10.1 10.4 10.1 10.8 10.6
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,570 1,600 1,570 1,600 1,605 1,660
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,090 1,120 1,090 1,120 1,145 1,175
Gross front axle weight 860 890 860 890 860 890
Gross rear axle weight 770 770 770 770 820 820
Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 540 560 540 560 570 580
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
218
Technical features
Petrol engine 1.4 TSI ACT 103 kW (140 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
103 (140)/4,500-6,000 250/1,500-3,500 4/1,395 Super 95 RON
a)
/Normal 91 RON
b)
a)
Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b)
Slight power loss.
Performance IBIZA IBIZA SC IBIZA ST
Top speed (km/h) 210 (5) 210 (5) 210 (5)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.4 5.4 5.6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.8 7.8 8.1
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,630 1,630 1,680
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,167 1,167 1,222
Gross front axle weight 890 890 910
Gross rear axle weight 790 790 820
Permitted roof load 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 580 580 610
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,200 1,200 1,200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,200 1,200 1,200
219
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.4 TSI 110 kW (150 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
110 (150)/5,800 220/1,250-4,500 4/1,390 Super 95 RON
a)
/Normal 91 RON
b)
a)
Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b)
Slight power loss.
Performance IBIZA IBIZA SC IBIZA ST
Top speed (km/h) 212 (6) 212 (6) 212 (6)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.4 5.4 5.7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.6 7.6 8
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,680 1,680 1,735
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,254 1,254 1,280
Gross front axle weight 930 930 950
Gross rear axle weight 800 800 820
Permitted roof load 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 620 620 640
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,300 1,300 1,300
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,200 1,200 1,200
220
Technical features
Petrol engine 1.4 132 kW (180 PS) - Cupra
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
132 (180)/6,200 250/2,000-4,500 4/1,390 Super 95 RON
a)
/Normal 91 RON
b)
a)
Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b)
Slight power loss.
Performance IBIZA SC
Top speed (km/h) 228 (6)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 6.9
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,670
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,259
Gross front axle weight 930
Gross rear axle weight 800
Permitted roof load 75
221
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Technical specifications
Diesel engine 1.2 TDI CR 55 kW (75 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
55 (75)/4,200 180/2,000 3/1,199 Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51 CN
a)
a)
Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.
Performance
IBIZA
DPF Start&Stop
Ecomotive
IBIZA
DPF
IBIZA SC
DPF Start&Stop
Ecomotive
IBIZA SC
DPF
IBIZA ST
DPF Start&Stop
Ecomotive
IBIZA ST
DPF
Top speed (km/h) 173 (5) 168 (4) 173 (5) 168 (4) 173 (5) 168 (4)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 9.2 9.1 9.2 9.1 9.5 9.5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 13.9 13.9 13.9 13.9 14.6 14.5
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,620 1,630 1,620 1,630 1,680 1,680
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,150 1,135 1,150 1,135 1,205 1,190
Gross front axle weight 900 910 900 910 910 910
Gross rear axle weight 770 770 770 770 820 820
Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 570 560 570 560 600 590
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
222
Technical features
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 66 kW (90 PS) DPF
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
66 (90)/4,200 230/1,500-2,500 4/1,598 Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51 CN
a)
a)
Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.
Performance IBIZA
Manual gearbox
IBIZA
Automatic gear-
box
IBIZA SC
Manual gearbox
IBIZA SC
Automatic gear-
box
IBIZA ST
Manual gearbox
IBIZA ST
Automatic gear-
box
Top speed (km/h) 178 (4) 178 (6) 178 (4) 178 (6) 178 (4) 178 (6)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.8 7.8 7.8 7.8 8 8
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.8 11.6 11.8 11.6 12.2 12
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,670 1,690 1,670 1,690 1,680 1,700
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,170 1,189 1,170 1,189 1,225 1,244
Gross front axle weight 930 950 930 950 930 930
Gross rear axle weight 770 770 770 770 820 820
Permitted roof load 75 75 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 580 590 580 590 610 620
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200
223
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Technical specifications
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) with/without DPF
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
77 (105)/4,400 250/1,500-2,500 4/1,598 Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51 CN
a)
a)
Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.
Performance IBIZA IBIZA SC IBIZA ST
Top speed (km/h) 188 (5) 188 (5) 188 (5)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.9 6.9 7.3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.5 10.5 10.9
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,670 1,670 1,680
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,170 1,170 1,225
Gross front axle weight 930 930 930
Gross rear axle weight 770 770 820
Permitted roof load 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 580 580 610
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,200 1,200 1,200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,200 1,200 1,200
224
Technical features
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 105 kW (143 PS) DPF
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
105 (143)/4,200 320/1,750-2,500 4/1,968 Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51 CN
a)
a)
Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.
Performance IBIZA IBIZA SC
Top speed (km/h) 210 (5) 210 (5)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.7 5.7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.2 8.2
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,690 1,690
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,245 1,245
Gross front axle weight 950 950
Gross rear axle weight 800 800
Permitted roof load 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 620 620
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,300 1,300
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,200 1,200
225
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Technical specifications
Dimensions
Fig. 209 Dimensions
IBIZA IBIZA SC IBIZA ST
A/B Front and rear projections (mm) 857/735 857/717 857/910
C Wheelbase (mm) 2,469 2,469 2,469
D Length (mm) 4,061 4,043 4,236
E/F Front/rear
a)
track width (mm) 1,465/1,457 1,465/1,457 1,465/1,457
G Width (mm) 1,693 1,693 1,693
H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,445 1,428 1,445
Turning radius (m) 10.7 10.7 10.7
a)
This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
226
Technical features
Capacities
Capacities
Fuel tank
45 litres. Reserve 7 li-
tres.
Windscreen washer fluid
container with headlight
washer
2 l/ 4.5 l
Tyre pressure
Summer tyres:
Correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the
inside of the fuel tank flap.
Winter tyres:
The pressure of these tyres is 0.2 bar higher than that of
summer tyres (2.9 psi / 20 kPa).
227
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafetyThe essentials
Index
Index
A
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Adjusting the front seats
Adjusting the lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Adjusting the seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
AFS headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Airbags
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Head-protection airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Air conditioner
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 22, 118
Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Air recirculation
Semi-automatic air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Air recirculation mode
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Alarm system
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Alternator
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Aspects to note before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
ASR (Traction control system)
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Automatic anti-dazzle interior rear vision mirror
Activating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . . . 99
Deactivating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . 99
Automatic car washing tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 129
Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
manual release of the selector lever . . . . . . . . 192
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Automatic windscreen wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . 97
Auxiliary audio connection (AUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
B
Ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 84
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Belt pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Biodiesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Bluetooth system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
pairing the mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
user profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 167
Boot hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Boot lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 173
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 134
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 142
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Bulb defect
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Bulbs
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 123
C
Car care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Car telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 150
Central lock button
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Automatic speed-dependent locking . . . . . . . . 80
Locking system to prevent involuntary unlock-
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
229
Index
Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Changing gear
see
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Ch
an
ging gear in tiptronic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Changing the AFS headlight bulbs
xenon light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Changing the bulbs
AFS headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
double headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
fog light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
interior light and reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
single headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Changing the double headlight bulbs
dipped beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
main beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
side light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Changing the headlight bulbs
turn signal lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Changing the single headlight bulbs
dipped/main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
side light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
turn signal bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Changing the tail light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 203, 204
on the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
on the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . 193
Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Child seat
Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Cleaning alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Cleaning plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Cleaning steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Cleaning the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Cloth seat covers cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Coming Home Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Compartment for on-board documentation . . . . 104
Compatibility with mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Control
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Controlling the information system . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Controls
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
panoramic/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Controls on the column
Audio control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Convenience closing
sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Convenience opening
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 172
Coolant fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Coolant loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Coolant temperature
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Correct adjustment of front head restraints . . . . . 32
Correct sitting position
front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Cruise speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
D
Dangers in not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Dangers of using a child seat on the front pas-
senger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Daytime driving lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Daytime running lights
Nordic countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Deactivated airbags
front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Deactivation of the front passenger front airbag . 11
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Diesel engine
Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
230
Index
Differential lock fault (EDL)
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Disposal
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Double headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Driver
see
Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 30, 31, 32
Driv
e
shaft differential
XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Driving
driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Economically/with Respect for the Environ-
ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Driving Economically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Driving with Respect for the Environment . . . . . 136
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Dust filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
E
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 87
Electro-hydraulic steering
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 139
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Emission control system
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Engine
Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 167
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 166
Engine coolant
G 12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
G 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Engine coolant fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Engine fault
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Engine management
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Engine oil
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Engine oil pressure
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Environmental tip
Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 139
see also Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . 139
Exhaust gas emission control system . . . . . . . . . 135
Exterior mirror
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
F
Fabric trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Filling the fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Fog lights with cornering function . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Footwell lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Front
head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Front ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Front drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Front interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Front parking
aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . . 45
safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Front passenger front airbag
Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Front reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
231
Index
Front seat
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 209
Fuel level
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Fuel tank
Opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
see also
Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
F
uel
tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Fuel: saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 195
Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
G
Gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Gear lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Gear shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
General overview of the engine compartment . . 168
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
H
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 95
HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . . . 36
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Headlights
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
angle adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Head rests
adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
angle adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Heated exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Heated front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Heated rear window
heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 114
Heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
How to jump start description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Hydraulic Brake Assist
Automatic hazard warning lights activation . . 140
I
Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 123
Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 123
Importance of the correct adjustment of head re-
straints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Instrument and switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Interior rear vision mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
J
Jack
Mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
K
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
L
Leather cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Leaving Home Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Light
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 90
Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Load compartment in the luggage compartment
see Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . 108
Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Loading the vehicle
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 108
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Luggage net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
see also Loading the luggage compartment . 108
Lug
gage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 207
232
Index
M
Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Main beam headlights
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Manual
Release of the selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 128
Manual heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Manual heating system
Defrosting the windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Demisting the windscreen and side windows 116
MFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Interior rear vision mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Mounting points (jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Multi-function display (MFI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Memory displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
N
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
O
Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
One-touch opening and closing
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 86
Operation when a fault occurs
panoramic/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
P
Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Passenger
see
Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 30, 31, 32
P
ed
als . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Pollution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Power socket
in the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . 156, 157
PTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
With anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
With a spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Puncture repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Push To Talk (PTT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
R
Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Rear
head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Rear Assist System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Rear drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Rear fog light
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 90
Rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 62, 192
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Emergency opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Rear parking
aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Rear seats
lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Rear shelf with storage compartment
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Rear towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Rear view mirror
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Rear window automatic wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . 98
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Recommended gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
233
Index
Remote control key
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Removing and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Replacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Roll-back function
panoramic/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Roof aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Running in
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Running in tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
S
Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Safe Security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Safety information
Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . 46
Safety instructions
Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Safety notes
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Seat belt
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Seat belt cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Seat belt control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Seat belt position
for pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Seat belt protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Seat belt tensioner
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Selecting a gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Selective opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Semiautomatic air conditioning
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Single headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Sitting position
driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 210
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particu-
late filter
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Speed selector lever lock
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Start-Stop
Activating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Starting petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 125
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 125
after the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . . . . 125
Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Steam jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
right front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Sun visor
Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Switch
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Switches
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
T
Tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Tank
Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Reserve indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
The PND (portable navigation device) . . . . . . . . . 69
234
Index
Tightening the belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Tire Mobility Set
Check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Do not use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Inflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 190
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 190
Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Tow starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Traction control system
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Traction control system (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Trailer
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Trailer turn signals
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Transport
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 93
Two-way radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Tyre mobility set
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Tyre mobility system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Tyre Mobility System
See tyre mobility system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Tyre pressure control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Tyre repair set
See tyre mobility system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Tyres and wheels
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Tyres useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . 177
Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
U
Underbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 86
User profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
V
Vehicle
Raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Vehicle interior heating or cooling system . . . . . 119
Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow system
Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Vehicle modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Vehicle paintwork
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 157
Vehicle tools
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Vehicle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
W
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 57
On the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Warning messages
Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Washing tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Washing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . 158
Water in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . . . 174
Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Wearing suitable shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 210
Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 210
Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . . . 40
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 40
Windscreen defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Windscreen washer fluid
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Windscreen wiper blades
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Changing the rear wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Windscreen wipers and rear window wipers . . . . 15
235
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-
stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.14
About this manual
This manual contains a description of the
equipment supplied with the vehicle at the
time this manual was published. Some of the
units described herein will not be available
until a later date or are only available in cer-
tain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the
ALTEA range, some of the equipment and
functions that are described in this manual
are not included in all types or variants of the
model; they may vary or be modified depend-
ing on the technical requirements and on the
market; this is in no way deceptive advertis-
ing.
The illustrations are intended as a general
guide and may vary from the equipment fitted
in your vehicle in some details.
The steering indications (left, right, forward,
reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the
normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-
cept when otherwise indicated.
*
The equipment marked with an aster-
isk* is fitted as standard only in certain
versions, and is only supplied as op-
tional extras for some versions, or are
only offered in certain countries.
® All registered marks are indicated with
®. Although the copyright symbol does
not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
>> The section is continued on the follow-
ing page.
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-
mation on safety. They warn you about possi-
ble dangers of accident or injury.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to
potential sources of damage to your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-
vant information concerning environmental
protection.
Note
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-
nal information.
This manual is divided into five large parts,
which are:
1. Safety
2. Operation
3. Tips
4. Technical data
5. Alphabetical index
At the end of this manual, there is a detailed
alphabetical index that will help you quickly
find the information you require.
OWNER’S
MANUAL
Ibiza
6J0012720BC
Inglés
6J0012720BC (11.14) (GT9)
Ibiza Inglés (11.14)
